Autodesk Auto CAD For Macintosh 2012 Command Reference Guide CADmac

User Manual: autodesk AutoCAD for Macintosh - 2012 - Command Reference Guide Free User Guide for Autodesk AutoCAD Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 1582

DownloadAutodesk Auto CAD For Macintosh - 2012 Command Reference Guide CADmac
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
AutoCAD 2012 for Mac

Command Reference Guide

July 2011

©

2011 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not
be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries:
3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, Algor, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo),
ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backburner, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale,
Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design
Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG
Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Fempro, Fire, Flame, Flare,
Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT,
Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, Lustre, MatchMover, Maya,
Mechanical Desktop, Moldflow, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, MPA, MPA (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, Moldflow
Plastics Insight, MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert, Mudbox, Multi-Master Editing, Navisworks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open
Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, Pipeplus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials,
RasterDWG, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage,
Softimage|XSI (design/logo), Sparks, SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, ToolClip, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual,
Visual LISP, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo).
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 McInnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA

Contents

Chapter 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using AutoCAD for Mac Documentation .
Using This Reference . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executing Commands . . . . . . . .
References to Other Sections . . . . .

Chapter 2

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.1
.1
.1
.2
.5

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3DALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3DARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3DCONFIG (-3DCONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3DDISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3DEDITBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3DFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3DFORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3DMESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3DMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3DORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3DORBITCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3DOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

iii

3DPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3DROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3DSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3DSWIVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3DZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
A Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ACISIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ACISOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ADDSELECTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
AMECONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ANALYSISCURVATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
ANALYSISDRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ANALYSISOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ANALYSISZEBRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
ANNORESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
ANNOUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
APPLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ARRAYCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ARRAYEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
ARRAYPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
ARRAYPOLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
ARRAYRECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
ARX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ATTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ATTDISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
ATTEXT (-ATTEXT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ATTIPEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
ATTREDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
ATTSYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
AUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
AUTOCOMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
AUTOCONSTRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
B Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
BATTMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
BATTORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
BCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

iv | Contents

B ED IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
BHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
BLEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
BLIPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
BMPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
BREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
BSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
BSAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
C Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
CHAMFEREDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
CHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
CLASSICGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
CLEANSCREENON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CLEANSCREENOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
CLOSEALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
COMMANDLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
COMMANDLINEHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
CONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
CONSTRAINTBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
CONSTRAINTSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
CONTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
CONTENTCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
CONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
CONVTOMESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
CONVTONURBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
CONVTOSOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
CONVTOSURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
COPYCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
COPYHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
CUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
CUTCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
CVADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Contents | v

CVHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
CVREBUILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
CVREMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
CVSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DBLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DCALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DCANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
DCCONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
DCDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
DCDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
DCFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
DCHORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
DCLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
DCRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
DCVERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
DDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
DDPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
DELCONSTRAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
DIM and DIM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DIMALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
DIMANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
DIMARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
DIMBASELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
DIMBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
DIMCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
DIMCONSTRAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
DIMCONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
DIMDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
DIMDISASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
DIMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
DIMINSPECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
DIMJOGGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
DIMJOGLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
DIMLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
DIMORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
DIMOVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
DIMRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
DIMREASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
DIMREGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
DIMROTATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
DIMSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

vi | Contents

DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
DISTANTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
DONUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
DRAWINGRECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
DRAWINGRECOVERYHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
DRAWORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
DSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
DVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
DXBIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
E Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
EATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
EDGESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Edit PGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
ELEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
ELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
EXTEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
EXTERNALREFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
EXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
F Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
FILLETEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
FLATSHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
FREESPOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
FREEWEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
G Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
GCCOINCIDENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
GCCOLLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
GCCONCENTRIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
GCEQUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
GCFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
GCHORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
GCPARALLEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
GCPERPENDICULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
GCSMOOTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
GCSYMMETRIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
GCTANGENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Contents | vii

GCVERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . .
GEOMCONSTRAINT . . . . . . . .
GRADIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GROUPEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . .
H Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . .
HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY . .
HATCHSETBOUNDARY . . . . . .
HATCHSETORIGIN . . . . . . . .
HATCHTOBACK . . . . . . . . . .
HELIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIDEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . .
HIDEPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . .
I Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGEADJUST (-IMAGEADJUST) .
IMAGEATTACH . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGEQUALITY . . . . . . . . . .
IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMPRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFERE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOLATEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . .
ISOPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JPGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYERPMODE . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYFRZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYLCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYMCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYMCUR . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYMRG (-LAYMRG) . . . . . . .

viii | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 463
. 464
. 466
. 467
. 468
. 470
. 471
. 471
. 496
. 500
. 501
. 501
. 502
. 503
. 505
. 506
. 507
. 508
. 508
. 508
. 509
. 512
. 513
. 516
. 517
. 518
. 518
. 519
. 526
. 531
. 532
. 533
. 534
. 534
. 536
. 537
. 537
. 555
. 555
. 556
. 556
. 557
. 559
. 559
. 560
. 561

LAYOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
LAYULK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
LAYUNISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
LEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
LENGTHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
LIVESECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
LOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
LOGFILEOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
LOGFILEON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
M Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
MASSPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
MATBROWSERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
MATBROWSEROPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
MATCHCELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
MATCHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
MATERIALASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
MATERIALSCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
MEASUREGEOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
MESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
MESHCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
MESHCOLLAPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
MESHCREASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
MESHEXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
MESHMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
MESHREFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
MESHSMOOTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
MESHSMOOTHLESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
MESHSMOOTHMORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
MESHSPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
MESHSPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
MESHUNCREASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
MINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
MIRROR3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
MLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Contents | ix

MLEADERALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
MLEADERCOLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
MLEADEREDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
MLEADERSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
MLEDIT (-MLEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
MREDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
MSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
MTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
MVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
MVSETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
N Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
NAVVCUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
O Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
OBJECTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
OFFSETEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
OOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
ORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
OSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
OVERKILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
P Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
PAGESETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
PAGESETUPEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
PALETTEICONOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
PALETTEICONON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
PARAMETERS (-PARAMETERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
PASTECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
PEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
PFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
PLANESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
PNGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

x | Contents

POINTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
POLYSOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
PRESSPULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
PROJECTGEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
PROPERTIESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
PSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
PUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
PYRAMID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Q Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
QDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
QLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
QNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
QSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
QTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
QUICKVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
QUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
R Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
RAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
RECTANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
REDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
REDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
REDRAWALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
REFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
REFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
REGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
REGENALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
REGENAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
REGION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
RENDERENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
RENDEROUTPUTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
RENDERWIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
RESETBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
RESETPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
REVCLOUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

Contents | xi

REVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
REVSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
ROTATE3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
RSCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
RULESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
S Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
SAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
SAVEIMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
SCALELISTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
SECTIONPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
SECTIONPLANEJOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
SECTIONPLANESETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934
SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
SELECTSIMILAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
SHOWPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
SKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
SLICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
SOLDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
SOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
SOLIDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
SOLPROF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973
SOLVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
SPELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
SPHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
SPLINEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
SPOTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
STLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
STYLESMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
SURFBLEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
SURFEXTEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
SURFFILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

xii | Contents

SURFNETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
SURFOFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
SURFPATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
SURFSCULPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023
SURFTRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
SURFUNTRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
T Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
TABLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
TABLEEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
TABSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
TARGETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
TEXTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
TEXTTOFRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
THICKEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
TIFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
TINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
TOOLSETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
TOOLSETSCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
TORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
TRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
TREESTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
U Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
UCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072
UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
UCSMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Undocumented Command or System Variable . . . . . . 1091
UNGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
UNISOLATEOBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
UPDATEFIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
UPDATETHUMBSNOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
UPLOADTOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101
V Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
VIEWPLOTDETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
VIEWRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108

Contents | xiii

VISUALSTYLES (-VISUALSTYLES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
VPCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
VPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
VPMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
VPMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
VPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
VSCURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
VSSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
W Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
WBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
WEBLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
WEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
WHOHAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
WIPEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
X Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
XATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
XBIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
XCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
XEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
XLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
XOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
XPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
Z Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153

Chapter 3

Command Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159
Command Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) . . .
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) .
FROM (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . .
MTP (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . .
TRACKING (Command Modifier) . . . . . .
Object Snaps (Command Modifier) . . . . .
Selection Modes (Command Modifier) . . . .

Chapter 4

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1159
. 1159
. 1160
. 1160
. 1161
. 1161
. 1162
. 1163

System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165
System Variables . . . . . . . . .
3D System Variables . . . .
3DOSMODE . . . . .
3DSELECTIONMODE .
A System Variables . . . . .
ACADLSPASDOC . . .
ACADPREFIX . . . . .

xiv | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1165
. 1165
. 1165
. 1166
. 1167
. 1167
. 1167

ACADVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
ACISOUTVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
AFLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
ANGBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
ANGDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169
ANNOALLVISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
ANNOAUTOSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
ANNOTATIVEDWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
APBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
APPAUTOLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
ARRAYEDITSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
ARRAYTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
ATTDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
ATTIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
ATTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
ATTMULTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176
ATTREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
AUDITCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
AUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177
AUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
AUTOCOMPLETEDELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
AUTOCOMPLETEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
AUTOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
B System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
BACKZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
BINDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
BLIPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
BLOCKEDITLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
BLOCKEDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
BTMARKDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
C System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
CAMERADISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
CANNOSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
CANNOSCALEVALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
CCONSTRAINTFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
CDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
CECOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
CELTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
CELTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
CELWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
CENTERMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187
CETRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
CHAMFERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
CHAMFERB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189

Contents | xv

CHAMFERC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
CHAMFERD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
CHAMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
CIRCLERAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
CLASSICKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
CLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
CLEANSCREENSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
CLISTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
CMATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
CMDACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
CMDDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
CMDECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
CMDNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
CMLEADERSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
CMLJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
CMLSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
CMLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
COLORSCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
COMPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197
CONSTRAINTBARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198
CONSTRAINTINFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
CONSTRAINTRELAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
CONTENTSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
COPYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
CPLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
CPROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
CROSSINGAREACOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
CSHADOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
CTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
CTABLESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
CULLINGOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204
CULLINGOBJSELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
CURSORSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
CVPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
D System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
DBMOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
DEFAULTGIZMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
DEFAULTLIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211
DEFLPLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212

xvi | Contents

DEFPLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
DELOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
DEMANDLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
DIASTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
DIMADEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
DIMALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
DIMALTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216
DIMALTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
DIMALTRND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
DIMALTTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
DIMALTTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
DIMALTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
DIMALTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
DIMANNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
DIMAPOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220
DIMARCSYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
DIMASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
DIMASZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222
DIMATFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
DIMAUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
DIMAZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
DIMBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224
DIMBLK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226
DIMBLK2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226
DIMCEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
DIMCLRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
DIMCLRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
DIMCLRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
DIMCONSTRAINTICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
DIMDEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
DIMDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
DIMDLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230
DIMDSEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230
DIMEXE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
DIMEXO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
DIMFRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
DIMFXL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
DIMFXLON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
DIMGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
DIMJOGANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
DIMJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
DIMLDRBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
DIMLFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
DIMLIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
DIMLTEX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
DIMLTEX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236

Contents | xvii

DIMLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
DIMLUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
DIMLWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
DIMLWE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
DIMPOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
DIMRND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
DIMSAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
DIMSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
DIMSD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
DIMSD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
DIMSE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
DIMSE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
DIMSOXD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242
DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242
DIMTAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
DIMTDEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
DIMTFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
DIMTFILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
DIMTFILLCLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
DIMTIH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
DIMTIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
DIMTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
DIMTMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
DIMTOFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
DIMTOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
DIMTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
DIMTOLJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
DIMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
DIMTSZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
DIMTVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
DIMTXSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
DIMTXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
DIMTXTDIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
DIMTZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
DIMUPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
DIMZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
DISPSILH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
DIVMESHBOXHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
DIVMESHBOXLENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256
DIVMESHBOXWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
DIVMESHCONEAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
DIVMESHCONEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258
DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259

xviii | Contents

DIVMESHCYLAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260
DIVMESHCYLBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
DIVMESHPYRBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
DIVMESHPYRLENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264
DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264
DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
DIVMESHTORUSPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
DIVMESHTORUSSECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266
DIVMESHWEDGEBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
DONUTID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
DONUTOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
DRAGP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272
DRAGP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272
DRAGVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
DRAWORDERCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
DRSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
DTEXTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
DWGCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
DWGCODEPAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
DWGNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276
DWGPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276
DWGTITLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276
DYNCONSTRAINTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
DYNDIGRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277
DYNDIVIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278
DYNINFOTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
DYNMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
DYNPICOORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
DYNPIFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
DYNPIVIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
DYNPROMPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
DYNTOOLTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
E System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
EDGEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
ELEVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
ERHIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
ERRNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
ERSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
EXPERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285

Contents | xix

EXPLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286
EXTMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
EXTMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
EXTNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
F System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
FACETERDEVNORMAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
FACETERDEVSURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
FACETERGRIDRATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290
FACETERMAXGRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
FACETERMESHTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291
FACETERMINUGRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
FACETERMINVGRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
FACETERSMOOTHLEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
FACETRATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
FACETRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
FIELDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
FIELDEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
FILEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
FILLETRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
FILLETRAD3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297
FILLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
FONTALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
FONTMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
FRAMESELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
FRONTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
FULLPLOTPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
G System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
GEOMARKERVISIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
GFANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
GFCLR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
GFCLR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
GFCLRLUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
GFCLRSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
GFNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
GFSHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
GRIDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
GRIDMAJOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
GRIDMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
GRIDSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
GRIDUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
GRIPBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
GRIPCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
GRIPCONTOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

xx | Contents

GRIPDYNCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
GRIPHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
GRIPHOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
GRIPOBJLIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
GRIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
GRIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
GRIPSUBOBJMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
GRIPTIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
GROUPDISPLAYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
GROUPLAYERDELETABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
GROUPSONTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
GTAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
GTDEFAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
GTLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
H System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
HALOGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
HANDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
HELPPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
HIDEPRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
HIDETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
HIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
HPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
HPANNOTATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
HPASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319
HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
HPBOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
HPBOUNDRETAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
HPCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321
HPDLGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
HPDOUBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
HPDRAWORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
HPGAPTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
HPINHERIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
HPISLANDDETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
HPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
HPMAXAREAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
HPMAXLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
HPNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
HPOBJWARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
HPORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
HPORIGINMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328
HPQUICKPREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328
HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
HPSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329

Contents | xxi

HPSEPARATE . . . . . . . . .
HPSPACE . . . . . . . . . . .
HPTRANSPARENCY . . . . . .
I System Variables . . . . . . . . . .
ICONSIZE . . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGEFRAME . . . . . . . .
IMAGEHLT . . . . . . . . . .
IMPLIEDFACE . . . . . . . .
INDEXCTL . . . . . . . . . .
INETLOCATION . . . . . . .
INPUTHISTORYMODE . . . .
INSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSNAME . . . . . . . . . . .
INSUNITS . . . . . . . . . . .
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE . . . .
INSUNITSDEFTARGET . . . .
INTELLIGENTUPDATE . . . .
INTERFERECOLOR . . . . . .
INTERFEREOBJVS . . . . . . .
INTERFEREVPVS . . . . . . .
INTERSECTIONCOLOR . . .
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY . . .
ISAVEBAK . . . . . . . . . . .
ISAVEPERCENT . . . . . . . .
ISOLINES . . . . . . . . . . .
L System Variables . . . . . . . . .
LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT . . .
LASTANGLE . . . . . . . . . .
LASTPOINT . . . . . . . . . .
LASTPROMPT . . . . . . . . .
LATITUDE . . . . . . . . . .
LAYEREVAL . . . . . . . . . .
LAYEREVALCTL . . . . . . . .
LAYERMANAGERSTATE . . .
LAYERNOTIFY . . . . . . . .
LAYLOCKFADECTL . . . . . .
LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT .
LAYOUTREGENCTL . . . . .
LEGACYCTRLPICK . . . . . .
LENSLENGTH . . . . . . . . .
LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY . . . .
LIGHTINGUNITS . . . . . . .
LIGHTSINBLOCKS . . . . . .
LIMCHECK . . . . . . . . . .
LIMMAX . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMMIN . . . . . . . . . . . .

xxii | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1329
. 1330
. 1330
. 1331
. 1331
. 1331
. 1332
. 1332
. 1333
. 1333
. 1333
. 1334
. 1335
. 1335
. 1336
. 1338
. 1339
. 1340
. 1340
. 1341
. 1341
. 1342
. 1342
. 1343
. 1343
. 1343
. 1343
. 1344
. 1344
. 1345
. 1345
. 1345
. 1346
. 1347
. 1347
. 1348
. 1349
. 1350
. 1351
. 1352
. 1352
. 1352
. 1353
. 1353
. 1354
. 1354

LINEARBRIGHTNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
LINEARCONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
LOCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
LOCALROOTPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
LOFTANG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
LOFTANG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
LOFTMAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
LOFTMAG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
LOFTNORMALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
LOFTPARAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
LOGEXPCONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
LOGEXPDAYLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
LOGEXPMIDTONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
LOGFILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
LOGFILENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
LOGFILEPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
LOGINNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
LONGITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
LUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
LUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
LWDEFAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
LWDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
LWUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
M System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
MATBROWSERSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
MAXACTVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
MAXSORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
MBUTTONPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
MEASUREINIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
MENUECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
MENUNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
MESHTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
MIRRHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370
MIRRTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370
MLEADERSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
MSLTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
MTEXTCOLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
MTEXTFIXED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
MTJIGSTRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
N System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
NAVVCUBEDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374

Contents | xxiii

NAVVCUBELOCATION . . . . . . .
NAVVCUBEOPACITY . . . . . . . .
NAVVCUBEORIENT . . . . . . . .
NAVVCUBESIZE . . . . . . . . . .
NOMUTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NORTHDIRECTION . . . . . . . .
O System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . .
OBJECTISOLATIONMODE . . . . .
OBSCUREDCOLOR . . . . . . . . .
OBSCUREDLTYPE . . . . . . . . .
OFFSETDIST . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFFSETGAPTYPE . . . . . . . . . .
OPMSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOMODE . . . . . . . . . . .
OSMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSNAPCOORD . . . . . . . . . . .
OSNAPNODELEGACY . . . . . . .
OSNAPZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .
P System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . .
PALETTEICONSTATE . . . . . . . .
PAPERSPACEVISOR . . . . . . . . .
PAPERUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERCOPYMODE . . . . .
PDMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PEDITACCEPT . . . . . . . . . . .
PELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERIMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERSPECTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERSPECTIVECLIP . . . . . . . . .
PFACEVMAX . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICKADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICKAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICKBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICKDRAG . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICKFIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICKSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLATFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLINECONVERTMODE . . . . . . .
PLINEGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLINEWID . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLOTOFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLOTROTMODE . . . . . . . . . .
PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE .

xxiv | Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 1375
. 1375
. 1376
. 1376
. 1377
. 1377
. 1378
. 1378
. 1378
. 1379
. 1380
. 1381
. 1381
. 1382
. 1382
. 1383
. 1384
. 1384
. 1385
. 1386
. 1386
. 1386
. 1387
. 1387
. 1388
. 1389
. 1389
. 1390
. 1390
. 1390
. 1391
. 1391
. 1392
. 1392
. 1393
. 1393
. 1394
. 1394
. 1395
. 1395
. 1396
. 1396
. 1397
. 1397
. 1398
. 1398

PLQUIET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
POLARADDANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
POLARANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
POLARDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
POLARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
POLYSIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
POPUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
PREVIEWEFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
PREVIEWFACEEFFECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
PREVIEWFILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
PREVIEWTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
PROJECTNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
PROJMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
PROXYGRAPHICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
PROXYNOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
PROXYSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
PROXYWEBSEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
PSLTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
PSOLHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
PSOLWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
PSTYLEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
PSTYLEPOLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410
PSVPSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
PUCSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Q System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
QTEXTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
R System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
RASTERDPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
RASTERPERCENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
RASTERPREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
RASTERTHRESHOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
REBUILD2DCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
REBUILD2DDEGREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
REBUILD2DOPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
REBUILDDEGREEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
REBUILDDEGREEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
REBUILDOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
REBUILDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
REBUILDV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
RECOVERAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
REFEDITNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
REGENMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
RE-INIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419

Contents | xxv

REMEMBERFOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
RENDERUSERLIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
REPORTERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
RTDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
S System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
SAVEFIDELITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
SAVEFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
SAVEFILEPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
SAVENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
SAVETIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
SCREENSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
SELECTIONANNODISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
SELECTIONAREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
SELECTIONAREAOPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
SELECTIONCYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
SELECTIONPREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
SELECTSIMILARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
SHADEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
SHADEDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
SHADOWPLANELOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
SHORTCUTMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
SHORTCUTMENUDURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
SHOWALLUSEDLAYERSGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
SHOWEMPTYGROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430
SHOWGROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
SHOWHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
SHOWPALETTESTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
SHOWUNRECONCILEDLAYERSGROUP . . . . . . . . . . 1433
SHOWVPOVERRIDESGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
SHOWXREFGROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
SHOWXREFLAYERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
SHPNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
SIGWARN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
SKETCHINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
SKPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
SKTOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
SKYSTATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436
SMOOTHMESHCONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
SMOOTHMESHGRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438
SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
SNAPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
SNAPBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
SNAPISOPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440

xxvi | Contents

SNAPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
SNAPSTYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
SNAPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
SNAPUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
SOLIDCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
SOLIDHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
SORTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
SPACEPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
SPACEPANTIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
SPLDEGREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
SPLFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
SPLINESEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
SPLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
SPLKNOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
SPLMETHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447
SPLPERIODIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448
STATUSBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1449
SUNSTATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1451
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
SURFACEAUTOTRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
SURFACEMODELINGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
SURFTAB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
SURFTAB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
SURFTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
SURFU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
SURFV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455
SYSCODEPAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
T System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
TABLEINDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456
TARGET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
TBSHOWSHORTCUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
TDCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457
TDINDWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
TDUCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
TDUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
TDUSRTIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
TDUUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
TEMPOVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
TEMPPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
TEXTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
TEXTEVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
TEXTFILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
TEXTQLTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462

Contents | xxvii

TEXTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
TEXTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
TILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
TOOLSETSSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
TOOLTIPMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
TOOLTIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
TRACKPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
TREEDEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
TREEMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472
TRIMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
TSPACEFAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473
TSPACETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
TSTACKALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
TSTACKSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
U System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
UCS3DPARADISPLAYSETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
UCS3DPERPDISPLAYSETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
UCSAXISANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
UCSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477
UCSDETECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478
UCSFOLLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478
UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479
UCSNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479
UCSORG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480
UCSORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480
UCSSELECTMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
UCSVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
UCSVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
UCSXDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482
UCSYDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482
UNDOCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
UNDOMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
UNITMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
UPDATETHUMBNAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
USERI1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
USERR1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
USERS1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
V System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
VIEWCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
VIEWDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
VIEWMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487

xxviii | Contents

VIEWSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487
VIEWTWIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
VISRETAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
VPCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
VPCOORDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
VPLAYEROVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490
VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490
VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
VPROTATEASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491
VSACURVATUREHIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492
VSACURVATURELOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492
VSACURVATURETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492
VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1493
VSADRAFTANGLELOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
VSAZEBRACOLOR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
VSAZEBRACOLOR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
VSAZEBRADIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
VSAZEBRASIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496
VSAZEBRATYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1496
VSBACKGROUNDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
VSEDGECOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1497
VSEDGEJITTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498
VSEDGELEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1499
VSEDGEOVERHANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500
VSEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500
VSEDGESMOOTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
VSFACECOLORMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1502
VSFACEHIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
VSFACEOPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
VSFACESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1504
VSHALOGAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
VSHIDEPRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1505
VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506
VSINTERSECTIONEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506
VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507
VSISOONTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1508
VSLIGHTINGQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
VSMATERIALMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509
VSMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
VSMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1510
VSMONOCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
VSOBSCUREDCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
VSOBSCUREDEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
VSOBSCUREDLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
VSOCCLUDEDCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
VSOCCLUDEDEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515

Contents | xxix

VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516
VSSHADOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518
VSSILHEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518
VSSILHWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520
VTDURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520
VTENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
VTFPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
W System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
WHIPARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
WINDOWAREACOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
WORLDUCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
WORLDVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
WRITESTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
X System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
XCLIPFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
XDWGFADECTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1525
XEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526
XFADECTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1526
XLOADCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
XLOADPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
XREFCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
XREFNOTIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
XREFSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
XREFTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
Z System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
ZOOMFACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
ZOOMWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1530

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531

xxx | Contents

Introduction

1

Introduction
The Command Reference, a comprehensive guide to AutoCAD for Mac®
commands, lists all AutoCAD for Mac commands in alphabetical order.
In addition to the command listings, the Command Reference covers several
topics in the appendixes: command aliases, system variables, dimension
variables, utilities, standard libraries, graphical database objects, and Unicode
fonts.

Using AutoCAD for Mac Documentation
In addition to this Command Reference, several other resources are available to
help you learn and use AutoCAD for Mac. The complete documentation set for
AutoCAD for Mac is online. You can access it from the Help menu.
NOTE For the latest documentation corrections and additions, refer to the Readme
file.

Using This Reference
The Command Reference provides detailed information on all commands,
command options, and system variables. The explanations reflect the default
AutoCAD for Mac system variable settings and the default prototype drawing.
If you change system variable settings, the prompts on your screen might differ
from what you see here. For example, the setting of the FILEDIA (page 1296)

1

system variable governs whether you work in a dialog box or at the command
prompt when you use certain commands. See appendix B, “System Variables”.

Executing Commands
The process of executing a command begins by starting the command, using
one of several methods. For some commands, such as REGEN (page 877) , no
further action is required. For other commands, you must respond by providing
additional information or actions in order to complete the command.
As you work with commands, note that right-clicking in the drawing area
either acts as Enter or displays a shortcut menu. You can control this behavior
in the Application Preferences dialog box or with the SHORTCUTMENU (page
1429) system variable.

Starting Commands
You can start a command by doing one of the following:
■ Select the command from a menu, tool set, status bar, or shortcut menu.
■

Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt
and press ENTER or SPACEBAR.

In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description
is a command access section, listing the specific ways you can start that
command. For example, following is the command access section for the PAN
(page 763) command:
Menu: View ➤ Pan ➤ Realtime
Toolbar: Status bar
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Pan.
Command entry: pan (or 'pan for transparent use)
The availability of certain shortcut menus depends on the current setting of
the SHORTCUTMENU (page 1429) system variable. The instructions in the
command access sections assume that you have made the indicated menu
available.
You can exit a command at any time by pressing ESC.

2 | Chapter 1 Introduction

Using Transparent Commands
In many cases, you can start a command while using another command. The
command you start is called a transparent command. For example, to turn
on the grid while drawing a line, you can start the GRID (page 467) command
transparently by preceding the command with an apostrophe. Two right angle
brackets (>>) precede prompts for transparent commands.
Command: line
Specify first point: 'grid
>>Specify grid spacing(X) or
[ON/OFF/Snap/Major/aDaptive/Limits/Follow/Aspect] :
on
Resuming LINE command
Specify first point:
In the Command Reference, the command access sections identify commands
that you can use transparently.

Suppressing Dialog Boxes
Many commands provide both command prompt and dialog box interfaces.
In most cases, when both a command prompt and dialog box interface are
available, the command prompt version is preceded with a hyphen character.
For example, the command prompt version of ATTDEF (page 106) is -ATTDEF.
You can also control the display of file dialog boxes through the FILEDIA
(page 1296) system variable. See appendix B, “System Variables”.

Responding to Prompts
If a command does not immediately execute, AutoCAD for Mac either displays
a dialog box or displays command prompts requesting more information.
Command prompts are structured as follows:
Command: commandname
Current settings: Setting1 Setting2 Setting3
Instructional text [Option1/oPtion2/opTion3/...] :
The optional current value line displays the current settings for the command
or for system variables related to the command. The succeeding prompts
identify the type of input required to complete the command and, when
applicable, list the available options in straight brackets and a default option
or value in angle brackets. In some cases, AutoCAD for Mac determines default

Introduction | 3

options and values based on the option or value that you last specified, or
based on the settings of certain system variables.
Typically, the first word of a prompt indicates the type of action you can take.
Most command prompts begin with the wordenter, select, or specify. These
words indicate how you can respond to the prompt.
Terminology in command prompts
If the prompt starts with...

You can...

Select

Select objects on the screen using your pointing
device.

Enter

Enter text at the command prompt.

Specify

Use your pointing device or enter text at the
command prompt to select a point location on
the screen.

Selecting Options at the Command Prompt
To select one of the options contained within the straight brackets, you can
enter the entire option name or only the capitalized letters, and then press
Enter or Spacebar. To select the default option enclosed in angle brackets (<>),
if available, press Enter or Spacebar.
You can also choose command options from a shortcut menu by right-clicking
in the drawing area while the command is active. The options available at the
command prompt appear in the shortcut menu. For information about how
to enable or disable this shortcut menu, see “Shortcut Menus” in the User's
Guide .

Entering Data at the Command Prompt
Some prompts ask you to enter data, rather than (or as an alternative to)
choosing an option. To do so, enter the text at the command prompt and
press Enter or Spacebar. However, be aware that when the command prompt
requests an object name, Spacebar inserts a space at the command prompt
rather than acting as Enter. This allows for the support of extended symbol
names.
Just as default command options are often provided, prompts may include
default values, enclosed in angle brackets (<>), when data is requested. For

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

example, the POLYGON (page 821) command displays the following prompt,
suggesting 4 as the number of sides for your polygon:
Command: polygon
Enter number of sides <4>:
To accept the default value, press Enter or Spacebar.

Using Wild-Card Characters at the Command Prompt
When the prompt directions ask for a name list, such as a block name, variable
name, named view, and so on, you can use wild-card characters to specify
names. See the table in “Filter and Sort the List of Layers” in the User's Guide.

Repeating Commands
If no command is active, you can repeat the previous command by pressing
Enter or Spacebar or by right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing the
Repeat Command Name option from the shortcut menu.

Accessing Recently Used Commands
You can access the six most recently used commands from a shortcut menu
by right-clicking in the command window and choosing Recent Commands.

References to Other Sections
At the end of most command descriptions, you'll find a section called “See
Also.” This section includes references to chapters in other AutoCAD for Mac
guides and other AutoCAD for Mac commands and system variables related
to the current command.

Introduction | 5

6

Commands

2

Commands
You can start a command by using one of the following methods:
■ Click the command name on a menu, status bar, or shortcut menu.
■

Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and
press Enter or Spacebar.

The acad.pgp file lists the command aliases.
To access the acad.pgp, on the Tools menu, click Customize ➤ Edit Command
Aliases (PGP).
In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description
is a command access section that lists the specific ways you can start that
command.

3D Commands
3D
Creates 3D polyface mesh objects in common geometric shapes that can be
hidden, shaded, or rendered.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

7

Enter an option [Box (page ?)/Cone (page ?)/DIsh (page
?)/DOme (page ?)/Mesh (page ?)/Pyramid (page ?)/Sphere
(page ?)/Torus (page ?)/Wedge (page ?)]:

Box
Creates a 3D box polyface mesh.
Corner of Box Sets the first corner of the box.
Length of Box Sets the first corner of the box.

Width
Specifies the width of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to
the corner point of the box.

Height of Box Specifies the height of the box. Enter a distance or specify a
point relative to the corner point of the box.

Rotation Angle Rotates the box about the first corner specified. If you enter
0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes.
Copy Creates a rotated copy of the box.

8 | Chapter 2 Commands

Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an
angle you specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box.
■ Reference Angle:Defines a reference angle by specifying two points or
an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the
box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object.
After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to
align with. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the
angle of rotation specified for the reference angle.
If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle determines the rotation
of the box.
■

New Angle:
Specify a point relative to the base point. The base point for the rotation
is the first corner of the box. The box rotates by the angle between the
reference angle and the new angle. If you want to align the box with
another object, specify two points on the target object to define the new
angle of rotation for the box.
If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the angular distance
entered relative to the first corner of the box.

Cube
Creates a cube using the length for the width and height of the box.

Center Point for Base
Radius for Base
Radius for Top
Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle
or enter r
Rotation Angle Rotates the cube about the first corner of the box. If you enter
0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes.
Copy Creates a rotated copy of the cube.
Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an
angle you specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box.

Commands | 9

Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an angle, or press Enter
You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from
the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two
specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a
reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with. The box
then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified
for the reference angle.
If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone determines the rotation
of the box.
Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle
To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point relative to the base point.
The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates
the angular distance between the reference angle and the new angle. If you
want to align the box with another object, specify two points on the target
object to define the new angle of rotation for the box.
If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the angular distance
entered relative to the first corner point of the box.

Cone
Creates a cone-shaped polygon mesh.

Specify center point for base of cone: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius for Base
Defines the base of the cone by its radius.
Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or
press Enter

10 | Chapter 2 Commands

Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0 produces
a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.
Specify height of cone: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than
1 or press Enter
Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0
produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.
Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance or press Enter
Specify height of cone: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than
1 or press Enter

Diameter for Base
Defines the base of the cone by its diameter.
Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance
Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or
press Enter

Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0 produces
a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.
Specify height of cone: Specify a distance

Commands | 11

Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than
1 or press Enter
Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0
produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.
Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance
Specify height of cone: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than
1 or press Enter

Dish
Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Specify center point of dish: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of dish or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius Defines the dish by its radius.
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish <16>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish <8>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter
Diameter Defines the dish by its diameter.
Specify diameter of dish: Specify a distance
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish <16>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish <8>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter

Dome
Creates the upper half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Specify center point of dome: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of dome or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius Defines the dome by its radius.

12 | Chapter 2 Commands

Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome: Enter a value greater
than 1 or press Enter
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter
Diameter Defines the dome by its diameter.
Specify diameter of dome: Specify a distance
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome <16>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter

Mesh
Creates a planar mesh whose M and N sizes determine the number of lines
drawn in each direction along the mesh. The M and N directions are similar
to the X and Y axes of an XY plane.
Specify first corner point of mesh: Specify a point (1)
Specify second corner point of mesh: Specify a point (2)
Specify third corner point of mesh: Specify a point (3)
Specify fourth corner point of mesh: Specify a point (4)
Enter mesh size in the M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
Enter mesh size in the N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256

Commands | 13

Pyramid
Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron.
Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1)
Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2)
Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3)
Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a
point (4) or enter t

Fourth Corner Point
Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid.
Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify a point (5) or enter an
option
The Z value of the point specified determines the height for the pyramid's
apex, top, or ridge line.
Apex Point Defines the top of the pyramid as a point (apex).
Ridge Defines the top of the pyramid as a ridge line. The two endpoints must
lie in the same direction as the base points to prevent a self-intersecting
wireframe.
Specify first ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (1)
Specify second ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (2)

14 | Chapter 2 Commands

Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. If the top points cross, they
create a self-intersecting polygon mesh.
Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point
Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point
Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point
Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point

Tetrahedron
Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh.
Specify apex point of tetrahedron or [Top]: Specify a point or enter t
Apex Point Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a point (apex).
Top Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a triangle. If the top points cross,
they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh.
Specify first corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (1)
Specify second corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (2)
Specify third corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (3)

Sphere
Creates a spherical polygon mesh.
Specify center point of sphere: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius Defines the sphere by its radius.
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a
value greater than 1 or press Enter

Commands | 15

Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter

Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter.
Specify diameter of sphere: Specify a distance
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a
value greater than 1 or press Enter
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter

Torus
Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current
UCS.
Specify center point of torus: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
The radius of the torus is measured from its center point to its outside edge,
not to the center of the tube.

Radius of Torus
Radius Defines the torus by its radius.

16 | Chapter 2 Commands

Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Diameter of Torus
Defines the torus by its diameter.

Specify diameter of torus: Specify a distance
Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Radius of Tube
Defines the tube by its radius.
Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter
Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter
The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to
the outside edge of the tube.

Diameter of Tube
Defines the tube by its diameter.
Specify diameter of tube: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter

Commands | 17

Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value
greater than 1 or press Enter

Wedge
Creates a right-angle, wedge-shaped polygon mesh with a sloped face tapering
along the X axis.
Specify corner point of wedge: Specify a point (1)
Specify length of wedge: Specify a distance
Specify width of wedge: Specify a distance
Specify height of wedge: Specify a distance
Specify rotation angle of wedge about the Z axis: Specify an angle
The base point for the rotation is the corner point of the wedge. If you enter
0, the wedge remains orthogonal to the current UCS plane. Enter c to create
a rotated copy of the wedge.

See also:
Create Custom Mesh (Legacy)

3DALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Align
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ 3D Align

18 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
You can specify one, two, or three points for the source object. Then, you can
specify one, two, or three points for the destination.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Select the objects to align and press Enter
Specify source plane and orientation . . .
The selected object is moved and rotated so that the base points, and the X
and Y axes of the source and destination align in 3D space. 3DALIGN works
with dynamic UCS (DUCS), so you can dynamically drag the selected objects
and align them with the face of a solid object.
Specify base point or [Copy]: Specify a point or enter c to create a copy
The base point of the source object will be moved to the base point of the
destination.
Specify second point or [Continue] : Specify a point on the object’s
X axis, or press Enter to skip forward to specifying destination points
The second point specifies a new X axis direction within a plane parallel to
the XY plane of the current UCS. If you press Enter instead of specifying a
second point, the X and Y axes are assumed to be parallel with the X and Y
axes of the current UCS.
Specify third point or [Continue] : Specify a point on the object’s
positive XY plane, or press Enter to skip forward to specifying destination points
The third point fully specifies the orientation of the X and Y axes of the source
object that will be aligned with the destination plane.
Specify destination plane and orientation . . .
Specify first destination point: Specify a point
This point defines the destination of the base point of the source object.

Commands | 19

Specify second source point or [eXit] : Specify a point for the X
axis of the destination or press Enter
The second point specifies a new X axis direction for the destination within
a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. If you press Enter instead
of specifying a second point, the X and Y axes of the destination are assumed
to be parallel with the X and Y axes of the current UCS.
Specify third destination point or [eXit] : Specify a point for
the destination’s positive XY plane, or press Enter
The third point fully specifies the orientation of the X and Y axes of the
destination plane.
NOTE
If the destination is a plane on an existing solid object, you can define the
destination plane with a single point by turning on dynamic UCS.
See also:
Align Objects

3DARRAY
Maintains legacy behavior for creating nonassociative, 3D rectangular or polar
arrays.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Array
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ 3D Array

Summary
3DARRAY functionality has been replaced with the enhanced ARRAY (page
86) command, which allows you to create associative or nonassociative, 2D
or 3D, rectangular, path, or polar arrays. 3DARRAY maintains legacy behavior.

20 | Chapter 2 Commands

For 3D rectangular arrays, in addition to columns and rows, you also specify
the number of levels in the Z direction. For 3D polar arrays, you specify the
axis of rotation with any two points in space.

The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter type of array [Rectangular (page ?)/Polar (page ?)]
: Enter an option or press Enter

Rectangular Array
Copies objects in a matrix of rows (X axis), columns (Y axis), and levels (Z
axis). An array must have at least two rows or two columns or two levels.
Specifying one row requires that more than one column be specified, and vice
versa. Specifying one level creates a two-dimensional array.
Positive values generate the array along the positive X, Y, and Z axes. Negative
values generate the array along the negative X, Y, and Z axes.

Commands | 21

Polar Array
Copies objects about an axis of rotation.
The specified angle determines how far the objects are arrayed about the axis
of rotation. A positive number produces a counterclockwise array rotation. A
negative number produces a clockwise array rotation.
Entering y or pressing Enter rotates each array element.

See also:
Array Objects

3DCONFIG (-3DCONFIG)
Sets options that affect 3D display performance.

Summary
Enter -3dconfig at the Command prompt to use this command.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter option [Dynamic tessellation (page ?)/General options
(page ?)/acceLeration (page ?)/Plot emulation (page
?)/eXit] :

Dynamic Tessellation
Sets the options that determine the smoothness of the objects in a drawing.
Objects are drawn using many short lines (or triangles when drawing spheres).
These lines are called tessellation lines. Objects in your drawing appear smoother
when you use more tessellation lines.

22 | Chapter 2 Commands

Surface Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for surfaces in your
drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines
and more memory.
Curve Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for curves in your
drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines
and more memory.
Number of Tessellations to Cache Configures your system according to
memory and performance requirements. The 3D cache always stores at least
one tessellation. When this option is set to 1, the tessellation for all viewports
is the same; some objects in the drawing may be regenerated as you zoom in
and out. Setting this option to 2 or more is useful when you have more than
one viewport with different views. Increasing the number requires more
memory.

General Options
Sets performance-related options that are not hardware dependent.
Discard Back Faces Discards back faces when drawing objects. You cannot
see the effect of discarding back faces on some objects, such as spheres, because
you cannot see the back face even when it is present. The effect of discarding
back faces is visible on objects such as those that don't have a top. Discarding
back faces enhances performance.
Transparency Quality Adjusts the transparency quality. At the Low setting,
a screen-door effect achieves transparency without sacrificing speed. At the
Medium setting, the default in software mode, blending improves image
quality. The High setting, the default in hardware mode, produces an image
free of visual artifacts at the cost of drawing speed. Materials must also be
turned on for transparency to be visible.
The General Options prompt is redisplayed.

Acceleration
Specifies whether to use software or hardware acceleration in 3D.
If you select Hardware, you can also specify whether geometry acceleration
are turned on or off.
Hardware Specifies hardware acceleration. The hardware graphics card
performs most of the drawing tasks in 3D to increase performance.
■ Driver Name. You can select a driver from a list of available
hardware-accelerated drivers found in the Drv directory. If you want to use
®
a hardware driver from another vendor, it must be supported by the Heidi
Graphics System.

Commands | 23

■

■

Enhanced 3D Performance. Enables a more efficient use of the
graphic card when working with 3D objects.
NOTE
If you experience problems with precision, turn this option off.

■

Smooth display. Controls the status of the full screen anti-aliasing
effect. This option removes the jagged effect on the display of diagonal
line and curved edges.

■

Advanced material effects. Controls the status of the advanced
materials effect on screen.

■

Gooch hardware shader. Enables the use of Gooch shading. With
this option on the details of a 3D object are shown by softening the
contrast between lighted areas and shadowed areas by using warm and
cool colors as a substitute to light and dark colors.

■

Per-pixel lighting. Enables the computation of colors for individual
pixels. With this option on the 3D objects and lighting effects appear
smoother in the viewport.

■

Full shadow display. Enables shadows to be displayed in the
viewport.
NOTE
Enhanced 3D performance effect must be turned on.

■

Texture compression. Enables the use of texture compression to
reduce the amount of video memory required to open and display a
drawing that contains materials with images or has attached images.
NOTE
With this option turned on, the time it takes to load the images might
increase the first time that they are accessed, and there is a reduction
in the quality of the images when they are displayed in the viewport
or plotted.

Software Feature is not supported and is provided for scripting compatibility
only.

Plot Emulation
Feature is not supported and is provided for scripting compatibility only.

24 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Control Performance

3DDISTANCE
Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Camera ➤ Adjust Distance
Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing
area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Adjust Distance (4).

Summary
3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and
one pointing down. Click and drag the cursor vertically toward the top of the
screen to move the camera closer to the objects, making them appear larger.
Click and drag the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the screen to move
the camera away from the objects, making them appear smaller.
See also:
Use 3D Navigation Tools

3DEDITBAR
Reshapes splines and NURBS surfaces, including their tangency properties.

Summary
Several grips are available for moving a point and changing the magnitude
and direction of tangents at specific points on splines, and in the U, V , and
W directions on NURBS surfaces.

Commands | 25

The Grips on the Gizmo
The 3D Edit Bar gizmo includes three grips:
■ Triangle grip. Specifies the method for reshaping the selected object.

■

Square grip. Reshapes the selected object by moving the base point or
changing the tangent direction at the base point. Use the three axes to
restrict the movement option to a specified axis. Similarly, the three squares
that touch the square grip restrict the movement option to the specified
planes.

26 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

Tangent arrow grip. Changes the magnitude of the tangent at the base point.
For example, lengthening the tangent arrow grip flattens the curvature of
the surface at the point of tangency. The tangent arrow points in the
direction of one of the surface’s U, V, or W axes, depending on the tangent
direction specified in 3D Edit Bar Shortcut Menu (page 29).

Commands | 27

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select a NURBS surface or curve to edit Specifies the object to be modified.
Valid objects include lines, arcs, circles, ellipses and elliptical arcs, polylines,
helixes, splines, and NURBS surfaces. Objects other than surfaces can be
converted to splines.
Select point on curve or Select point on NURBS surface Specifies a base point
on the selected curve or NURBS surface. Changes to the selected object are
relative to this point.
Base point Specifies a new base point on the curve or NURBS surface.
Displacement Specifies a new base point by projecting the absolute coordinates
entered onto the selected curve or surface, when possible.
Undo Cancels the previous change without exiting the command.
Exit Cancels the current operation and returns to the previous prompt, or it
exits the command.

28 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Modify Splines
Edit NURBS Surfaces

3D Edit Bar Shortcut Menu
Displays options to set the location of the base point, constraints, and
tangency.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click on the 3D Edit Bar gizmo.

Summary
The 3D Edit Bar shortcut menu displays several options depending on whether
a spline or a NURBS surface is selected, where you click, and which editing
method, move or tangent, is current.
The illustration displays an imaginary UV plane in yellow that is tangent to
the surface, and contains the base point. It displays the U axis in red, the V
axis in green, and W axis, which is normal to the surface, in blue.

NOTE By default, the orientation of the 3D Edit Bar gizmo is aligned with the
World Coordinate System, but its alignment can be changed using the shortcut
menu. To align the axes with the U, V, and W axes of a NURBS surface, choose
Align Gizmo With > Object.

Commands | 29

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Move Point Location Reshapes the selected object by moving the base point.
Move Tangent Direction Reshapes the selected object by changing the slope
of the tangent at the base point.
U Tangent Direction Locates the tangent arrow grip on the U axis. Changes
to the tangency are constrained to the UW plane.
V Tangent Direction Locates the tangent arrow grip on the V axis. Changes
to the tangency are constrained to the VW plane.
Normal Tangent Direction Locates the tangent arrow grip on the W axis,
which is normal to the surface at the base point. Changes to the tangency are
constrained to the UW plane.
Set Constraint Sets whether the change in tangency or point location is
constrained to a specific axis or major plane.
■ X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the specified World Coordinate System
(WCS) axis.
■

XY, YZ, or XZ. Restricts the change to the specified World Coordinate
System (WCS) plane.

Relocate Base Point Specifies a new base point on the curve or NURBS surface.
Align Gizmo With Reorients the gizmo to align with the WCS or UCS, or
with a selected face or object.
See also:
Modify Splines
Edit NURBS Surfaces

3DFACE
Creates a three-sided or four-sided surface in 3D space.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ 3D Face

30 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
After entering the last two points for a 3D face, the command repeats
automatically using the these two points as the first two points of the next
3D face. For example:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first point (page 31) or [Invisible (page 31)]: Specify
a point (1) or enter i
First Point Defines the start point for the 3D surface. After entering the first
point, enter the remaining points in a natural clockwise or counterclockwise
order to create a normal 3D face. If you locate all four points on the same
plane, a planar face is created that is similar to a region object. When you
shade or render the object, planar faces are filled.
Invisible Controls which edges of a 3D face are visible, allowing for accurate
modeling of objects with holes. Entering i or invisible before the first point
of an edge makes the edge invisible.
The invisible specification must precede any object snap modes, XYZ filters,
or coordinate input for that edge. You can create a 3D face in which all edges
are invisible. Such a face is a phantom; it does not appear in wireframe
presentations but can hide material in line drawings. 3D faces do appear in
shaded renderings.
You can combine 3D faces to model complex 3D surfaces.

Commands | 31

Specify second point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (2) or enter i
Specify third point or [Invisible] : Specify a point (3), enter
i, or press Enter
Specify fourth point or [Invisible] :
Specify a point (4), enter i, or press Enter
The Third Point and Fourth Point prompts are repeated until you press Enter.
Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. When you finish entering
points, press Enter.

See also:
Create Custom Mesh (Legacy)

3DFORBIT
Rotates the view in 3D space without constraining roll.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Orbit ➤ Free Orbit
Pointing device: Press Shift-Ctrl and click the mouse wheel to temporarily
enter 3DFORBIT mode.

32 | Chapter 2 Commands

Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing
area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Free Orbit (2).

Summary
Selecting one of more objects before starting this command limits the display
to those objects only.
While the command is active, right-click to display additional options from
a shortcut menu.
3DFORBIT activates a 3D Free Orbit view in the current viewport. If the user
coordinate system (UCS) icon is on, a shaded 3D UCS icon representing the
current UCS appears in the 3D Orbit view. You can view your entire drawing
or select one or more objects before starting the command.
The 3D Free Orbit view displays an arcball, which is a circle divided into four
quadrants by smaller circles. When the Enable Orbit Auto Target option is
deselected in the shortcut menu, the target of the view stays stationary. The
camera location, or point of view, moves around the target. The center of the
arcball, not the center of the objects you’re viewing, is the target point. Unlike
3DORBIT (page 40), 3DFORBIT does not constrain the change in view to
prevent roll, the rotation of the view about an axis orthogonal to the plane
of your screen.
NOTE You cannot edit objects while the 3DFORBIT command is active.
Moving your cursor over different parts of the arcball changes the cursor icon,
indicating the direction in which the view rotates. See 3D Free Orbit Cursor
Icons (page 34).
While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options
from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area. See 3D Orbit
Shortcut Menu (page 41).
TIP While in 3D Orbit mode, you can temporarily enter 3D Free Orbit mode by
pressing and holding the Shift key.
See also:
Use 3D Navigation Tools

Commands | 33

3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons
While using 3D Free Orbit, the cursor changes as it is moved to indicate how
the model will be orbited when clicking and dragging.
View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor
as follows:
Sphere Encircled by Two Lines When you move the cursor inside the arcball,
it changes to a small sphere encircled by two lines. If you click and drag in
the drawing area you can move freely around the objects. It works as if your
cursor is grabbing a sphere surrounding the objects and dragging it around
the target point. You can drag horizontally, vertically, and diagonally using
this method.

Circular Arrow When you move the cursor outside the arcball, it becomes a
circular arrow. Clicking outside the arcball and dragging the cursor around
the arcball causes the view to move around an axis that extends through the
center of the arcball, perpendicular to the screen. This is called a roll.

Horizontal Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles
on the left or right side of the arcball, it becomes a horizontal ellipse. Clicking
and dragging from either of these points rotates the view around the vertical
or Y axis through the middle of the arcball.

Vertical Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles on
the top or bottom of the arcball, it becomes a vertical ellipse. Clicking and
dragging from either of these points rotates the view around the horizontal
or X axis through the middle of the arcball.

34 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
3D Navigation Tools

3DMESH
Creates a free-form polygon mesh.

Summary
The mesh density controls the number of facets, and is defined in terms of a
matrix of M and N vertices, similar to a grid consisting of columns and rows.
3DMESH is a legacy method for creating mesh, designed primarily for operation
under program control rather than by manual entry.
To take advantage of smoothing, creasing, and refinement capabilities, use
the MESH (page 617) command.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Size of mesh in M direction Sets the M direction value. Enter a value between
2 and 256.
Size of mesh in N direction Sets the N direction value. Enter a value between
2 and 256.
M times N equals the number of vertices that you must specify.

Location for vertex (0, 0) Sets the coordinate location of the vertex. Enter a
2D or 3D coordinate.

Commands | 35

The location of each vertex in the mesh is defined by m and n, the row and
column indices of the vertex. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0,0). You
must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before specifying
vertices in row m + 1.
Vertices may be any distance from each other. The M and N orientation of a
mesh depends on the position of its vertices.

3DMESH polygon meshes are always open in both M and N directions. You
can close a mesh with PEDIT (page 767).

See also:
Create Custom Mesh (Legacy)

3DMOVE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Move gizmo to aid in moving 3D objects a
specified distance in a specified direction.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Move

Summary
With the 3D Move gizmo, you can move selected objects and subobjects freely
or constrain the movement to an axis or plane.

36 | Chapter 2 Commands

If the default gizmo (DEFAULTGIZMO (page 1209)) is 3D Move, the 3D Move
gizmo is displayed whenever you select an object in a view with a 3D visual
style. If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual
style, 3DMOVE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the
duration of the command.
The 3D Move gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected 3D object or
objects by default. You can use the shortcut menu to change its location.
You can also align the 3D Move gizmo with the plane of a face or object by
using the Align Gizmo With ➤ Face option on the shortcut menu. The
direction of the move operation is then constrained relative to this work plane.

When the 3D Move gizmo is displayed, the 3D Move Gizmo shortcut menu
(page 39) offers options for aligning, moving, or changing to another gizmo.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects Selects the 3D objects you want to move. When you have
selected the objects, press Enter.

Commands | 37

When you have selected an object, the gizmo is displayed. You can constrain
the movement by clicking one of the following locations on the gizmo:
■

Move along an axis. Click an axis to constrain the movement to that
axis.

■

Move along a plane. Click the area between the axes to constrain the
movement to that plane.

Stretch point When you are specifying the move using the gizmo, sets the
new location of the selected objects. Drag and click to move the objects
dynamically.
Copy When you are specifying the move using the gizmo, creates a copy of
the selected objects instead of moving them. You can make multiple copies
by continuing to specify locations.
Base point Specifies the base point of the 3D objects you want to move.
■ Second point. Specifies where the 3D object or objects will be dragged.
You can also move the cursor to indicate a direction and then enter a
distance.
Displacement Specifies a relative distance and direction for the placement of
the selected 3D objects using coordinate values that you enter at the command
prompt.
See also:
Move 3D Objects

38 | Chapter 2 Commands

3D Move Gizmo Shortcut Menu
Displays options to set the constraint of a 3D object, switch gizmos, and move
or align the gizmo.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Move gizmo

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo.
Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo.
Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo.
Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis.
■ X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis.
■

XY, YX, or ZX. Restricts the change to a plane that is defined by the
selected axes.

Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify.
Align Gizmo With Sets the alignment for the change. Options include:
■ World UCS
■

Current UCS

■

Face

Custom Gizmo Allows you to define the current gizmo by specifying one,
two, or three points, or an object.

Commands | 39

Respect Dynamic UCS When relocating the gizmo, as you move the cursor,
temporarily aligns the XY plane of the UCS with the faces or edges.
See also:
Move 3D Objects

3DORBIT
Rotates the view in 3D space, but constrained to horizontal and vertical orbit
only.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: View ➤ Orbit ➤ Constrained Orbit
Pointing device: Press Shift and click the mouse wheel to temporarily enter
3D Orbit mode.
Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing
area, and click Other Navigations Modes ➤ Constrained Orbit (1).
Toolbar: Status bar (expanded) ➤ 3D Orbit

Summary
Selecting one of more objects before starting this command limits the display
to those objects only.
While the command is active, right-click to display additional options from
a shortcut menu.
3DORBIT activates a 3D Orbit view in the current viewport. You can view
your entire drawing or select one or more objects before starting the command.
When 3DORBIT is active, the target of the view stays stationary and the camera
location, or point of view, moves around the target. However, it appears as if
the 3D model is turning as the mouse cursor is dragged In this way, you can
specify any view of the model.
The 3D Orbit cursor icon appears. If you drag the cursor horizontally, the
camera moves parallel to the XY plane of the world coordinate system (WCS).
If you drag the cursor vertically, the camera moves along the Z axis.

40 | Chapter 2 Commands

NOTE You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active.
While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options
from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area. See 3D Orbit
Shortcut Menu (page 41).
See also:
Use 3D Navigation Tools

3D Orbit Shortcut Menu
When the 3DORBIT command (or any 3D navigation command or mode) is
active, you can access the options on the 3D Orbit shortcut menu. To access
the 3D Orbit shortcut menu, right-click in the 3D Orbit view.

Current Mode: Current
Displays the current mode.

Other Navigation Modes
Choose one of the following 3D navigation modes:
■ Constrained Orbit (1). Constrains orbiting to the XY plane or the Z
direction.
■

Free Orbit (2). Allows orbiting in any direction, without being constrained
to the XY plane or the Z direction. See 3DFORBIT (page 32).

■

Adjust Distance (4). Simulates moving the camera closer to the object
or farther away. See 3DDISTANCE (page 25).

■

Swivel (5). Changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates the
effect of swiveling the camera. See 3DSWIVEL (page 54).

■

Zoom (8). Changes the cursor to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and
minus (-) sign and simulates moving the camera closer to an object or
farther away. Works like the Adjust Distance option. See 3DZOOM (page
54).

■

Pan (9). Changes the cursor to a hand cursor and moves the view in the
direction that you drag. See 3DPAN (page 45).

Commands | 41

TIP
You can switch to any mode by using the shortcut menu or by entering
the number displayed after its name.

Enable Orbit Auto Target
Keeps the target point on the objects you are viewing rather than on the center
of the viewport. This feature is turned on by default.

Zoom Window
Changes the cursor to a window icon so that you can select a specific area to
zoom in on. When the cursor changes, click a starting point and end point
to define the zoom window. The drawing is zoomed in and focused on the
area you selected.

Zoom Extents
Centers the view and sizes it to display all objects.

Zoom Previous
Displays the previous view.

Parallel
Displays objects so that two parallel lines in a drawing never converge. The
shapes in your drawing always remain the same and do not appear distorted
when they are closer.

Perspective
Displays objects in perspective so that all parallel lines converge at one point.
Objects appear to recede into the distance, and parts of the objects appear
larger and closer to you. The shapes are somewhat distorted when the object
is very close. This view correlates more closely to what your eyes see. See
PERSPECTIVE (page 1390).

Reset View
Resets the view back to the view that was current when you first started
3DORBIT.

42 | Chapter 2 Commands

Preset Views
Displays a list of predefined views such as Top, Bottom, and SW Isometric.
Choose a view from the list to change the current view of your model.

Named Views
Displays a list of named views in the drawing. Choose a named view from the
list to change the current view of your model.

Visual Styles
Provides methods for shading objects. For more information about visual
styles, see Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model.
The options are the same as the options in VSCURRENT (page 1124).

Visual Aids
Provides aids to visualizing the objects.
■ Compass. Draws a 3D sphere composed of three lines representing the
X, Y, and Z axes.
■

Grid. Displays a two-dimensional array of lines similar to graph paper.
This grid is oriented along the X and Y axes.
NOTE Before starting 3DORBIT (page 40), you can use the GRID (page 467)
command to set system variables that control the grid display. The number of
major grid lines corresponds to the value you set using the Grid Spacing option
of the GRID command, which is stored in the GRIDUNIT (page 1307) system
variable. Ten horizontal lines and ten vertical lines are drawn between the
major lines.

■

UCS Icon. Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon. Each axis is labeled X, Y, or Z.
The X axis is red, the Y axis is green, and the Z axis is blue.

See also:
3D Navigation Tools

3DORBITCTR
Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view.

Commands | 43

Summary
Starts 3D Orbit view and uses a center of rotation that you specify with your
pointing device. If you specify a point outside the current view, 3DORBITCTR
ignores the specified point and uses the default center of rotation.
3DORBITCTR overrides the AutoTarget option in the 3DORBIT (page 40)
command.
See also:
Use 3D Navigation Tools

3DOSNAP
Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings
Shortcut menu: Press Option while right-clicking in the drawing area and
click 3D Osnap ➤ Osnap Settings.
Toolbar: Status bar (expanded) ➤ 3D Object Snap

Summary
Displays the 3D Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box (page 364).
You can also set the 3D object snap settings with the 3DOSMODE (page 1165)
system variable.
NOTE
Because 3D object snaps can slow performance, select only the object snaps
you need.
See also:
Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves
Create Solids
Create Surfaces
Modify Surfaces

44 | Chapter 2 Commands

Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces
Snap to Locations on Objects (Object Snaps)

-3DOSNAP
Uses command prompts to set running object snap modes for 3D objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter List of Object Snap Modes Specify one or more object snap modes by
entering the first four characters of the name. If you enter more than one,
separate the names with commas.
■ ZVERtex. Snaps to a vertex or a control vertex.
■

ZMIDpoint. Snaps to the midpoint on a face edge.

■

ZCENter. Snaps to the center of a face.

■

ZKNOt. Snaps to a spline knot.

■

ZPERpendicular. Snaps to a perpendicular face (planar faces only).

■

ZNEAr. Snaps to an object nearest to face.

■

ZNONe. Turns off all 3D object snaps.

See the 3D Object Snaps tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box (page 364) for
more information.

3DPAN
When a drawing is in a Perspective view, starts the interactive 3D view and
enables you to drag the view horizontally and vertically.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Pan ➤ Realtime
Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing
area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Pan (9).
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Pan

Commands | 45

Summary
Moves in the direction that you drag. You can drag the view vertically,
horizontally, or diagonally. 3DPAN changes the cursor to a hand cursor.
You can view your entire drawing or select objects before entering 3DPAN.
See also:
Use 3D Navigation Tools

3DPOLY
Creates a 3D polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Polyline
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤
3D Polyline

Summary
A 3D polyline is a connected sequence of straight line segments created as a
single object. 3D polylines can be non-coplanar; however, they cannot include
arc segments.

46 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify start point of polyline: Specify a point (1)
Specify endpoint of line (page 47) or [Undo (page 47)]: Specify
a point or enter an option
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Specify endpoint of line or [Close (page 47)/Undo]: Specify a
point or enter an option
Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the specified
new point. The prompt is repeated until you press Enter to end the command.

Undo Deletes the last line created. You can continue drawing from the previous
point.

Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first point, and then
ends the command. To be closed, a 3D polyline must contain at least two
lines.

See also:
Draw Polylines

Commands | 47

3DROTATE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Rotate gizmo to aid in revolving 3D objects
around a base point.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Rotate

Summary
With the 3D Rotate gizmo, you can rotate selected objects and subobjects
freely or constrain the rotation to an axis.

If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style,
3DROTATE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the
duration of the command.
The 3D Rotate gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects
by default. You can adjust the axis of rotation by using the shortcut menu to
change the location of the gizmo.

When the 3D Rotate gizmo is displayed, the 3D Rotate Gizmo shortcut menu
(page 49) offers options for aligning, moving, or changing to another gizmo.

48 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects Specifies the objects that you want to rotate.
Base point Sets the center point of the rotation.
Pick a rotation axis On the 3D Scale gizmo, specifies the axis of rotation.
Move the mouse until the axis path you want to select turns yellow, then click
to select it.

Specify angle start point or type an angle Sets the relative start point of the
rotation. You can also enter an angle value.
Specify angle end point Rotates the object about the specified axis. Click to
end the rotation.
See also:
Rotate 3D Objects

3D Rotate Gizmo Shortcut Menu
Displays options to set the constraint of a 3D object, switch gizmos, and move
or align the gizmo.

Commands | 49

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Rotate gizmo

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo.
Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo.
Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo.
Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis.
■ X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis.
Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify.
Align Gizmo With Sets the alignment for the change. Options include:
■ World UCS
■

Current UCS

■

Face

Custom Gizmo Allows you to define the current gizmo by specifying one,
two, or three points, or an object.
Respect Dynamic UCS When relocating the gizmo, as you move the cursor,
temporarily aligns the XY plane of the UCS with the faces or edges.
See also:
Rotate 3D Objects

3DSCALE
In a 3D view, displays the 3D Scale gizmo to aid in resizing 3D objects.

Access Methods
Summary
With the 3D Scale gizmo, you can resize selected objects and subobjects along
an axis or plane, or resize the objects uniformly.

50 | Chapter 2 Commands

When the 3D Scale gizmo is displayed, the 3D Scale Gizmo shortcut menu
(page 52) offers options for aligning, moving, or changing to another gizmo.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects Specifies the objects to be scaled.
Specify base point Specifies the base point for the scaling.
Pick a scale axis or plane Specifies whether the object is scaled uniformly or
only along a specific axis or plane. You have the following choices:
■ Scale uniformly. Click the area closest to the vertex of the 3D Scale
gizmo. The interior region of all axes of the gizmo is highlighted.

■

Constrain the scale to a plane. Click between the parallel lines between
the axes that define the plane. This option is only available for meshes,
not solids or surfaces.

■

Constrain the scale to an axis. Click the axis. This option is only
available for meshes, not solids or surfaces.

Commands | 51

Specify scale factor Specifies the amount of change. Drag to dynamically
modify the size of the selected objects or enter a scale value. For example,
enter 2 to double the size of the selection.
Copy Creates and scales a copy of the selected objects.
Reference Sets a scale based on a ratio.
■ Reference length. Sets the relative amount that represents the current
size in the scale ratio.
■

New Length. Sets the relative value used to calculate the new size. For
example, if the reference length is 1 and the new length is 3, the size of
the selected objects is tripled.

■

Points. Specifies the relative value used to calculate the new size based
on two points that you specify.

See also:
Scale 3D Objects

3D Scale Gizmo Shortcut Menu
Displays options to set the constraint of a 3D object, switch gizmos, and move
or align the gizmo.

52 | Chapter 2 Commands

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Scale gizmo

List of Options
The following menu options are displayed when you right-click the 3D Scale
gizmo.
Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo.
Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo.
Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo.
Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis.
■ X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis.
■

XY, YX, or ZX. Restricts the change to a plane that is defined by the
selected axes.

■

XYZ. Applies the scaling uniformly to all axes.

NOTE
Unlike most other objects, mesh objects support non-uniform scale.
Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify.
Align Gizmo With Sets the alignment for the change. Options include:
■ World UCS
■

Current UCS

■

Face

Custom Gizmo Allows you to define the current gizmo by specifying one,
two, or three points, or an object.
Respect Dynamic UCS When relocating the gizmo, as you move the cursor,
temporarily aligns the XY plane of the UCS with the faces or edges.
See also:
Use Gizmos to Modify Objects

Commands | 53

3DSWIVEL
Changes the target of the view in the direction that you drag.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Camera ➤ Swivel
Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing
area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Swivel (5).

Summary
Simulates panning with a camera in the direction that you drag. The target
of the view changes. You can swivel the view along the XY plane or along the
Z axis.
See also:
Use 3D Navigation Tools

3DZOOM
Zooms in and out in a perspective view.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Zoom
Pointing device: Scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing
area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Zoom (8).
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Zoom

Summary
Zooming in a perspective view simulates moving the camera closer to the
target or farther away. Objects appear closer or farther away, but the position
of the camera does not change.

54 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed in a perspective view.
Press Esc or Enter to exit, or right-click to display
shortcut-menu.
Enter option [All (page 55)/Extents (page 55)/Window (page
55)/Previous (page 55)/Object] :
All Zooms to display the entire drawing.
Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents and results in the largest possible
display of all the objects
Window Zooms to display an area specified by two points of a rectangular
window.
Previous Zooms to display the previous view.
Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and
in the center of the view.
Real Time Using the pointing device, zooms interactively.
See also:
Specify 3D Views

A Commands
ABOUT
Displays information about AutoCAD for Mac.

Access Methods
Menu: AutoCAD ➤ About AutoCAD
Command entry: 'about for transparent use

Summary
Copyright information and product information is displayed. Product
information includes the version number and service pack, serial number,

Commands | 55

license type and expiration date, and the text of the license agreement. You
can save the product information as a text file.
See also:
Start a Drawing

ACISIN
Imports an ACIS (SAT) file and creates 3D solid, body, or region objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Insert ➤ ACIS File

Summary
The Select ACIS File box is displayed. Select the file to import in the File Name
list. The SAT (ASCII) ACIS file is imported into the drawing.
NOTE ACISIN imports SAT files up to ACIS version 7.0.
See also:
Import ACIS SAT Files

ACISOUT
Exports a body object, solid, or region to an ACIS file.

Summary
Selected objects that are not solids or regions are ignored, and the Create ACIS
File dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the file you want to create. The
selected objects are exported to an ASCII file.
NOTE When exchanging SAT files to earlier versions of AutoCAD, you need to set
the ACISOUTVER (page 1168) system variable to the ACIS version used for that
release. For example, to export SAT files to AutoCAD R14, set ACISOUTVER to 16.

56 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Export ACIS SAT Files

ADDSELECTED
Creates a new object based on the object type and general properties of a
selected object.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a single object, right-click, and choose Add Selected.

Summary
Differs from COPY by duplicating only the general properties (page 833) of an
object. For example, creating an object based on a selected circle adopts the
general properties of the circle, such as its color and layer, but prompts you
for the new circle’s center point and radius.
With the ADDSELECTED command, you can create a new object with the
same object type as a selected object. Certain objects have special properties
that are supported in addition to its general properties, as shown in the
following table.
Object type

Special properties supported by ADDSELECTED

Gradient

Gradient name, Color 1, Color 2, Gradient Angle,
Centered

Text, MText, Attribute Definition

Text Style, Height

Dimensions (Linear, Aligned,
Radial, Diametric, Angular, Arc
Length, and Ordinate)

Dim Style, Dim Scale

Tolerance

Dim Style

Leader

Dim Style, Dim Scale

Commands | 57

Object type

Special properties supported by ADDSELECTED

Multileader

Multileader Style, Overall Scale

Table

Table Style

Hatch

Pattern, Scale, Rotation

Block Reference, External Reference

Name

Underlays (Image)

Name

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select object: Use an object selection method
The prompts vary by object type.
See also:
Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects

ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Align
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Move/Rotate/Scale tool group (expanded)
➤ Align

58 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Either one, two, or three pairs of source points and definition points can be
specified to move, rotate, or tilt the selected objects, aligning them with points
on another object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Select the objects to align and press Enter
Specify either one (page 59), two (page 59), or three pairs (page 60) of source
points and definition points to align the selected objects.
ALIGN Using One Pair of Points When you select only one source point and
destination point pair, the selected objects move in 2D or 3D from the source
point (1) to the destination point (2).

ALIGN Using Two Pairs of Points When you select two point pairs, you can
move, rotate, and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with other
objects.

Commands | 59

The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for the
alignment (1, 2). The second set of points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4).
After you enter the second set of points, you are prompted to scale the object.
The distance between the first and second destination points (2, 4) is used as
the reference length to which the object is scaled. Scaling is available only
when you are aligning objects using two point pairs.
NOTE
If you use two source and destination points to perform a 3D alignment on
non-perpendicular working planes, you get unpredictable results.
ALIGN Using Three Pairs of Points When you select three point pairs, you
can move and rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other objects.

The selected objects move from the source point (1) to the destination point
(2).
The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns with the destination
object (2 and 4).
The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so that it aligns with the
destination object (4 and 6).

60 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Align Objects

AMECONVERT
Converts AME solid models to AutoCAD solid objects.

Summary
The objects you select must be Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) Release
2 or 2.1 regions or solids. All other objects are ignored.

Because of increased accuracy in the new solid modeler, AME models may
look slightly different after conversion. This difference is noticeable where
the previous version of the solid modeler identified the surfaces of two different
shapes as so close as to be considered in the same plane. The new solid
modeler's finer tolerance may interpret these surfaces as being slightly offset.
This phenomenon is most apparent with aligned features such as fillets,
chamfers, and through-holes.
Holes might become blind holes when the new modeler, with its much finer
approximation capability, interprets what was once a through-hole as being
slightly less wide than the solid. Typically, the length of the remaining solid
material is the difference between the tolerance of the previous modeler and
that of the new modeler.
Likewise, updated fillets or chamfers can occasionally be placed slightly below
the surface, creating a hole through the solid, leaving the original shape
unaltered. Also, drawing fillets or chamfers slightly above the original surface
creates an uneven transition between the solid and the fillet or chamfer.
See also:
Use Render with Other Applications

Commands | 61

ANALYSISCURVATURE
Displays a color gradient onto a surface to evaluate different aspects of its
curvature.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Analysis tool group ➤ Surface Analysis
flyout ➤ Curvature Analysis

Summary
Allows you to visualize Gaussian, minimum, maximum, and mean U and V
surface curvature. Maximum curvature and a positive Gaussian value display
as green; minimum curvature and a negative Gaussian value display as blue.

Positive Gaussian curvature means that the surface is shaped like a bowl.
Negative Gaussian curvature means the surface is shaped like a saddle (as
shown below). Mean curvature and a zero Gaussian value means that the
surface is flat in at least one direction (planes, cylinders, and cones have zero
Gaussian curvature).
To change the curvature analysis display settings, use the Curvature tab (page
65) of the Analysis Options dialog box (page 64).
See also:
Analyze the Curvature of a NURBS Surface

62 | Chapter 2 Commands

ANALYSISDRAFT
Displays a color gradient onto a 3D model to evaluate whether there is
adequate space between a part and its mold.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Analysis tool group ➤ Surface Analysis
flyout ➤ Draft Analysis

Summary
The color spectrum shows draft angle changes within a specified range. The
maximum draft angle displays as red, and the minimum draft angle displays
as blue.

If the surface is parallel to the construction plane with surface normals facing
in the same direction as the current UCS, the draft angle is 90.0. When
perpendicular, it is 0. If the surface is parallel to the current UCS with surface
normals facing in the opposite direction than the current UCS, the draft
angle is -90.0.
To change the draft analysis display settings, use the Draft Angle tab (page
66) of the Analysis Options dialog box (page 64).
See also:
Use the Draft Analysis Tool

Commands | 63

ANALYSISOPTIONS
Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Analysis tool group ➤ Surface Analysis
flyout ➤ Analysis Options

Summary
The Analysis Options dialog box (page 64) is displayed.
See also:
Analyze Surfaces

Analysis Options Dialog Box
Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.

List of Tabs
The Analysis Options dialog box contains the following tabs:
■ Zebra (page 64)
■

Curvature (page 65)

■

Draft Angle (page 66)

See also:
Analyze Surfaces

Zebra Tab (Analysis Options Dialog Box)
Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISZEBRA command.

64 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Select Objects to Analyze
Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done
selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box.

Stripe Display
Stripe Direction
Specifies the display angle. (VSAZEBRADIRECTION (page 1495)) This option is
only available when Type is set to Cylinder. If you are using the Chrome Ball
type, change the stripe directions with the VSAZEBRADIRECTION (page 1495)
system variable.
Type
Sets analysis display type. (VSAZEBRATYPE (page 1496))
Size
Sets the width of the zebra stripes. (VSAZEBRASIZE (page 1496))
Color 1
Sets the first color for zebra stripes. (VSAZEBRACOLOR1 (page 1494))
Color 2
Sets the second color for zebra stripes. (VSAZEBRACOLOR2 (page 1495))

Clear Zebra Analysis
Removes the zebra display from all objects in the current drawing.
See also:
Analyze Surfaces

Curvature Tab (Analysis Options Dialog Box)
Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISCURVATURE command.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Commands | 65

Select objects to analyze
Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done
selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box.

Color Mapping
Display Style
Specifies the display for color mapping (VSACURVATURETYPE (page 1492)
system variable).
Enter the maximum curvature value (VSACURVATUREHIGH (page 1492)
system variable). When the surface curvature reaches this value, it displays as
green.
Enter the minimum curvature value (VSACURVATURELOW (page 1492) system
variable). When the surface curvature reaches this value, it displays as blue.
Auto Range
Calculates the curvature range so that 80% of the values are within the high
and low range (VSACURVATUREHIGH (page 1492) and VSACURVATURELOW
(page 1492) system variables).
Max Range
Calculates the maximum and minimum ranges of all objects selected for
curvature analysis (VSACURVATUREHIGH (page 1492) and VSACURVATURELOW
(page 1492) system variables).

Clear Curvature Analysis
Removes the curvature analysis display from all objects in the current drawing.
See also:
Analyze Surfaces

Draft Angle Tab (Analysis Options Dialog Box)
Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISDRAFT command.

List of Options
The following options are available.

66 | Chapter 2 Commands

Select objects to analyze
Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done
selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box.

Color Mapping
Maps green to the highest draft angle, red to the medium draft angle, and
blue to the lowest draft angle.
Angle Sets the value for the high and low draft angles. The draft angle is the
angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane.
Enter a value for the highest angle allowed (VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH (page
1493)). When the object’s angle reaches this value, it displays in green.
Displays the average value of the high and low angles. When the object’s angle
reaches this value, it displays in red.
Enter a value for the lowest angle allowed (VSADRAFTANGLELOW (page 1494)).
When the object’s angle reaches this value, it displays in blue.
Clear Draft Angle Analysis
Removes the curvature analysis display from all objects in the current drawing.
See also:
Analyze Surfaces

ANALYSISZEBRA
Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Analysis tool group ➤ Surface Analysis
flyout ➤ Zebra Analysis

Summary
The way the stripes line up where two surfaces meet, helps analyze the
tangency and curvature of the intersection.

Commands | 67

In this example, the surface continuity is G0 because the surface edges are
coincident, but they are not tangent and they have different curvatures. The
fact that the stripes are not aligned shows that the surfaces are not tangent.
To change the zebra analysis display settings, use the Zebra Analysis tab (page
64) of the Analysis Options dialog box (page 64).
See also:
Analyze Surface Continuity with Zebra Analysis

ANNORESET
Resets the locations of all alternate scale representations of the selected
annotative objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Annotation Scaling tool group ➤ Sync
Scale Positions
Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Synchronize
Multiple-Scale Positions
Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object. Right-click and choose
Annotative Object Scale ➤ Synchronize Multiple-Scale Positions.

68 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The location of each scale representation of an annotative object can be
adjusted using grips. For each selected annotative object, all alternate scale
representations are returned to the location of the object’s current scale
representation.
See also:
Add and Modify Scale Representations

ANNOUPDATE
Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their
styles.

Summary
When a non-annotative text object is updated to an annotative text style, the
object becomes annotative and supports the current . If the text style has a
fixed Paper Height, the object is set to that height. If the text style’s Paper
Height is set to 0, the size of the text does not change. The Paper Height value
is inferred by dividing the model height by the current annotation scale.
If an annotative object is updated to a non-annotative style, the object becomes
non-annotative and any alternate are removed.
See also:
Work with Annotative Styles

APERTURE
Controls the size of the object snap target box.

Access Methods
Command entry: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use)

Commands | 69

Summary
Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target
box. The APBOX (page 1172) system variable controls whether the object snap
target box is displayed. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE
controls the size of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger
the target box.
You can also change this setting in the Application Preferences dialog box,
Cursor & Selection tab.

APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at
the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the
PICKBOX (page 1393) system variable.

APPLOAD
Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at
startup.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Load Application

Summary
The Startup Suite option loads the specified applications each time the product
first starts. Application files can be dragged from the files list, or from any
application with dragging capabilities.
The Load/Unload Applications dialog box is displayed (page 71).
See also:
Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading

70 | Chapter 2 Commands

Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box
Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at
startup.

Summary
Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at
startup.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file
selection dialog box (page 720). Following are descriptions of the additional
options provided by the Load/Unload Applications dialog box:

Commands | 71

Load Loads or reloads the applications that are currently selected either in
the files list or on the History List tab. Load is unavailable until you select a
file that you can load. ObjectARX and DBX applications are loaded
immediately, but LSP and FAS applications are queued and then loaded when
you close the Load/Unload Applications dialog box.
If you select a file that is already loaded, Load reloads the application when
applicable. You cannot reload ObjectARX applications. In this case, you must
first unload the ObjectARX application and then load it again. The Load option
is also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking a file on the History
List tab.
Loaded Applications
Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of currently loaded applications.
LISP routines are displayed in this list only if you loaded them in the
Load/Unload Applications dialog box.
You can drag files into this list from the files list or from any application with
dragging capabilities, such as Finder.
You can also unload certain applications from this list. See the Unload option
for details. Files that you cannot unload are not available for selection.
History List
Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of applications that you previously
loaded with Add To History selected. If Add To History is not selected when
you drag files into this list, the dragged files are loaded but not added to the
history list.
You can drag files into this list from the files list, or from any application with
dragging capabilities, such as Finder.
You can load and remove applications from this list, but to unload applications,
you must use the Loaded Applications tab. See the Load, Unload, and Remove
options.
Add to History
Adds any applications that you load to the history list.
Unload/Remove
Unloads the selected applications or removes them from the History List.
Unload is available only when a file is selected on the Loaded Applications
tab. Remove is available only when you select a file on the History List tab.
LISP applications cannot be unloaded, nor can ObjectARX applications that
are not registered for unloading.

72 | Chapter 2 Commands

NOTE
Remove does not unload the selected application. The Remove option is also
available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking an application on the History
List tab.
Startup Suite
Contains a list of applications that are loaded each time you start AutoCAD
for Mac.
You can drag application files from the files list, or from any application with
dragging capabilities such as Finder, into the Startup Suite area to add them
to the Startup Suite.
You cannot add applications that you load with the AutoCAD for Mac web
browser to the Startup Suite.
Contents
Displays the Startup Suite dialog box (page 73). You can also add files to the
Startup Suite by clicking the Startup Suite icon or by right-clicking an
application on the History List tab and clicking Add to Startup Suite on the
shortcut menu.
Status Line
Displays messages that indicate the status of loading and unloading operations.
See also:
Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading

Startup Suite Dialog Box
Adds and removes application files from the Startup Suite. These are the
applications that are loaded each time you start AutoCAD for Mac

Commands | 73

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
List of Applications
Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of the application files to load at
startup.
Add
Displays the Add File to Startup Suite dialog box. You can use this dialog box
to select files to add to the startup suite.
Remove
Removes selected files from the Startup Suite.
See also:
Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading

ARC
Creates an arc.

Access Methods

Button

74 | Chapter 2 Commands

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group ➤ Arc flyout
Menu: Draw ➤ Arc

Summary
To create an arc, you can specify combinations of center, endpoint, start point,
radius, angle, chord length, and direction values.
For example:

The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The endpoint is determined by a line from the center that passes through the
third point.
The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point.

The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The other end of the arc is determined by specifying an included angle that
uses the center of the arc as the vertex.
The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point.

Commands | 75

The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The other end of the arc is determined by specifying the length of a chord
between the start point and the endpoint of the arc.
The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point.

The included angle between the endpoints of the arc determines the center
and the radius of the arc.

The tangent direction can be specified either by locating a point on the desired
tangent line, or by entering an angle. You can determine which endpoint
controls the tangent by changing the order in which you specify the two
endpoints.

76 | Chapter 2 Commands

The direction of the bulge of the arc is determined by the order in which you
specify its endpoints. You can specify the radius either by entering it or by
specifying a point at the desired radius distance.

The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The endpoint is determined by a line from the center that passes through the
third point.
The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point.

The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The other end of the arc is determined by specifying an included angle that
uses the center of the arc as the vertex.

Commands | 77

The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point.

The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius.
The other end of the arc is determined by specifying the length of a chord
between the start point and the endpoint of the arc.
The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point.

Immediately after you create a line or an arc, you can start an arc that is
tangent at an endpoint by starting the ARC command and pressing ENTER at
the Specify Start Point prompt. You need to specify only the endpoint of the
arc.

78 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify start point (page ?)of arc or [Center (page ?)]:
Specify a point, enter c, or press Enter to start tangent to last line,
arc, or polyline (page ?)

Start Point
Specifies the starting point of the arc.
NOTE
If you press Enter without specifying a point, the endpoint of the last drawn
line or arc is used and you are immediately prompted to specify the endpoint
of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc, or
polyline.
Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]:

Second Point
Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc's circumference. The first
point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3). The second
point (2) is a point on the circumference of the arc.
Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)

You can specify a three-point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise.

Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point Using the center point (2), draws an arc counterclockwise from the
start point (1) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the
center point through the third point (3).

Commands | 79

The arc does not necessarily pass through this third point, as shown in the
illustration.
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) using a center
point (2) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise
arc is drawn.
Specify included angle: Specify an angle

Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of
a straight line between the start point and endpoint.
If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from
the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn
counterclockwise.
Specify length of chord: Specify a length

End
Specifies the endpoint of the arc.
Specify end point of arc:
Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]:
Center Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an
endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (3)
through the second point specified (2).

80 | Chapter 2 Commands

Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint
(2), with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is
drawn.
Specify included angle: Enter an angle in degrees or specify an angle by moving
the pointing device counterclockwise

Direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates any arc,
major or minor, clockwise or counterclockwise, beginning with the start point
(1), and ending at an endpoint (2). The direction is determined from the start
point.
Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc:

Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to the
endpoint (2). If the radius is negative, the major arc is drawn.
Specify radius of arc:

Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify start point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) to an
endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (1)
through a specified point (3).

Commands | 81

Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) using a center
point (1) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise
arc is drawn.
Specify included angle:

Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of
a straight line between the start point and endpoint.
If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from
the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn
counterclockwise.
Specify length of chord:

Tangent to Last Line, Arc, or Polyline
Draws an arc tangent to the last line, arc, or polyline drawn when you press
ENTER at the first prompt.

Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (1)
See also:
Draw Arcs

82 | Chapter 2 Commands

AREA
Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas.

Summary
Several commands are available to provide area information including AREA,
MEASUREGEOM (page 613), and MASSPROP (page 597). Alternatively, use
BOUNDARY (page 149) to create a closed polyline or region. Then use LIST
(page 581) or the Properties Inspector (page 832) to find the area.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first corner point (page ?) or [Object (page ?)/Add
Area (page ?)/Subtract Area (page ?)] : Select an option
The area and perimeter of the specified object displays at the Command prompt
and in the tooltip.

Specify Corner Points
Calculates the area and perimeter defined by specified points. All points must
lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system
(UCS).
A rubberband line from the first specified point to the cursor is displayed.
Once the second point is specified, a line segment and a polygon with green
fill are displayed.
Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press Enter to
complete the definition of the perimeter. The area to be calculated is
highlighted in green.
If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn
from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that
line length is added.

Commands | 83

Object
Calculates the area and perimeter of a selected object. You can calculate the
area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and 3D solids.
NOTE 2D solids (created with the SOLID (page 955) command) do not have an
area reported.
Select object:
If you select an open polyline, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn
from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated that
line length is ignored.
The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter
calculations.

The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter (or length)
calculations.

Add Area
Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you
continue to define areas. You can use the Add Area option to calculate
individual areas and perimeters of defined areas and objects and the total area
of all defined areas and objects.
You can also select to specify the points. A rubberband line from the first
specified point to the cursor is displayed

84 | Chapter 2 Commands

Specify points to define a polygon (3). The area to be added is highlighted in
green. Press Enter. AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the
total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode
was turned on.
If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn
from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that
line length is added.

Subtract Area
Similar to the Add Area option, but subtracts areas and perimeters. You can
use the Subtract Area option to subtract a specified area from a total area.
You can also specify the area to be subtracted with points. A rubberband line
from the first specified point to the cursor is displayed.

The specified area to be subtracted is highlighted in red.
The total area and perimeter displays at the Command prompt and in the
tooltip.
See also:
Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

Commands | 85

ARRAY
Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Array.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout

Summary
You can create copies of objects in a regularly spaced rectangular, polar, or
path array.

The DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable controls whether the source objects of
the array are deleted or retained after the array is created.
If you enter -array at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 87).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Enter array type [Rectangular (page 86)/PAth (page 86)/POlar
(page 87)] : Enter an option or press Enter
Rectangular (ARRAYRECT (page 103))
Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels.
Path (ARRAYPATH (page 96))

86 | Chapter 2 Commands

Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path.
Polar (ARRAYPOLAR (page 100))
Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point or
axis of rotation.
See also:
Array Objects

-ARRAY
Maintains legacy command line behavior for creating nonassociative, 2D
rectangular or polar arrays.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Enter the type of array [Rectangular (page ?)/Polar (page
?)] : Enter an option or press Enter

Rectangular
Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected objects.

Enter the number of rows (---) <1>:Enter a nonzero integer or press Enter
Enter the number of columns (|||) <1>:Enter a nonzero integer or press Enter
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column and vice
versa.
The selected object, or cornerstone element, is assumed to be in the lower-left
corner, and generates the array up and to the right.
The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the
corresponding lengths of the object to be arrayed.
Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):

Commands | 87

To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between
rows. ARRAY skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the opposite
corners of a rectangle.
Specify the distance between columns (|||):
To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between
columns. Rectangular arrays are constructed along a baseline defined by the
current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are
orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. The Rotate option of
the SNAP (page 952) command changes the angle and creates a rotated array.
The SNAPANG (page 1439) system variable stores the snap rotation angle.
If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, it might take
a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array
elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set
by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for
example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.

Polar
Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center
point.

Specify center point of array or [Base]: Specify a point or enter b to specify a new
base point
Center Point Creates an array defined by a center point.
Base Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that
will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the
objects are arrayed.
Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive integer or press Enter
If you enter a value for the number of items, you must specify either the angle
to fill or the angle between items. If you press ENTER (and do not provide the
number of items), you must specify both.

88 | Chapter 2 Commands

Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for a
counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
You can enter 0 for the angle to fill only if you specify the number of items.
If you specify an angle to fill without providing the number of items, or if
you specify the number of items and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press Enter,
the following prompt is displayed:
Angle between items: Specify an angle
If you specified the number of items and entered 0 as the angle to fill or pressed
Enter, ARRAY prompts for a positive or negative value to indicate the direction
of the array:
Angle between items (+=ccw, -=cw): Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise
rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
ARRAY determines the distance from the array's center point to a reference
point on the last object selected. The reference point used is the center point
of a circle or arc, the insertion base point of a block or shape, the start point
of text, and one endpoint of a line or trace.
Rotate arrayed objects? : Enter y or n, or press Enter
In a polar array, the reference point of the last object in the selection set is
used for all objects. If you defined the selection set by using window or crossing
selection, the last object in the selection set is arbitrary. Removing an object
from the selection set and adding it back forces that object to be the last object
selected. You can also make the selection set into a block and replicate it.
See also:
Array Objects

ARRAYCLOSE
Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array
editing state.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Edit Array visor ➤ Discard Changes/Save Changes
Shortcut menu: Right-click in drawing area and click Close Array Edit Session
➤ Discard Changes/Save Changes

Commands | 89

Summary
The Source option of ARRAYEDIT (page 90) activates an editing state in which
you can edit the source objects of a selected array item.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Save changes to array [Yes (page ?)/No (page ?)] :
Enter an option

Save Changes
Saves all changes made to the source object or to a replacement item of the
array.

Discard Changes
Discards any changes made; the source object or replacement item in the array
is returned to its original state.
See also:
Array Objects

ARRAYEDIT
Edits associative array objects and their source objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Array
Toolbar:  Array visor ➤ Edit Source
Shortcut menu: Select an associative array. Right-click and choose Array
➤ Edit Array.

Summary
Modify associative arrays by editing the array properties, editing source objects,
or replacing items with other objects.
When you edit source objects, an editing state is activated. Save or discard
changes (ARRAYCLOSE (page 89)) to exit the editing state.

90 | Chapter 2 Commands

When you select a single associative array object, one of the following visors
is displayed:
■ Path Array visor (page 93)
■

Polar Array visor (page 94)

■

Rectangular Array visor (page 95)

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select array: Use an object selection method
The array type determines the remaining prompts.
For rectangular arrays:
Enter an option [Source (page ?)/REPlace (page ?)/Base
point (page ?)/Rows (page ?)/Columns (page ?)/Levels (page
?)/RESet (page ?)/eXit (page ?)] :
For path arrays:
Enter an option [Source/REPlace/Method (page ?)/Base
point/Items (page ?)/Rows/Levels/Align items (page ?)/Z
direction (page ?)/RESet/eXit] :
For polar arrays:
Enter an option [Source/REPlace/Base point/Items/Angle between
(page ?)/Fill angle (page ?)/Rows/Levels/ROTate items (page
?)/RESet/eXit] :

Source
Activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects (or
replacement source objects) for a selected item.
All changes (including the creation of new objects) are instantly applied to
all items that reference the same source objects.
While the editing state is active, an Edit Array contextual tab is displayed on
the ribbon and automatic saving is disabled. Save or discard changes (ARRAYCLOSE (page 89)) to exit the editing state.
When the source objects are modified, the changes are dynamically reflected
on the array block.

Replace
Replaces the source objects for selected items or for all items referencing the
original source objects.
Replacement Objects Selects the new source objects.

Commands | 91

Base Point Specifies a base point for the replacement objects.
Item in Array Selects the item whose source objects are to be replaced, and
continues to prompt for additional items.
■

Source objects. Replaces the original set of source objects in the array,
which updates all items that have not been previously replaced.

Base Point
Redefines the base point of the array.
Path arrays are repositioned relative to the new base point.

Rows
Specifies the number and spacing of rows, and the incremental elevation
between them.
Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation.
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last rows.

Columns (Rectangular Arrays)
Specifies the number and spacing of columns.
Expression (page 92)
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last columns.

Levels
Specifies the number and spacing of levels.
Expression (page 92)
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last levels.

Method (Path Arrays)
Controls how to distribute items when the path or number of items is edited.
■

Divide. Redistributes items to divide evenly along the length of the path.

■

Measure. Maintains current spacing when the path is edited, or when
the number of items is edited through grips or the Properties palette. When
the number of items is edited using ARRAYEDIT, you are prompted to
redefine the distribution method.

Items (Path and Polar Arrays)
Specifies the number of items in the array.
For path arrays whose Method property is set to Measure, you are prompted
to redefine the distribution method. The same prompts are available from
ARRAYPATH (page 96).

92 | Chapter 2 Commands

Align Items (Path Arrays)
Specifies whether to align each item to be tangent to the path direction.
Alignment is relative to the orientation of the first item (ARRAYPATH,
Orientation option).

Z Direction (Path Arrays)
Controls whether to maintain the original Z direction of the items or to
naturally bank the items along a 3D path.

Angle Between (Polar Arrays)
Specifies the angle between items.
Expression (page 92)

Fill Angle (Polar Arrays)
Specifies the angle between the first and last item in the array.
Expression (page 92)

Rotate Items (Polar Arrays)
Controls whether items are rotated as they are arrayed.

Reset
Restores erased items and removes any item overrides.

Exit
Exits the command.
See also:
Edit Associative Arrays

Path Array Visor
Modifies the properties of an associative path array, such as base point, array
method, and Z direction.

Summary
The Path Array visor is displayed when you select an associative array created
with the Path option. The options on this visor can also be accessed using the
ARRAYEDIT (page 90) command from the Command prompt.

Commands | 93

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Base Point
Redefines the base point of the array.

Array Method
Controls how to distribute items when the path or number of items is edited.

Edit Source
Activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects (or
replacement source objects) for a selected item.

Replace Item
Replaces the source objects for selected items or for all items referencing the
original source objects.

Reset Array
Restores erased items and removes any item overrides.

Rotate Items
Controls whether items are rotated as they are arrayed.

Align Items
Specifies whether to align each item to be tangent to the path direction.
Alignment is relative to the orientation of the first item.

Z Direction
Controls whether to maintain the original Z direction of the items or to
naturally bank the items along a 3D path.
See also:
Edit Associative Arrays

Polar Array Visor
Modifies the properties of an associative polar array, such as base point and
item rotation.

94 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The Polar Array visor is displayed when you select an associative array created
with the Polar option. The options on this visor can also be accessed using
the ARRAYEDIT (page 90) command from the Command prompt.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Base Point
Redefines the base point of the array.

Edit Source
Activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects (or
replacement source objects) for a selected item.

Replace Item
Replaces the source objects for selected items or for all items referencing the
original source objects.

Reset Array
Restores erased items and removes any item overrides.

Rotate Items
Controls whether items are rotated as they are arrayed.
See also:
Edit Associative Arrays

Rectangular Array Visor
Modifies the properties of an associative rectangular array, such as base point
and source item.

Summary
The Rectangular Array visor is displayed when you select an associative array
created with the Rectangular option. The options on this visor can also be

Commands | 95

accessed using the ARRAYEDIT (page 90) command from the Command
prompt.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Base Point
Redefines the base point of the array.

Edit Source
Activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects (or
replacement source objects) for a selected item.

Replace Item
Replaces the source objects for selected items or for all items referencing the
original source objects.

Reset Array
Restores erased items and removes any item overrides.

Align Item
Specifies whether to align each item to be tangent to the path direction.
Alignment is relative to the orientation of the first item.
See also:
Edit Associative Arrays

ARRAYPATH
Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Path Array
Command entry: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout
➤ Path Array

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Path option in ARRAY (page 86).

96 | Chapter 2 Commands

The path can be a line, polyline, 3D polyline, spline, helix, arc, circle, or ellipse.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Select path curve (page ?): Use an object selection method
Enter number of items (page ?) along path or [Orientation
(page 97)/Expression (page 98)] : Specify the number
of items or enter an option
Specify base point (page ?) or [Key point (page 98)] : Specify a base point or enter an option
Specify direction to align with path or [2Points/Normal]
: Press Enter or select and option
Specify the distance between items (page ?) along path or
[Divide (page 99)/Total (page 99)/Expression (page 98)]
: Specify a distance or enter an option
Press Enter to accept or [ASsociative (page ?)/Base
point/Items (page ?)/Rows (page ?)/Levels (page ?)/Align
items (page ?)/Z direction (page ?)/eXit (page ?)]:
Press Enter or select an option

Path Curve
Specifies the object to use for the path of the array. Select a line, polyline, 3D
polyline, spline, helix, arc, circle, or ellipse.

Number of Items
Specifies the number of items in the array.
Orientation Controls whether the selected objects are reoriented (rotated)
relative to the starting direction of the path before being moved to the start
point of the path.
■ 2 Points. Specifies two points to define the direction to be aligned with
the starting direction of the path.

Commands | 97

■

Normal. Objects are aligned to be normal to the starting direction of the
path.

NOTE The Align Items (page ?) option controls the whether to maintain the
starting orientation or continue reorienting items along the path, relative to the
starting orientation.

Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation.

Base Point
Specifies a base point for the array.
Key Point For associative arrays, specifies a valid constraint point (or key point)
on the source objects to use as the base point. If you edit the source objects
of the resulting array, the base point of the array remains coincident with the
key point of the source objects.

Distance Between Items
Specifies the distance between items.

98 | Chapter 2 Commands

Divide Divides items evenly along the entire length of the path.
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last items.
Expression (page 98)

Associative
Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object,
or as independent objects.
■

Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. This
allows you to quickly propagate changes by editing the properties and
source objects of the array.

■

No. Creates array items as independent objects. Changes to one item do
not affect the other items.

Items
Edits the number of items in the array.
If the Method property is set to Measure, you are prompted to redefine the
distribution method (Distance Between Items (page ?), Divide (page 99), and
Total (page 99) options).

Rows
Specifies the number and spacing of rows in the array, and the incremental
elevation between them.
Expression (page 98)
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last rows.

Levels
Specifies the number and spacing of levels in the array.
Expression (page 98)
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last levels.

Align Items
Specifies whether to align each item to be tangent to the path direction.
Alignment is relative to the first item’s orientation (Orientation (page 97)
option).

Commands | 99

Z Direction
Controls whether to maintain the items’ original Z direction or to naturally
bank the items along a 3D path.

Exit
Exits the command.
See also:
Create Path Arrays

ARRAYPOLAR
Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point or
axis of rotation.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Polar Array
Command entry: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout
➤ Polar Array

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Polar option in ARRAY (page 86).
Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center
point or axis of rotation.

100 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Specify center point (page ?) of array or [Base point (page
?)/Axis of rotation (page ?)]: Specify a center point, or enter an
option
Enter number of items (page ?) or [Angle between (page
?)/Expression (page 101)] : Specify the number of items or
enter an option
Specify the angle to fill (page ?) (+=ccw, -=cw) or
[Expression]: Enter a fill angle or enter an option
Press Enter to accept or [ASsociative (page ?)/Base
point/Items/Angle between/Fill angle/ROWs (page ?)/Levels
(page ?)/ROTate items (page ?)/eXit (page ?)]: Press
Enter or select an option

Center Point
Specifies the point around which to distribute the array items. The axis of
rotation is the Z axis of the current UCS.

Base Point
Specifies a base point for the array.
Key Point For associative arrays, specifies a valid constraint (or key point) on
the source objects to use as the base point. If you edit the source objects of
the resulting array, the base point of the array remains coincident with the
key point of the source objects.

Axis of Rotation
Specifies a custom axis of rotation defined by two specified points.

Items
Specifies the number of items in the array.
Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation.

Commands | 101

NOTE When defining the fill angle in an expression, the (+ or -) mathematical
symbol in the resultant value does not affect the direction of the array.

Angle Between
Specifies the angle between items.
Expression (page 101)

Fill Angle
Specifies the angle between the first and last item in the array.
Expression (page 101)

Associative
Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object,
or as independent objects.
■

Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. This
allows you to quickly propagate changes by editing the properties and
source objects of the array.

■

No. Creates array items as independent objects. Changes to one item do
not affect the other items.

Rows
Edits the number and spacing of rows in the array, and the incremental
elevation between them.
Expression (page 101)
Total Sets the total distance between the first and last rows.

Levels
Specifies the number and spacing of levels in the array.
Expression (page 101)
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last levels.

Rotate Items
Controls whether items are rotated as they are arrayed.

Exit
Exits the command.
See also:
Create Polar Arrays

102 | Chapter 2 Commands

ARRAYRECT
Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Rectangular Array
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout ➤
Rectangular Array

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Rectangular option in ARRAY (page 86).
Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
Specify opposite corner for number of items (page ?) or
[Base point (page ?)/Angle (page ?)/Count (page 104)]
: Enter an option or press Enter
Press Enter to accept or [ASsociative (page ?)/Base
point/Rows (page ?)/Columns (page ?)/Levels (page ?)/eXit
(page ?)] : Press Enter or select an option

Items
Specifies the number of items in the array. Use the preview grid to specify a
point that reflects the desired configuration.

Commands | 103

Count Specifies the row and column values individually.
■ Expression (page 104)

Space Items
Specifies the row and column spacing. Use the preview grid to specify a point
that reflects the desired configuration.
Spacing Specifies the row and column spacing individually.
■ Expression (page 104)

Base Point
Specifies a base point for the array.
Key Point For associative arrays, specifies a valid constraint (or key point) on
the source objects to use as the base point. If you edit the source objects of
the resulting array, the base point of the array remains coincident with the
key point of the source objects.

Angle
Specifies the angle of rotation for the row axis. The row and column axes
remain orthogonal to each other. For associative arrays, you can later edit the
individual row and column angles.
You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS (page
1095). The ANGBASE (page 1169) and ANGDIR (page 1169) system variables affect
the angle of arrays.

Associative
Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object,
or as independent objects.
■

Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. This
allows you to quickly propagate changes by editing the properties and
source objects of the array.

■

No. Creates array items as independent objects. Changes to one item do
not affect the other items.

Rows
Edits the number and spacing of rows in the array, and the incremental
elevation between them.
Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation.
Total Sets the total distance between the first and last rows.

Columns
Edits the number and spacing of columns.

104 | Chapter 2 Commands

Expression (page 104)
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last columns.

Levels
Specifies the number and spacing of levels.
Expression (page 104)
Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last levels.

Exit
Exits the command.
See also:
Create Rectangular Arrays

ARX
Loads, unloads, and provides information about ObjectARX applications.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [Files (page ?)/Groups (page ?)/Commands
(page ?)/CLasses (page ?)/Services (page ?)/Load (page
?)/Unload (page ?)]:

Files
Lists the currently loaded ObjectARX applications, which can be third-party
programs or internal applications such as Render.

Groups
Causes the specified group of commands to be the first group searched when
resolving the names of AutoCAD commands.

Commands
Lists the AcEd-registered commands (AcEd-registered commands are described
in the ObjectARX Developer's Guide).

Classes
Displays a class hierarchy of C++ classes derived from objects registered in the
system.

Services
Lists the names of all registered services.

Commands | 105

Load
Displays the ObjectARX/DBX File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). This option loads the specified ObjectARX application.

Unload
Unloads the specified ObjectARX application.
Enter ARX/DBX file name to unload:
See also:
Overview of ObjectARX

ATTACH
Inserts an external reference or raster image in the current drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: File ➤ Attach

Summary
The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page
720)) is displayed. To select multiple DWG files for attach, set the Files of Type
to Drawing. You can select one file only for all other file formats.
See also:
Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings
Attach Raster Image Files

ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.

Access Methods

Button

106 | Chapter 2 Commands

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Define Attributes
Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Define Attributes

Summary
The Attribute Definition dialog box (page 107) is displayed.
If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
111).
An attribute is an object that is created and included with a block definition.
Attributes can store data such as part numbers, product names, and so on.
See also:
Define Block Attributes

Attribute Definition Dialog Box
Defines the mode; attribute tag, prompt, and value; insertion point; and text
settings for an attribute.

Commands | 107

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Attribute
Sets attribute data.
Tag
Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. Enter the attribute
tag using any combination of characters except spaces. Lowercase letters are
automatically changed to uppercase.
Prompt
Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this
attribute definition. If you do not enter a prompt, the attribute tag is used as
a prompt. If you select Constant in the Attribute Options area under Advanced
Options, the Prompt option is not available.

108 | Chapter 2 Commands

Default
Specifies the default attribute value.
Insert Field Button
Displays the Field dialog box (page 429). You can insert a field as all or part of
the value for an attribute.
This button is available when you are not creating a multiline attribute. If you
are creating a multiline attribute, right-click in the multiline in-place text
editor and choose Field.
Multiline Editor Button
When Multiple Line mode is selected, displays an in-place text editor with a
text formatting toolbar and ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE
(page 1175) system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the
abbreviated version, or the full version.
For more information, see the In-Place Text Editor (page 675).
NOTE Several options in the full In-Place Text Editor are grayed out to preserve
compatibility with single-line attributes.

Text Settings
Sets the justification, style, height, and rotation of the attribute text.
Text Style
Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. Currently loaded text
styles are displayed. To load or create a text style, see STYLE (page 1006).
Justification
Specifies the justification of the attribute text. See TEXT (page 1044) for a
description of the justification options.
Annotative
Specifies that the attribute is annotative. If the block is annotative, the attribute
will match the orientation of the block. Click the information icon to learn
more about annotative objects.
Text Height
Specifies the height of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose Height to
specify a height with your pointing device. The height is measured from the
origin to the location you specify. If you select a text style that has fixed height
(anything other than 0.0), or if you select Align in the Justification list, the
Height option is not available.

Commands | 109

Text Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose
Rotation to specify a rotation angle with your pointing device. The rotation
angle is measured from the origin to the location you specify. If you select
Align or Fit in the Justification list, the Rotation option is not available.
Multiline Text Width
Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute
before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no
restriction on the length of a line of text.
Not available for single-line attributes.

Advanced Options
Contains options to set the behavior and insertion position for the attribute.

Attribute Options
Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the
block in a drawing.
The default values are stored in the AFLAGS (page 1168) system variable.
Changing the AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute
definitions and does not affect existing attribute definitions.
Invisible
Specifies that attribute values are not displayed or printed when you insert
the block. ATTDISP (page 114) overrides Invisible mode.
Constant
Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.
Verify
Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct when you insert the
block.
Preset
Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a
preset attribute.
Lock Position
Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked,
the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing,
and multiline attributes can be resized.

110 | Chapter 2 Commands

Multiple Lines
Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines of text. When this
option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for the attribute.
NOTE In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be
included in an action's selection set.

Insertion Point
Specifies the location for the attribute. Enter coordinate values or select Specify
On-screen and use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute
in relation to the objects that it will be associated with.

Specify On-Screen
Displays a Start Point prompt when the dialog box closes. Use the pointing
device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that
it will be associated with.

Input Coordinates
Specifies the coordinates to use for the attribute’s insertion point.
X
Specifies the X coordinate of the attribute's insertion point.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate of the attribute's insertion point.
Z
Specifies the Z coordinate of the attribute's insertion point.
See also:
Define Block Attributes

-ATTDEF
List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current attribute modes (page ?): Invisible=current
Constant=current Verify=current Preset=current Lock position=current
Annotative =current Multiple line =current

Commands | 111

Enter an option to change
[Invisible/Constant/Verify/Preset/Lock
position/Annotative/Multiple lines] :
Enter attribute tag name (page ?): Enter any characters except spaces
or exclamation points
Enter attribute value (page ?): Enter the appropriate text or press
Enter (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Constant mode)
Enter attribute prompt (page ?): Enter the text for the prompt line or
press Enter (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode)
Enter default attribute value (page ?): Enter the appropriate text
or press Enter (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode)
Specify location of multiline attribute (page ?): Specify a
point (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Multiple line mode)
Specify opposite corner (page ?): Specify a point or enter an option
(this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Multiple line mode)

Attribute Modes
The current value line indicates the current settings for each attribute mode
(either Y for on or N for off). Entering i, c, v, p, l, a, or m toggles the modes
on or off. Press Enter when you have finished adjusting the mode settings.
The AFLAGS (page 1168) system variable stores the current mode settings and
can be used to set the default modes.
Invisible Specifies that attribute values are displayed when you insert the
block. ATTDISP (page 114) overrides Invisible mode.
Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.
Verify Prompts for verification that the attribute value is correct when you
insert the block.
Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing
a preset attribute.
Lock Position Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference.
When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block
using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized.
NOTE
In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be included
in an action's selection set.
Annotative Specifies that the attribute is annotative.

112 | Chapter 2 Commands

Multiple Lines Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines
of text. When this option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for
the attribute.

Attribute Tag Name
Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in
the drawing. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclamation
marks (!). Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase.

Attribute Prompt
Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this
attribute definition. If you press Enter, the attribute tag is used as the prompt.
If you turn on Constant mode, this prompt is not displayed.
NOTE
For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters. If you need
leading blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a
backslash (\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two
backslashes.

Default Attribute Value
Specifies the default attribute value. The default attribute value appears when
a block is inserted into your drawing. A default value is not required. If you
turn on Constant mode, the Attribute Value prompt is displayed instead.
When Multiple Line mode is off, -ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as
the TEXT command, using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string.
Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0.2000
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: Enter an option or press Enter
Specify paper text height : Specify a height, or press Enter
The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text
style is annotative.
For a description of each option, see TEXT (page 1044).
NOTE
For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters. If you need
leading blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a
backslash (\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two
backslashes.

Commands | 113

When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts
used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT
(page 674).

Attribute Value (Constant Mode)
Specifies the value for a constant attribute. This prompt is displayed only if
you turn on Constant mode.
ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the
attribute tag instead of requesting a text string. For a description of each
option, see TEXT (page 1044).
When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts
used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT
(page 674).

Location of Multiline Attribute (Multiple Line Mode)
Specifies the first corner of the bounding box for the multiple-line text. This
location is used as the starting point for the attribute.

Opposite Corner (Multiple Line Mode)
As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is
displayed to show the location and width of the multiple-line text. The arrow
within the rectangle indicates the direction of the text flow.
See also:
Define Block Attributes

ATTDISP
Controls the visibility overrides for all block attributes in a drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ Attribute Display
Command entry: 'attdisp for transparent use

114 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary

The drawing is regenerated after you change the visibility settings unless REGENAUTO (page 878), which controls automatic regeneration, is off. The current
visibility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE (page 1176) system variable.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal (page 115)/ON (page
115)/OFF (page 115)] :
Normal Restores the visibility settings of each attribute. Visible attributes are
displayed. Invisible attributes are not displayed.
On Makes all attributes visible, overriding the original visibility settings.
Off Makes all attributes invisible, overriding the original visibility settings.
See also:
Define Block Attributes

ATTEDIT
Changes attribute information in a block.

Commands | 115

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Edit Attributes flyout
➤ Single
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single

Summary
The Edit Attributes dialog box (page 116) is displayed to edit attribute values
for a specific block.
If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
118) to edit attribute values and properties independent of a block.
See also:
Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Edit Attributes Dialog Box
Changes attribute information in a block.

116 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use
-ATTEDIT.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Block Name
Indicates the name of the selected block. The value of each attribute contained
in the block is displayed in this dialog box.
List of Attributes
Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block. Edit the attribute
values. If the block contains additional attributes, click Prev or Next to navigate
through the list. You cannot edit attribute values on locked layers.
Multiple-line attributes display the In-Place Text Editor (page 675) with the
Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler. Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE
(page 1175) system variable, the Text Formatting toolbar displayed is either the
abbreviated version, or the full version.
To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut
menu to display the Insert Field dialog box (page 429).
Prev
Displays the previous eight attribute values. Previous is available only if the
selected block contains more than eight attributes and you used Next to display
the additional attributes.
Next
Displays the next eight attribute values. If the block contains no additional
attributes, Next is unavailable.
See also:
Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Commands | 117

-ATTEDIT
List of Prompts
If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.
Edit attributes one at a time? [Yes (page ?)/No (page ?)]
: Enter y or press Enter to edit attributes one at a time, or enter n to edit
attributes globally
The following prompts filter the attributes to be changed based on attribute
tag, current value, or object selection.

Yes
Edits attributes one at a time. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be
visible and parallel to the current UCS.
Attribute values are case sensitive.

The first attribute in the selection set is marked with an X. You can change
any properties of the attribute you select.
Enter an option [Value/Position/Height/Angle/Style/Layer/Color/Next] :
Enter the property to change, or press Enter for the next attribute
If the original attribute was defined with aligned or fit text, the prompt does
not include Angle. The Height option is omitted for aligned text. For each of
the options except Next, ATTEDIT prompts for a new value. The X remains
on the current attribute until you move to the next attribute.

118 | Chapter 2 Commands

Value
Changes or replaces an attribute value.
Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press Enter
Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value.
Either string can be null. The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not
as wild-card characters.
Replace Substitutes a new attribute value for the entire attribute value.
If you press Enter, the attribute value is empty (null).

Position
Changes the text insertion point.

If the attribute is aligned, ATTEDIT prompts for both ends of a new text
baseline.

Height
Changes the text height.

When you specify a point, the height becomes the distance between the
specified point and the start point of the text.

Angle
Changes the rotation angle.

If you specify a point, the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the
specified point and the start point of the text.

Commands | 119

Style
Changes the style setting.

Layer
Changes the layer.

Color
Changes the color.
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or
number), a true color, or a color from a color book.
You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer
or byblock.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the
selected object.
If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in
the color book, such as PANTONE® 573.

Next
Moves to the next attribute in the selection set. If there are no more attributes,
ATTEDIT ends.

No
Edits more than one attribute at a time. Global editing applies to both visible
and invisible attributes.
Editing attributes globally limits you to replacing a single text string with
another text string. If you edit attributes one at a time, you can edit any or
all of the attributes.
Yes Edits only visible attributes.
Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which
normally are not visible and cannot be selected, enter a backslash (\).
Select the attribute you want to change.
Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally,
not as wild-card characters.

120 | Chapter 2 Commands

No Edits attributes whether they are visible or not. Changes to attributes are
not reflected immediately. The drawing is regenerated at the end of the
command unless REGENAUTO (page 878), which controls automatic
regeneration, is off.
Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which
normally are not visible, enter a backslash (\).
The attributes that match the specified block name, attribute tag, and attribute
value are selected.
Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally,
not as wild-card characters.
See also:
Modify Blocks

ATTEXT (-ATTEXT)
Extracts attribute data, informational text associated with a block, into a file.

List of Prompts
Enter extraction type or enable object selection [Cdf (page
121)/Sdf (page 121)/Dxf (page 122)/Objects (page 122)] : Enter
an option or press Enter
CDF: Comma-Delimited File Generates a file containing one record for each
block reference in the drawing. Commas separate the fields of each record.
Single quotation marks enclose the character fields.
In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name of an existing attribute
extraction template file.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The
extract file's file name extension is .txt for CDF or SDF format.
SDF: Space-Delimited File Generates a file containing one record for each
block reference in the drawing. The fields of each record have a fixed width;
therefore, field separators or character string delimiters are not used.
In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name of an existing attribute
extraction template file.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The
extract file's file name extension is .txt for CDF or SDF format.

Commands | 121

DXF: Drawing Interchange File Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing
Interchange File format containing only block reference, attribute, and
end-of-sequence objects. DXF-format extraction requires no template. The file
name extension .dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The
extract file's file name extension is .dxx for DXF format.
Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract.
See also:
Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

ATTIPEDIT
Changes the textual content of an attribute within a block.

Summary
If you select a single-line attribute, displays the In-Place Text Editor (page 675)
without the ruler. Right-click to display options. Selecting a multiple-line
attribute displays the In-Place Text Editor (page 675) with the ruler.

Depending on the setting of the ATTIPE (page 1175) system variable, the
right-click menu changes the formatting and editing operations available for
compatibility with previous AutoCAD for Mac releases.
NOTE Not all MTEXT formatting options are available for multiline attributes even
with the full In-Place Editor.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select attribute to edit: Select an attribute within a block

122 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Modify a Block Attribute Definition

ATTREDEF
Redefines a block and updates associated attributes.

Summary
New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values.
Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. Any old
attributes that are not included in the new block definition are deleted.
WARNING
ATTREDEF removes any format or property changes made with the ATTEDIT
or EATTEDIT commands. It also deletes any extended data associated with
the block, and might affect dynamic blocks and blocks created by third-party
applications.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter the name of the block you wish to redefine:
Select objects for new block:
Select objects:
Insertion base point of new block: Specify a point
See also:
Modify a Block Attribute Definition

ATTSYNC
Updates block references with new and changed attributes from a specified
block definition.

Commands | 123

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Synchronize
Attributes

Summary
You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the current
attributes defined for the blocks.
Use this command to update all instances of a block containing attributes
that was redefined using the BLOCK or BEDIT commands. ATTSYNC does not
change any values assigned to attributes in existing blocks.
NOTE Use the ATTREDEF command to redefine and update blocks in one
command.
Entering ? displays a list of all block definitions in the drawing. Enter the
name of the block you want to update.
Pressing ENTER allows you to use your pointing device to select the block
whose attributes you want to update.
If a block you specify does not contain attributes or does not exist, an error
message is displayed, and you are prompted to specify another block.
WARNING ATTSYNC removes any format or property changes made with the
ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands. It also deletes any extended data associated
with the block, and might affect dynamic blocks and blocks created by third-party
applications.
See also:
Modify a Block Attribute Definition

AUDIT
Evaluates the integrity of a drawing and corrects some errors.

124 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
For the current space, Audit places objects for which it reports errors in the
Previous selection set. If the AUDITCTL system variable is set to 1, a text file
with an .adt file extension is created that describes the problems and the action
taken.
For easy access, AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the
Previous selection set. However, editing commands affect only the objects
that belong to the current paper space or model space.
If you set the AUDITCTL (page 1177) system variable to 1, AUDIT creates a text
file describing problems and the action taken and places this report in the
same folder as the current drawing, with the file extension .adt.
If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix, use RECOVER (page 866)
to retrieve the drawing and correct its errors.
See also:
Repair a Damaged Drawing File

AUTOCOMPLETE
Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the
Command prompt.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Right-click within the Command Line ➤ AutoComplete

Summary
Entering a command or system variable at the Command prompt is assisted
with several features that list or complete the commands and system variables
as they are being typed. The AUTOCOMPLETE command controls which of
the features are turned on.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Append Controls whether commands and system variables are automatically
completed as you type.

Commands | 125

List Controls whether a list of valid commands and system variables is
displayed as you type.
Icon Controls whether the corresponding icon for a command is displayed
in the list. The same icon is used for all system variables.
System variables Controls whether system variables are also included with
the Append and List features.
Delay Sets a time delay in seconds before the Append and List features take
effect.
On Enables the operation of the AutoComplete features that are currently
turned on.
Off Suppresses the operation of the AutoComplete features without changing
their settings.
See also:
The Command Line
Enter Commands on the Command Line

AUTOCONSTRAIN
Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation
of the objects relative to one another.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Auto
Menu: Parametric ➤ AutoConstrain

Summary
You can apply geometric constraints to a selection set of geometry within the
specified tolerance set using the AutoConstrain tab in the Constraint Settings
dialog box (page 212).
Specify the Settings option to change the types of constraints applied, the
order in which they are applied, and the applicable tolerances.

126 | Chapter 2 Commands

The Settings option displays the Constraint Settings dialog box with the
Autoconstrain tab (page ?) selected.
See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

B Commands
BASE
Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Set Base
Point
Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Base
Command entry: base (or 'base for transparent use)

Summary
The base point is expressed as coordinates in the current UCS. When you
insert or externally reference the current drawing into other drawings, this
base point is used as the insertion base point.
See also:
Insert Blocks

BATTMAN
Manages the attributes for a selected block definition.

Commands | 127

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Manage
Attributes
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager

Summary
The Block Attribute Manager (page 128) is displayed.
If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message
is displayed.
This command controls all attribute properties and settings of a selected block
definition. Any changes to the attributes in a block definition are reflected in
the block references.
See also:
Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Block Attribute Manager
Manages the attribute definitions for blocks in the current drawing.

128 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
You can edit the attribute definitions in blocks, remove attributes from blocks,
and change the order in which you are prompted for attribute values when
inserting a block.
Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default,
Tag, Prompt, Default, Mode, and Annotative attribute properties are displayed
in the attribute list. For each selected block, a description below the attribute
list identifies the number of its instances in the current drawing and in the
current layout.
You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed in the list by
right-clicking over the attribute headers and choosing the ones to display.
Double-click an attribute to display the Attribute Editor dialog box (page 130),
where you can modify attribute properties.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Select Block
You can use your pointing device to select a block from the drawing area.
When you choose Select Block, the dialog box closes until you select a block
from the drawing or you cancel by pressing ESC.

Commands | 129

If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new block before you
save the attribute changes you made, you are prompted to save the changes
before selecting another block.
Block
Lists all block definitions in the current drawing that have attributes. Select
the block whose attributes you want to modify.
List of Attributes
Displays the properties of each attribute in the selected block.
Remove
Removes the selected attribute from the block definition. If Synchronize Blocks
is clicked and then Synchronize is clicked in the Synchronize Blocks dialog
box, the attribute is removed from all instances of the block in the current
drawing.
Found in Drawing
Reports the total number of instances of the selected block in the current
drawing.
Found in Current Layout
Reports the number of instances of the selected block in the current model
space or layout.
Synchronize Blocks
Updates all instances of the selected block with the attribute properties
currently defined. This does not affect any values assigned to attributes in
each block.
Update Blocks Applies the changes made and closes the dialog box open.
See also:
Modify a Block Attribute Definition

Attribute Editor Dialog Box
Allows you to edit attributes for a block definition.

130 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The Attribute Editor dialog box contains the following tabs:
■ Attribute (page ?)
■

Text Options

■

Properties (page ?)

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Block Name
Displays the name of the block whose attributes are to be edited.

Attribute Tab (Attribute Editor Dialog Box)
Defines how a value is assigned to an attribute and whether or not the assigned
value is visible in the drawing area, and sets the string that prompts users to
enter a value. The Attribute tab also displays the tag name that identifies the
attribute.

Tag
Sets the identifier assigned to the attribute.

Commands | 131

Prompt
Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you insert the block.

Default
Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when you insert the block.

Options
Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears.
Invisible
Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If selected, hides the
attribute value in the drawing area. If cleared, displays the attribute value.
Constant
Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default value. You cannot change
this property. If a check mark is shown in the check box, the attribute is set
to its default value and cannot be changed. If the check box is empty, you
can assign a value to the attribute.
Verify
Turns value verification on and off. If selected, prompts you to verify the
values you assign to the attribute when inserting a new instance of the block.
If this option is cleared, verification is not performed.
Preset
Turns default value assignment on and off. If selected, sets the attribute to its
default value when the block is inserted. If cleared, ignores the attribute's
default value and prompts you to enter a value when inserting the block.
Lock Location Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference.
When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block
using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized.
Multiple Lines
Indicates whether the attribute was defined as a Multiple Lines attribute and
can contain multiple lines of text.

Text Options Tab (Attribute Editor Dialog Box)
Sets the properties that define the way an attribute's text is displayed in the
drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab.

132 | Chapter 2 Commands

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text.
Oblique Angle
Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis.
Height
Specifies the height of the attribute text.
Width Factor
Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0
condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Multiline Text Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in
a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000
means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text. Not available
for single-line attributes.
Text Style
Specifies the text style for attribute text. Default values for this text style are
assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box.
Backwards
Specifies whether or not the text is displayed backwards.

Commands | 133

Upside Down
Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside down.
Annotative
Specifies that the attribute is annotative.
Justification
Specifies how attribute text is justified.

Properties Tab (Attribute Editor Dialog Box)
Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color, lineweight, and linetype
for the attribute's line. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a plot
style to the attribute using the Properties tab.

Layer
Specifies the layer that the attribute is on.
Linetype
Specifies the linetype of attribute text.
Color
Specifies the attribute's text color.
Lineweight

134 | Chapter 2 Commands

Specifies the lineweight of attribute text.
Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY (page
1365) system variable is off.
Plot Style
Specifies the plot style of the attribute.
If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is
not available.
See also:
Modify a Block Attribute Definition

BATTORDER
Specifies the order of attributes for a block.

Summary
Displays the Attribute Order dialog box (page 135), which controls the order
in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block
reference. You can only use the BATTORDER command in the Block Editor
(page 139).
See also:
Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

Attribute Order Dialog Box
Specifies the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you
insert or edit a block reference.

Commands | 135

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Attribute Definitions
Lists the attribute definitions in the current block.
Drag an attribute definition up or down in the list to reorder it.
See also:
Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)

BCLOSE
Closes the Block Editor.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Block Editor visor ➤ Close

136 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Closes the Block Editor (page 139). If you have modified the block definition
since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes.
See also:
Define Blocks
Modify Blocks

BEDIT
Opens the block definition in the Block Editor.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Edit
Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor
Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area.
Click Block Editor.

Summary
The Edit Block Definition dialog box (page 138) is displayed. Select a block
definition to edit or enter a name for a new block definition to create, then
click Edit Block to open the Block Editor (page 139).
When the BLOCKEDITLOCK (page 1182) system variable is set to 1, the Block
Editor cannot be opened.
The Block Editor is a separate environment for creating and changing block
definitions for the current drawing. You can also use it to add dynamic
behavior to blocks.
See also:
Define Blocks
Modify Blocks

Commands | 137

Edit Block Definition Dialog Box
Select from a list of block definitions that are saved in the drawing to edit in
the Block Editor. You can also enter a name for a new block definition to
create in the Block Editor.

Summary
When you click Edit Block, the Edit Block Definition dialog box closes, and
the Block Editor is displayed.
■ If you selected a block definition from the list, that block definition is
displayed and is available for editing in the Block Editor.
■

If you entered a name for a new block definition, the Block Editor is
displayed, and you can start adding objects to the block definition.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Block to create or edit
Specifies the name of the block to edit or create in the Block Editor. If you
select , the current drawing is opened in the Block Editor.
Name List

138 | Chapter 2 Commands

Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. When
you select a block definition from the list, the name is displayed in the Name
box.
When you click Edit Block, this block definition is opened in the Block Editor.
When you select , the current drawing is opened in the
Block Editor.
Preview
Displays a preview of the selected block definition. A lightning bolt icon
indicates that the block is a dynamic block.
Description
Displays the description of the selected block definition.
See also:
Define Blocks
Modify Blocks

Block Editor
The Block Editor contains a special authoring area in which you can draw and
edit geometry as you would in the drawing area.

Summary
You use the Block Editor to define the objects and behavior for a block
definition.
The following commands are used for editing blocks and are available only
in the Block Editor:
■ BATTORDER (page 135)
■

BCLOSE (page 136)

■

BSAVE (page 158)

■

BSAVEAS (page 159)

When the BLOCKEDITLOCK (page 1182) system variable is set to 1, the Block
Editor cannot be opened.

Commands | 139

Block Editor Visor
Provides tools for adding attributes to the block open for edit, save changes
to a block, and close the Block Editor.
Define Attribute (ATTDEF (page 106))
Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block.
Save (BSAVE (page 158))
Saves the current block definition.
Save New (BSAVEAS (page 159))
Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.
Close (BCLOSE (page 136))
Closes the Block Editor.
See also:
Define Blocks
Modify Blocks

-BEDIT
Summary
If you select a block in a drawing and enter -bedit at the Command prompt,
the selected block is opened in the Block Editor (page 139). If nothing is selected,
the following prompt is displayed:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed
Enter block name (page ?) or [? (page ?)]: Enter a name or ?

Block Name
Specifies the name of a block saved in the current drawing to open in the
Block Editor or specifies the name of a new block to create.

?—List Previously Defined Blocks
Lists the block names in the text window.
Enter block(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press Enter

140 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Define Blocks
Modify Blocks

BHATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill.

Summary
The BHATCH command has been renamed to HATCH.
See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

BLEND
Creates a spline in the gap between two selected lines or curves.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Blend
Menu: Modify ➤ Blend

Summary
Select each object near an endpoint. The shape of the resulting spline depends
on the specified continuity. The lengths of the selected objects remain
unchanged.

Commands | 141

Valid objects include lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, helixes, open polylines, and
open splines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select first object or [CONtinuity]: Select a line or open curve near the end where
the spline should start
Select second object: Select another line or open curve near the end where the spline
should end

Continuity
Specify one of two types of blends.
Tangent Creates a degree 3 spline with tangency (G1) continuity to the selected
objects at their endpoints.
Smooth Creates a degree 5 spline with curvature (G2) continuity to the selected
objects at their endpoints.
If you use the Smooth option, do not switch the display from control vertices
to fit points. This action changes the spline to degree 3, which will change
shape of the spline.
See also:
Draw Splines

BLIPMODE
Controls the display of marker blips.
Obsolete

142 | Chapter 2 Commands

Access Methods
Command entry: 'blipmode for transparent use

Summary
When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+) appears
where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default.

To remove marker blips, use REDRAW (page 869), REGEN (page 877), ZOOM
(page 1153), PAN (page 763), or other commands that redraw or regenerate the
drawing.
See also:
Customize Object Selection

BLOCK
Creates a block definition from selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Create
Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Make

Summary
The Define Block dialog box (page 144) is displayed.

Commands | 143

If you enter -block at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
147).
You create a block definition by selecting objects, specifying an insertion
point, and giving it a name.
See also:
Define Blocks

Define Block Dialog Box
Defines and names a block.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

144 | Chapter 2 Commands

Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the
operating system or the program for other purposes.
The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing.

Preview
If an existing block is selected under Name, displays a preview of the block.

Source Objects
Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or
delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you create
the block.
Specify On-Screen
Prompts you to specify the objects when the dialog box is closed.
Select Objects
Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects
for the block. When you finish selecting objects, press Enter to return to the
dialog box.
Convert to Block
Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you
create the block.
Retain Objects
Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create
the block.
Delete Objects
Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block.
Objects Selected
Displays the number of selected objects.

Base Point
Specifies an insertion base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
Specify On-Screen
Prompts you to specify the base point when the dialog box is closed.
Pick Insertion Base Point

Commands | 145

Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base
point in the current drawing.
X
Specifies the X coordinate value.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate value.
Z
Specifies the Z coordinate value.

Block Behavior
Specifies the behavior of the block.
Scale Uniformly
Specifies whether or not the block reference is prevented from being
non-uniformly scaled.
Annotative
Specifies that the block is annotative.
Match Block Orientation to Layout
Specifies that the orientation of the block references in paper space viewports
matches the orientation of the layout. This option is unavailable if the
Annotative option is cleared.
Allow Exploding
Specifies whether or not the block reference can be exploded.

Units
Specifies units for the block.
Block Unit
Specifies the insertion units for the block reference.

Description
Specifies the text description of the block.

Open in Block Editor
Opens the current block definition in the Block Editor (page 139) when the
dialog box is closed.

146 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Define Blocks

-BLOCK
If you enter -block at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter block name (page ?) or [? (page ?)]: Enter a name or ?

Block Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the
operating system and the program for other purposes if the system variable
EXTNAMES (page 1287) is set to 1.
If you enter the name of an existing block, you are prompted as follows:
Redefine Block Reference By redefining a block, you automatically update
all references to that block. Attributes attached to existing block references
remain unchanged in the drawing. However, new insertions of the block do
not prompt for attributes unless the attribute definitions are included in the
new block definition.
Use the ATTREDEF (page 123) command to update the attributes of an existing
block insert.
Specify Insertion Base Point The point specified as the base point is used
for subsequent insertions of the block. Typically, a base point is the center of
the block or its lower-left corner. The base point is also the point about which
you can rotate the block during insertion. A block with 0 rotation is oriented
according to the UCS in effect when it was created. Entering a 3D point inserts
the block at a specific elevation. Omitting the Z coordinate uses the current
elevation.

■

Annotative:
Enter a to create an annotative block.

Commands | 147

If you enter yes, the block becomes annotative.
Match Orientation to Layout in Paper Space Viewports If you enter yes,
the block’s orientation in paper space viewports will match the orientation
of the layout.
Select Objects If you specify the insertion base point, you are prompted to
select the objects.
The program defines a block using the objects selected, the insertion base
point, and the name provided, and then erases the selected objects from the
drawing. You can restore the deleted objects by entering the OOPS (page 719)
command immediately after BLOCK.

The insertion base point becomes the origin of the block's coordinate system,
which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block.
When you insert the block into a drawing, its coordinate system is aligned
parallel to the current UCS. Thus, you can insert a block at any orientation
in space by setting the UCS first.

?—List Previously Defined Blocks
Lists the block names in the text window.
Enter Blocks to List In the list, external references (xrefs) are indicated with
the notation Xref: resolved.
In addition, externally dependent blocks (blocks in an xref) are indicated with
the notation xdep: XREFNAME, where xrefname is the name of an externally
referenced drawing. The following terms are used in the list:
■

User Blocks: Number of user-defined blocks in the list.

■

External References: Number of xrefs in the list.

■

Dependent Blocks: Number of externally dependent blocks in the list.

■

Unnamed Blocks: Number of unnamed (anonymous) blocks in the drawing.

See also:
Define Blocks

148 | Chapter 2 Commands

BMPOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format.

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page
720)) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.
A bitmap file that contains the objects you select is created. The file reflects
what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing
appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to
No.
NOTE When the FILEDIA (page 1296) system variable is set to 0 (Off), Command
prompts are displayed.
See also:
Export Raster Files

BOUNDARY
Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤
Boundary
Menu: Draw ➤ Boundary

Summary
The Boundary Creation dialog box (page 150) is displayed.
If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
151).

Commands | 149

Each point that you specify identifies the surrounding objects and creates a
separate region or polyline.

See also:
Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

Boundary Creation Dialog Box
Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for creating
a region or polyline using a specified point within an area enclosed by objects.

150 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Pick Points
Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area
around the specified point.

Boundary Retention
Defines the type of boundary object that will be created from the enclosed
area and how enclosed areas are detected.
Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. boundary creates
the boundary as a region or a polyline object.
Retain Boundaries Controls whether the objects created are retained after
the dialog box is closed.
Island Detection Controls whether boundary detects internal closed
boundaries, called islands.

Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects boundary analyzes when defining a boundary from
a specified point.
Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything in the current
viewport extents. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set.
New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set. boundary
includes only the objects that can be used to create a region or closed polyline
when it constructs the new boundary set.
For more information about the options in this dialog box, see HATCH (page
471).
See also:
Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

-BOUNDARY
If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.
Specify internal point (page 152) or [Advanced options (page
152)]: Specify a point or enter a

Commands | 151

Internal Point
Creates a region or polyline from existing objects that form an enclosed area.
Specify a point inside the area.

Advanced Options
Sets the method BOUNDARY uses to create the boundary.
Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]:
Enter an option or press Enter to return to the previous prompt
Boundary Set Defines the set of objects boundary analyzes when it creates
a boundary from a specified point. For information about defining a boundary
set at the Command prompt, see the HATCH (page 471) Command prompt
option.
Island Detection Specifies whether boundary uses objects within the
outermost boundary as boundary objects. For information about specifying
island detection at the Command prompt, see the HATCH (page 471) Command
prompt option.
Object Type Specifies the type of object that boundary creates.
■ Region
■

Polyline

See also:
Create and Combine Areas (Regions)

BOX
Creates a 3D solid box.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid
Primitives flyout ➤ Box
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Box

152 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first corner or [Center (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter
c for center
Specify other corner or [Cube (page ?)/Length (page ?)]:
Specify the other corner of the box or enteran option
If the other corner of the box is specified with a Z value that differs from the
first corner, then no height prompt is displayed.
Specify height or [2Point (page ?)] : Specify the height
or enter 2P for the 2 Point option
Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative
Z axis.
The base of the box is always drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current
UCS (work plane). The height of the box is specified in the Z-axis direction.
You can enter both positive and negative values for the height.

Center
Creates the box by using a specified center point.

Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length.

Commands | 153

Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. The
length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to
the Z axis.

Cube
Creates a box with sides of equal length.

Length
Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. If you enter
values, the length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the
height to the Z axis. If you pick a point to specify the length, you also specify
the rotation in the XY plane.

2Point
Specifies that the height of the box is the distance between the two specified
points.

154 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Create a Solid Box

BREAK
Breaks the selected object between two points.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group (expanded) ➤ Break
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group (expanded) ➤ Break at
Point
Menu: Modify ➤ Break

Summary
You can create a gap between two specified points on an object, breaking it
into two objects. If the points are off of an object, they are automatically
projected on to the object. break is often used to create space for a block or
text.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point
(1) on an object

Commands | 155

The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If
you select the object by using your pointing device, the program both selects
the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next
prompt, you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the
first point.
Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second
break point (2) or enter f
Second Break Point Specifies the second point to use to break the object.
First Point Overrides the original first point with the new point that you
specify.
Specify first break point:
Specify second break point:

The portion of the object is erased between the two points that you specify.
If the second point is not on the object, the nearest point on the object is
selected; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline, specify the
second point beyond the end to be removed.
To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for
both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the
second point.
Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other object
types can be split into two objects or have one end removed.
The program converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle
starting counterclockwise from the first to the second point.

156 | Chapter 2 Commands

You can also break selected objects at a single point with the Break at Point
tool.
Valid objects include lines, open polylines, and arcs. Closed objects such as
circles cannot be broken at a single point.

See also:
Break and Join Objects

BREP
Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity
from surfaces.

Summary
When a solid loses the history of the original parts from which it was created,
the original parts can no longer be selected and modified. BREP also removes
surface associativity. When a surface loses associativity it loses any
mathematical expressions or information about how the surface was created.

Commands | 157

See also:
Display Original Forms of Composite Solids

BROWSER
Launches the default web browser defined in your system's registry.

Summary
Pressing Enter displays your web browser, which automatically connects to
the location you specify. Because browser does not append “http://” to web
locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser.
See also:
Get Started with Internet Access

BSAVE
Saves the current block definition.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Block Editor visor ➤ Save

158 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Saves changes to the current block definition.
You can only use the BSAVE command in the Block Editor (page 139).
See also:
Create Blocks Within a Drawing

BSAVEAS
Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Block Editor visor ➤ Save As

Summary
Displays the Save Block Definition As dialog box (page 159).
You can only use the BSAVEAS command in the Block Editor (page 139).
See also:
Create Blocks Within a Drawing

Save Block Definition As Dialog Box
Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name.

Commands | 159

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Block Name
Specifies a new name under which to save a copy of the current block
definition.
Save Block as Drawing Saves the geometry in the Block Editor as a drawing
file. Selecting an existing drawing file on disk overwrites the file. By default,
the block name specified is used as the drawing file name.
Block List
Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing.
Preview
Displays a preview of the selected block definition.
Description
Displays the description saved with the block definition.
See also:
Create Blocks Within a Drawing

160 | Chapter 2 Commands

C Commands
CAL
Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'cal for transparent use

Summary
CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or
integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the
object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS.
®

You can insert AutoLISP variables into the arithmetic expression and assign
the value of the expression back to an AutoLISP variable.
You can use these arithmetic and vector expressions in any command that
expects points, vectors, or numbers.
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Understand Syntax of Expressions
CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of
precedence:
■ Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set
■

Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division
second, and addition and subtraction last

■

Operators of equal precedence from left to right

Commands | 161

Numeric Expressions
Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with
the operators in the following table.
Numeric operators
Operator

Operation

()

Groups expressions

^

Indicates exponentiation

*,/

Multiplies, divides

+, -

Adds, subtracts

The following are examples of numeric expressions:
3
3 + 0.6
(5.8^2) + PI

Vector Expressions
A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions
combined with the operators in the following table.
Vector operators
Operator

Operation

()

Groups expressions

&

Determines the vector product of vectors (as a vector)
[a,b,c]&[x,y,z] = [ (b*z) - (c*y) , (c*x) - (a*z) , (a*y) - (b*x) ]

*

Determines the scalar product of vectors (as a real number)
[a,b,c]*[x,y,z] = ax + by + cz

162 | Chapter 2 Commands

Vector operators
Operator

Operation

*, /

Multiplies, divides a vector by a real number
a*[x,y,z] = [a*x,a*y,a*z]

+,-

Adds, subtracts vectors (points)
[a,b,c] + [x,y,z] = [a+x,b+y,c+z]

The following are examples of vector expressions:
A+[1,2,3] provides the point located [1,2,3] units relative to point A.
The expression
[2<45<45] + [2<45<0] - [1.02, 3.5, 2]
adds two points and subtracts a third point. The first two points are expressed
in spherical coordinates.
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Format Feet and Inches
Enter feet and inches using the following format:
feet'-inches" or feet' inches" or feet'inches"
You can separate feet, inches, and fractional inches with a dash, a space, or
nothing. You can use any of the following syntax cases to enter valid feet-inch
formatted values:
■ 5' or 60”
■

5'-9” or 5' 9” or 5'9”

■

5'-1/2” or 5' 1/2” or 5'1/2”

■

5'-9-1/2” or 5' 9-1/2” or 5'9-1/2”

■

5'-9 1/2” or 5' 9 1/2” or 5'9 1/2”

To designate inches for linear calculations, entering double quotes (“) is
optional. For example, instead of entering 5'9-1/2”, you could enter 5'9-1/2.

Commands | 163

WARNING With imperial units, CAL interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a unit
separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include at
least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9” from
5', enter 5' -9” rather than 5'-9”.
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Format Angles
The default units for angles are decimal degrees. Enter angles using the
following format:
d'”
You must enter 0d when entering an angle that is less than 1 degree (minutes
and seconds only). You can omit the minutes or seconds if they are zero.
Enter a number followed by r to enter angles in radians. Enter a number
followed by g to enter angles in grads.
The following examples show ways of entering angles:
5d10'20"
0d10'20"
124.6r
14g
Angles entered in any format are converted to decimal degrees.
Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees.
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Use Points and Vectors
Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers. A point defines a
location in space, but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space.

164 | Chapter 2 Commands

Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions,
such as nor and vec, return a vector.

Formatting Points and Vectors
A point or vector is a set of three real expressions enclosed in brackets ([ ]):
[r1,r2,r3]
The notation p1, p2, and so forth designates points. The notation v1, v2, and
so forth designates vectors. In drawings, points are displayed as dots, and
vectors are displayed as lines with arrows.
CAL supports points expressed in all formats.
Point formats
Coordinate system

Point format

Polar

[dist> Expression: P1=cen+[1,0]
>> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc
Command: cal

166 | Chapter 2 Commands

>> Expression: R1=dist(end,end)/3
>> Select entity for END snap: Select an object with an endpoint
This example uses the values of variables P1 and R1:
Command: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent
radius)]: 'cal
>> Expression: P1+[0,1]
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] : 'cal
>> Expression: R1+0.5
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Use System Variables in Calculations
You can use the getvar function to read the value of a system variable.
The syntax is
getvar(variable_name)

The following example uses getvar to obtain the point that is the center of
the view in the current viewport.
getvar(viewctr)
With this method, you can also access the user system variables, USERI1-5
and USERR1-5. For example, to retrieve the value stored in USERR2, enter the
following:
getvar(userr2)
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Convert Units of Measurement
The cvunit function converts either a number or a point from one unit of
measurement to another. See the acad.unt file for a list of units that you can
convert. The syntax is

Commands | 167

cvunit(value, from_unit, to_unit)

The following example converts the value 1 from inches to centimeters:
cvunit(1,inch,cm)
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Use Standard Numeric Functions
CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table.
Numeric functions
Function

Description

sin(angle)

Sine of the angle

cos(angle)

Cosine of the angle

tang(angle)

Tangent of the angle

asin(real)

Arcsine of the number; the number must be between -1 and 1

acos(real)

Arccosine of the number; the number must be between -1 and 1

atan(real)

Arctangent of the number

ln(real)

Natural log of the number

log(real)

Base-10 log of the number

exp(real)

Natural exponent of the number

exp10(real)

Base-10 exponent of the number

sqr(real)

Square of the number

168 | Chapter 2 Commands

Numeric functions
Function

Description

sqrt(real)

Square root of the number; the number must be nonnegative

abs(real)

Absolute value of the number

round(real)

Number rounded to the nearest integer

trunc(real)

Integer portion of the number

r2d(angle)

Angles in radians converted to degrees; for example, r2d(pi) converts
the pi radians to 180 degrees

d2r(angle)

Angles in degrees converted to radians; for example, d2r(180) converts 180 degrees to radians and returns the value of pi

pi

The constant pi

See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Calculate a Vector from Two Points
The functions vec and vec1 calculate a vector from two points.
vec(p1,p2) Provides the vector from point p1 to point p2.
vec1(p1,p2) Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2.
The following example uses CAL to move selected objects 3 units in the
direction from the center of one selected circle to the center of another selected
circle:
Command: move
Select objects
Specify base point or displacement: 'cal
>> Expression: 3*vec1(cen,cen)
Select entity for CEN snap: Specify a circle or an arc

Commands | 169

Specify second point of displacement or : Specify a point or press Enter
The following examples illustrate the meaning of vector and point calculations.
Examples of vector and point calculations
Expression

Meaning

vec(a,b)

Determines vector translation from point a to point b.

vec1(a,b)

Determines unit vector direction from point a to point b.

L*vec1(a,b)

Determines vector of length L in the direction from point a to
point b.

a+v

Determines point b, which is a translation of the point a
through vector v.

a+[5<20]

Determines point b located 5 units away from point a at an
angle of 20 degrees. Note that [5<20] is a vector in polar coordinates.

See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Calculate the Length of a Vector
The abs function calculates the length of a vector.
abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v, a nonnegative real number.
In spherical coordinates (dist> Expression: cen+[0,1]
>> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 'cal
>> Expression: +3*vec1(cen,cen)
The first point of the line is 1 unit in the Y direction from the center of the
first selected circle. The second point of the line is 3 units away from the first
point. The direction of the line is from the center of the first selected circle
to the center of the second selected circle.
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Commands | 171

Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions
You can use Snap modes as parts of arithmetic expressions. The program
prompts you to select an object and returns the coordinate of the appropriate
snap point. Using arithmetic expressions with Snap modes greatly simplifies
entering coordinates relative to other objects.
When you use these Snap modes, enter only the three-character name. For
example, when you use the Center Snap mode, enter cen. CAL Snap modes
set the value of the LASTPOINT (page 1344) system variable.
CAL Snap modes
Abbreviation

Snap mode

END

ENDPOINT

INS

INSERT

INT

INTERSECTION

MID

MIDPOINT

CEN

CENTER

NEA

NEAREST

NOD

NODE

QUA

QUADRANT

PER

PERPENDICULAR

TAN

TANGENT

The following example uses the Center and Endpoint Snap modes in a CAL
expression:
(cen+end)/2

172 | Chapter 2 Commands

CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. It then determines the midpoint
between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected object.
Using the Midpoint Snap mode, in the following example CAL prompts for
an object and returns a point 1 unit in the Y direction from the midpoint of
the selected object:
mid+[,1]
The following example uses the Endpoint Snap mode to calculate the centroid
of a triangle defined by three endpoints:
(end+end+end)/3
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Convert Points Between UCS and WCS
Normally, the program assumes all coordinates to be relative to the current
UCS. The following functions convert points between UCS and WCS.
w2u(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the WCS to the current UCS.
u2w(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the current UCS to the WCS.
You can use w2u to find the WCS origin in terms of the current UCS:
w2u([0,0,0])

Filtering the X,Y, and Z Components of a Point or Vector
The following functions filter the X, Y, and Z components of a point or vector.
Point-filter functions
Function

Description

xyof(p1)

X and Y components of a point; Z component is set to 0.0

xzof(p1)

X and Z components of a point; Y component is set to 0.0

yzof(p1)

Y and Z components of a point; X component is set to 0.0

Commands | 173

Point-filter functions
Function

Description

xof(p1)

X component of a point; Y and Z components are set to 0.0

yof(p1)

Y component of a point; X and Z components are set to 0.0

zof(p1)

Z component of a point; X and Y components are set to 0.0

rxof(p1)

X component of a point

ryof(p1)

Y component of a point

rzof(p1)

Z component of a point

The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in
spherical coordinates:
zof([2<45<45])
The following example provides a point whose X and Y coordinate values are
taken from point a and the Z coordinate value from point b:
xyof(a)+zof(b)
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Calculate a Point on a Line
The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line. You can specify the
location of the point on the line either by its distance from the first point or
parametrically by a t parameter.
pld(p1,p2,dist) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and
p2. The parameter dist defines the distance of the point from the point p1.
plt(p1,p2,t) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2.
The parameter t defines the parametric location of the point on the line.

174 | Chapter 2 Commands

The following are examples of the parameter t:
If t=0 the point is p1
If t=0.5 the point is the midpoint between p1 and p2
If t=1 the point is p2
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Rotate a Point About an Axis
The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point.
rot(p,origin,ang) Rotates point p through angle ang about the Z axis passing
through the point origin, as shown in the following example:

rot(p,AxP1,AxP2,ang) Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis
passing through points AxP1 and AxP2, as shown in the following example.
The axis is oriented from the first point to the second point.

Commands | 175

See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Obtain an Intersection Point
The ill and ilp functions determine intersection points.
ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) Determines the intersection point between two lines (p1,p2)
and (p3,p4). All points are considered three-dimensional.
ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4,p5) Determines the intersection point between a line (p1,p2)
and a plane passing through three points (p3,p4,p5).
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Calculate a Distance
dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is
the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2).
dpl(p,p1,p2) Determines the shortest distance between point p and the line
passing through points p1 and p2.

dpp(p,p1,p2,p3) Determines the distance from a point p to a plane defined
by three points (p1,p2,p3).
dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is
the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2).

176 | Chapter 2 Commands

The following example returns half the distance between the centers of two
selected objects:
dist(cen,cen)/2
The following example finds the distance between the point 3,2,4 and a plane
you define by selecting three endpoints:
dpp([3,2,4],end, end, end)
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Obtain a Radius
The rad function determines the radius of a selected object.
rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object can be a circle, an
arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment.
The following example uses rad with the CIRCLE (page 191) command. The
radius of the new circle is two-thirds of the radius of the selected polyline arc
segment:
Command: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: cen
of Select the circle
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] : 'cal
>> Expression: 2/3*rad

Commands | 177

>> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD function: Select the circle

See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Obtain an Angle
The ang function determines the angle between two lines. Angles are measured
counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis, in the two-dimensional
case, or to a user-specified axis, in the three-dimensional case.
ang(v) Determines the angle between the X axis and vector v. The vector v is
considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS.
ang(p1,p2) Determines the angle between the X axis and the line (p1,p2),
oriented from p1 to p2. The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY
plane of the current UCS.
ang(apex,p1,p2) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2).
The points are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS.
ang(apex,p1,p2,p) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2).
The lines are considered 3D. The last parameter, point p, is used to define the
orientation of the angle. The angle is measured counterclockwise with respect
to the axis going from apex to p.
The following examples show how angles are measured.

178 | Chapter 2 Commands

You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the
ang function, as shown in the following example:
Command: cal
>> Expression: ang(end,end,end)
Select the apex of the angle, and then select the two opposite vertices.
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Calculate a Normal Vector
The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular
to a line or plane), not a point. The vector defines the direction of the normal,

Commands | 179

not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain
another point.
nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector of a selected circle,
arc, or polyline arc segment. This normal vector is the Z coordinate of the
object coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object.
nor(v) Determines the two-dimensional unit normal vector to vector v. Both
vectors are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. The
orientation of the resulting normal vector points to the left of the original
vector v.
nor(p1,p2) Determines the 2D unit normal vector to line p1,p2. The line is
oriented from p1 to p2. The orientation of the resulting normal vector points
to the left from the original line (p1,p2).
nor(p1,p2,p3) Determines the 3D unit normal vector to a plane defined by
the three points p1, p2, and p3. The orientation of the normal vector is such
that the given points go counterclockwise with respect to the normal.
The following illustrations show how normal vectors are calculated:

180 | Chapter 2 Commands

The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected
object. The program displays the object in plan view and does not distort the
object by the parallel projection.
Command: vpoint
Current view direction: VIEWDIR=current
Specify a view point or [Rotate] :
'cal
>> Expression: nor
>> Select circle, arc or polyline for NOR function:
See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

Use Shortcut Functions
The functions in the table are shortcuts for commonly used expressions that
combine a function with the Endpoint Snap mode.
Shortcut functions
Function

Shortcut for

Description

dee

dist(end,end)

Distance between two endpoints

ille

ill(end,end,end,end)

Intersection of two lines defined by four endpoints

mee

(end+end)/2

Midpoint between two endpoints

nee

nor(end,end)

Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to
two endpoints

pldee (d)

pld(d,end,end)

Point at a distance along a line determined
by two endpoints (see pld)

pltee (t)

plt(t,end,end)

Point at a parametric location on a line determined by two endpoints (see plt)

Commands | 181

Shortcut functions
Function

Shortcut for

Description

vee

vec(end,end)

Vector from two endpoints

vee1

vec1(end,end)

Unit vector from two endpoints

See also:
Use the Command Line Calculator

CHAMFER
Bevels the edges of objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Chamfer
Menu: Modify ➤ Chamfer

Summary
The distances and angles that you specify are applied in the order that you
select the objects.

You can chamfer lines, polylines, rays, and xlines.

182 | Chapter 2 Commands

You can also chamfer 3D solids and surfaces. If you select a mesh to chamfer,
you can choose to convert it to a solid or surface before completing the
operation.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
(TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current, Dist2 = current
Select first line (page ?) or [Undo (page ?)/Polyline (page
?)/Distance (page ?)/Angle (page ?)/Trim (page ?)/mEthod
(page ?)/Multiple (page ?)/eXpression (page 185)]: Use an
object selection method or enter an option

First Line
Specifies the first of two edges required to define a 2D chamfer, or the edge
of a 3D solid to chamfer.
If you select lines or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the
chamfer line. You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override
the current chamfer distances with a value of 0.
If the selected objects are line segments of a 2D polyline, they must be adjacent
or separated by no more than one segment. If they're separated by another
polyline segment, CHAMFER deletes the segment that separates them and
replaces it with the chamfer.
If you select an edge on a 3D solid, you must indicate which one of the two
surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface.
Enter Surface Selection Option Entering o or pressing Enter sets the selected
surface as the base surface. Entering n selects either of the two surfaces adjacent
to the selected edge.
After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances, select the edges
of the base surface to chamfer. You can select edges individually or all the
edges at once.

Edge Selects an individual edge to chamfer.

Commands | 183

Loop Switches to Edge Loop mode.
Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface.

Undo
Reverses the previous action in the command.

Polyline
Chamfers an entire 2D polyline.
The intersecting polyline segments are chamfered at each vertex of the polyline.
Chamfers become new segments of the polyline.
If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the
chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered.

Distance
Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.
If you set both distances to zero, CHAMFER extends or trims the two lines so
they end at the same point.

184 | Chapter 2 Commands

Angle
Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an
angle for the second line.

Trim
Controls whether CHAMFER trims the selected edges to the chamfer line
endpoints.
NOTE Trim sets the TRIMMODE (page 1473) system variable to 1; No Trim sets
TRIMMODE to 0.
If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting
lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect,
CHAMFER extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0,
the chamfer is created without trimming the selected lines.

Method
Controls whether CHAMFER uses two distances or a distance and an angle to
create the chamfer.

Multiple
Chamfers the edges of more than one set of objects.

Expression
Controls the chamfer distance with a mathematical expression. See Constrain
a Design with Formulas and Equations for a list of operators and functions
allowed.
See also:
Create Chamfers

Commands | 185

CHAMFEREDGE
Bevels the edges of 3D solids and surfaces.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group ➤ Chamfer Edge
Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Chamfer Edges

Summary
You can select more than one edge at a time, as long as they belong to the
same face. Enter a value for the chamfer distance or click and drag the chamfer
grips.

List of Prompts
Select an Edge Selects a single solid or surface edge to chamfer.
Distance 1 Sets the distance of the first chamfer edge from the selected edge.
The default value is 1.
Distance 2 Sets the distance of the second chamfer edge from the selected
edge. The default value is 1.
Loop Chamfers all edges on a single face. For any edge, there are two possible
loops. After selecting a loop edge you are prompted to Accept the current
selection or choose the Next loop.

186 | Chapter 2 Commands

Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the chamfer distance with
a mathematical expression. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and
Equations.
See also:
Modify Edges on 3D Objects
Create Chamfers

CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed
Select objects (page ?):
Specify change point (page ?) or [Properties (page ?)]:
Specify a new point, or press Enter to enter new values

Specify Objects
If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you
get varying results depending on the object selection sequence. The easiest
way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only
objects other than lines in a selection set.
Except for zero-thickness lines, the objects selected must be parallel to the
current user coordinate system (UCS).

Change Point or Values
Changes the selected objects. The result depends on the type of objects you
select.
Lines Moves the endpoints of the selected lines that are closest to the change
point to the new point, unless Ortho mode is on. If Ortho mode is on, the
selected lines are modified so that they become parallel to either the X or the
Y axis; their endpoints are not moved to the specified coordinate.

Commands | 187

Circles Changes the circle radius. If you selected more than one circle, the
prompt is repeated for the next circle.

Text Changes text location and other properties.
Specify New Text Insertion Point Relocates the text.
Attribute Definitions Changes the text and text properties of an attribute
that is not part of a block.
Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block.
Specifying a new location relocates the block. Pressing Enter leaves the block
in its original location.

Properties
Modifies properties of existing objects.
NOTE
The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles.
You can change several properties at a time. The Enter Property to Change
prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed.
Color Changes the color of the selected objects.
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer,
the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.
■

True Color. Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. The
integer values range from 0 to 255 seperated by commas.

■

Color Book. Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the
selected object.

Elev Changes the Z-axis elevation of 2D objects.

188 | Chapter 2 Commands

You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same
Z value.

Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects.
Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard
linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE (page 575)
to load the linetype.

Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values
are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the
closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.
Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object
has no effect.

Transparency Changes the transparency level of selected objects.
Set the transparency to ByLayer or ByBlock, or enter a value from 0 to 90.
Material Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached.
Annotative Changes the Annotative property of the selected objects.

Commands | 189

See also:
Display and Change the Properties of Objects

CHPROP
Changes the properties of an object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects:
Enter property to change [Color (page ?)/LAyer (page
?)/LType (page ?)/ltScale (page ?)/LWeight (page
?)/Thickness (page ?)/TRansparency (page ?)/Material (page
?)/Annotative (page ?)]:
NOTE
The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles.
If you select several objects with different values for the property you want
to change, varies is displayed as the current value.

Color
Changes the color of the selected objects.
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer,
the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the
selected object.

Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.

Ltype
Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard
linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE (page 575)
to load the linetype.

190 | Chapter 2 Commands

Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.

Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are
predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the
closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.

Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object
has no effect.

Transparency
Changes the transparency level of selected objects.
Set the transparency to ByLayer or ByBlock, or enter a value from 0 to 90.

Material
Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached.

Annotative
Changes the Annotative property of the selected objects.
See also:
Display and Change the Properties of Objects

CIRCLE
Creates a circle.

Commands | 191

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group ➤ Circle flyout
Menu: Draw ➤ Circle ➤ Center, Radius

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify center point (page ?) for circle or [3P (page ?)/2P
(page ?)/Ttr (tan tan radius) (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter
an option

Center Point
Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius.
Radius Defines the radius of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a point.
For example:

Diameter Defines the diameter of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a second
point.
For example:

192 | Chapter 2 Commands

3P (Three Points)
Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference.
For example:

Tan, Tan, Tan
Creates a circle tangent to three objects.
For example:

2P (Two Points)
Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter.
For example:

Commands | 193

TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)
Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects.
Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. The program
draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the
selected points.
For example:

See also:
Draw Circles

CLASSICGROUP
Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter a group option [? (page ?)/Order (page ?)/Add (page
?)/Remove (page ?)/Explode (page ?)/REName (page ?)/Se-

194 | Chapter 2 Commands

lectable (page ?)/Create (page ?)] : Enter an option or
press Enter

?—List Groups
Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing.

Order
Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful
when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the cut order for the
horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern.
Position Number Specifies the position number of the object to reorder. To
reorder a range of objects, specify the first object's position number.
Reverse Order Reverses the order of all members in a group.

Add
Adds objects to a group.

Remove
Removes objects from a group.
If you remove all the group's objects, the group remains defined. You can
remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option.

Explode
Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component objects.

Ungroup
Removes the group name and the association of objects in the group.

Rename
Assigns a new name to an existing group.

Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting
one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen
layers are not selected.

Create
Creates a group.
Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers,
and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not
spaces. The name is converted to uppercase characters.
See also:
Group Objects

Commands | 195

CLEANSCREENON
Clears the screen of the menu bar and all palettes.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen
Command entry: Cmd-0
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Clean Screen

Summary
The screen displays only the drawing area.
Use CLEANSCREENOFF (page 196) to restore the display of interface items that
were hidden by CLEANSCREENON.
See also:
Set Up the Drawing Area

CLEANSCREENOFF
Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen
Command entry: Cmd-0
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Clean Screen

196 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON (page 196) was used.
Use CLEANSCREENON (page 196) to clear the screen of most user interface
elements.
See also:
Set Up the Drawing Area

CLOSE
Closes the current drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: File ➤ Close

Summary
The current drawing is closed. If you modified the drawing since it was last
saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes.
You can close a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made
no changes or if you are willing to discard changes. To save changes to a
read-only file, you must use the SAVEAS (page 914) command.
See also:
Open a Drawing

CLOSEALL
Closes all currently open drawings.

Summary
All open drawings are closed. A message box is displayed for each unsaved
drawing, in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it.

Commands | 197

See also:
Open a Drawing

COLOR
Sets the color for new objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Format ➤ Color
Command entry: 'color for transparent use

Summary
The Color Palette dialog box (page 198) is displayed.
If you enter -color at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 205).
See also:
Set the Current Color

Color Palette Dialog Box
Defines the color of objects.

Summary
You can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors,
and Color Book colors.

List of Tabs
The following tabs are displayed.
■ Index Color (page 199)
■

True Color (page 200)

■

Color Books (page 203)

198 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Set the Current Color

Index Color Tab (Color Palette Dialog Box)
Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Palettes Specifies a color from the AutoCAD
Color Index. If you hover over a color, the number of the color and its red,
green, blue value are displayed below the palette. Click a color to select it, or
enter the color number or name in the Color box.
The large palette displays colors 10 through 249.
The second palette displays colors 1 through 9; these colors have names as
well as numbers.
The third palette displays colors 250 through 255; these colors are shades of
gray.

Commands | 199

Index Color Indicates the ACI color number when you hover over a color.
Red, Green, Blue Indicates the RGB color value when you hover over a color.
Bylayer
Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which
you create them. When BYLAYER is selected, the color of the current layer is
displayed in the Old and New color swatches.
Byblock
Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black, depending on
your background color) until you group the objects into a block and insert
the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, the objects in the block
inherit the current Color setting.
NOTE The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK options do not apply to the LIGHT (page 572)
command.
Color
Specifies a color name, BYLAYER or BYBLOCK color, or an AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) number of 1 through 255. The New color swatch shows the most
recently selected color.
Old Color Swatch
Displays the previously selected color.
New Color Swatch
Displays the currently selected color.
See also:
Set the Current Color

True Color Tab (Color Palette Dialog Box)
Specifies color settings using true colors.

200 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue,
Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue
(RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true
color functionality. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent
on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

HSL Color Model
Specifies the HSL color model for selecting colors.
Hue, saturation, and luminance are properties of colors. By manipulating the
values of these properties, you can specify a wide range of colors.
Hue (H)
Specifies the hue of a color. Hues represent a specific wavelength of light
within the visible spectrum. To specify a hue, use the color spectrum or specify
a value in the Hue box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid hue
values are from 0 to 360 degrees.

Commands | 201

Saturation (S)
Specifies the purity of a color. High saturation causes a color to look more
pure while low saturation causes a color to look washed-out. To specify color
saturation, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box.
Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid saturation values are from 0
to 100%.
Luminance (L)
Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance, use the color
slider or specify a value in the Luminance box. Valid luminance values are
from 0 to 100%. A value of 0% represents the color black, 100% represents
white, and 50% represents the optimal brightness for the color. Adjusting this
value also affects the RGB value.
Color Spectrum Specifies the hue and purity of a color. To specify a hue,
move the crosshairs from side to side over the color spectrum. To specify color
saturation, move the crosshairs from top to bottom over the color spectrum.
Color Slider Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance,
adjust the bar on the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box.

RGB Color Model
Specifies the RGB color model for selecting colors. The options available on
the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is
specified.
Colors can be broken down into components of red, green, and blue. The
values specified for each component represent the intensity of the red, green,
and blue components. The combination of these values can be manipulated
to create a wide range of colors.
Red (R)
Specifies the red component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or
specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Red box. If this value is adjusted, it will
be reflected in the HSL color mode values.
Green (G)
Specifies the green component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar
or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Green box. If this value is adjusted, it
will be reflected in the HSL color mode values.
Blue (B)

202 | Chapter 2 Commands

Specifies the blue component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or
specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Blue box. If this value is adjusted, it will
be reflected in the HSL color mode values.

Color
Specifies the RGB color value. This option is updated when changes are made
to HSL or RGB options. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the
following format: 000,000,000.

True Color Stored as RGB
Indicates the value for each RGB color component.

Old Color Swatch
Displays the previously selected color.

New Color Swatch
Displays the currently selected color.
See also:
Set the Current Color

Color Books Tab (Color Palette Dialog Box)
Specifies colors using third-party color books or user-defined color books.

Commands | 203

Summary
Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab displays the name of the
selected color book.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Color Book
Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors.
The list consists of all the color books that are found in the Color Book
Locations specified in the Application References dialog box, Application tab.
Displays the pages of the selected color book and the colors and color names
on each page. Color books containing up to ten colors per page are supported.
If a color book is not paginated, the colors are organized into pages containing
seven colors per page. To view color book pages, select an area on the color
slider or use the up and down arrows to browse.
RGB Equivalent Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Color

204 | Chapter 2 Commands

Indicates the currently selected color book color. You can search for a specific
color in a color book by entering the number of the color swatch and pressing
Tab. This action updates the New color swatch with the requested color
number. If the specified color is not found in the color book, the closest
number match is displayed.
Old Color Swatch
Displays the previously selected color.
New Color Swatch
Displays the currently selected color.
See also:
Set the Current Color

-COLOR
If you enter -color at the Command prompt, the following prompts are
displayed.
Enter default object color [Truecolor (page 206)/COlorbook
(page 206)] : Enter a color, enter t, enter co, or press Enter
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or
number), a true color, or a color from a color book.
You can enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the names
for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the color red by
entering the ACI number 1 or the ACI name red.
You can also enter bylayer or byblock. If you enter byblock, all new objects
are drawn in the default color (white or black, depending on your background
color) until they are grouped into a block. When you insert the block in a
drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current setting of COLOR.
WARNING
If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that make up a
block, inserting that block or changing its color produces complex results.
If you enter bylayer, new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on
which you create them. See the LAYER (page 537) command for information
about assigning a color to a layer.

Commands | 205

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three
integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the
selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed.
If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in
the color book.
See also:
Set the Current Color

COMMANDLINE
Displays the Command Line window.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Command Line
Menu: Window ➤ Command Line
Command entry: Cmd-3

Summary
Displays the command line when it has been hidden.
You can display commands, system variables, options, messages, and prompts
in a dockable and resizable window called the Command Line.
See also:
The Command Line

COMMANDLINEHIDE
Hides the Command Line window.

206 | Chapter 2 Commands

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Command Line
Menu: Window ➤ Command Line
Command entry: Cmd-3

Summary
Hides the Command Line. When the Command Line is hidden, you can still
enter commands with dynamic prompts turned on.
See also:
The Command Line

COMPILE
Compiles shape files and PostScript font files into SHX files.

Summary
The Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box
(page 720)) is displayed. Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box. The
compiled file is assigned this name with the file extension .shx.
See also:
Overview of Shape Files

CONE
Creates a 3D solid cone.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid
Primitives ➤ Cone

Commands | 207

Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Cone

Summary
Creates a 3D solid with a circular or elliptical base that tapers symmetrically
to a point or to a circular or elliptical planar face. You can control the
smoothness of 3D curved solids, such as a cone, in a shaded or hidden visual
style with the FACETRES system variable.

Use the Top Radius option to create a cone frustum.
Initially, the default base radius is not set to any value. During a drawing
session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered
base radius value for any solid primitive.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

208 | Chapter 2 Commands

Specify center point of base or [3P (page ?)/2P (page ?)/Ttr
(page ?)/Elliptical (page ?)]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option
Specify base radius or [Diameter (page 209)] : Specify
a base radius, enter d to specify a diameter, or press Enter to specify the default
base radius value
Specify height or [2Point (page 209)/Axis endpoint (page
209)/Top radius (page 209)] : Specify a height, enter an option,
or press Enter to specify the default height value

Center Point of Base
2Point Specifies that the height of the cone is the distance between the two
specified points.
Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cone axis. The axis
endpoint is the top point of the cone or the center point of the top face of
the cone frustum (Top Radius option). The axis endpoint can be located
anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation
of the cone.
Top Radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum.
Initially, the default top radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session,
the default value for the top radius is always the previously entered top radius
value for any solid primitive.
Diameter Specifies the diameter for the base of the cone.
Initially, the default diameter is not set to any value. During a drawing session,
the default value for the diameter is always the previously entered diameter
value for any solid primitive.

3P (Three Points)
Defines the base circumference and base plane of the cone by specifying three
points.
■

2Point (page 209)

■

Axis Endpoint (page 209)

Commands | 209

■

Top Radius (page 209)

2P (Two Points)
Defines the base diameter of the cone by specifying two points.
■

2Point (page 209)

■

Axis Endpoint (page 209)

■

Top Radius (page 209)

TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)
Defines the base of the cone with a specified radius tangent to two objects.
Sometimes, more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program
draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the
selected points.
■

2Point (page 209)

■

Axis Endpoint (page 209)

■

Top Radius (page 209)

Elliptical
Specifies an elliptical base for the cone.
Center Creates the base of the cone by using a specified center point.
■

2Point (page 209)

■

Axis Endpoint (page 209)

■

Top Radius (page 209)

See also:
Create a Solid Cone

CONSTRAINTBAR
Displays or hides the geometric constraints on an object.

Access Methods

Button

210 | Chapter 2 Commands

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Constraint
Display flyout ➤ Show Geometric Constraints
Menu: Parametric ➤ Constraints Bars ➤ Select Objects

Summary
Select an object to highlight the relevant geometric constraints.
Constraint bars can be shown for all or any selection set of constrained
geometries.
The selection preview behavior for constraint bars is as follows:
■ Placing the cursor over an icon on a constraint bar highlights related
geometry.
■

Placing the cursor over a constrained object (while constraint bars are
displayed) highlights the constraint icons associated with the selected
object.

The CONSTRAINTBARMODE (page 1198) system variable or the CONSTRAINTSETTINGS (page 212) command controls the display of geometric constraints
on constraint bars, when constraint bar are displayed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Select objects with constraint bars
Enter an option [Show (page ?)/Hide (page ?)/Reset (page
?)] :Enter the appropriate value to show or hide constraint bars in the
drawing.

Show
Displays constraint bars for the selected objects with geometric constraints
applied to them.

Hide
Hides constraint bars for the selected objects with geometric constraints applied
to them.

Reset
Displays constraint bars for all objects with geometric constraints applied to
them and resets them to their default locations relative to their associated
parameters.

Commands | 211

See also:
Display and Verify Geometric Constraints

CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars.

Access Methods
Menu: Parametric ➤ Constraint Settings

Summary
The Constraint Settings dialog box (page 212) is displayed.
See also:
Overview of Constraints

Constraint Settings Dialog Box
Allows you to control the geometric constraints, dimensional constraints, and
autoconstrain settings.

212 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
The Constraint Settings dialog box includes the following:
■ Geometric Tab (page ?)
■

Dimensional Tab (page ?)

■

Autoconstrain Tab (page ?)

Geometric Tab
Controls the display of constraint types on constraint bars.
Infer Geometric Constraints Infers geometric constraints when creating and
editing geometry.
Displayed Constraints Controls the display of constraint bars or constraint
point markers for objects in the drawing editor.
For example, you can hide the display of constraint bars for Horizontal and
Vertical constraints.
Select All Selects the geometric constraint types.
Clear All Clears the selected geometric constraint types.

Commands | 213

Display Constraints in the Current Plane Displays constraint bars for
geometrically constrained objects only on the current plane.
Icon Transparency Sets the transparency level of constraint bars in a drawing.
Show Constraint Bars After Applying Constraints to Selected Objects
Displays relevant constraint bars after you apply a constraint manually or
when you use the AUTOCONSTRAIN (page 126) command.
Temporarily Display Constraint Bars When Objects Are Selected
Temporarily displays the constraint bars of the selected objects.

Dimensional Tab
Sets preferences in behavior when displaying dimensional constraints.
Dimensional Constraint Format Sets the display of the dimensional name
format and lock icon.
Dimension Name Format Specifies the format for the text displayed when
dimensional constraints are applied.
Set the name format to display: Name, Value, or Name and Expression.
For example: Width=Length/2
Show Lock Icon for Annotational Constraints Displays a lock icon against
an object that has an annotational constraint applied (DIMCONSTRAINTICON
(page 1228) system variable).
Show Hidden Dynamic Constraints for Selected Objects Displays dynamic
constraints that have been set to hide when selected.

Autoconstrain Tab
Controls the constraints that are applied to a selection set, and the order in
which they are applied when using the AUTOCONSTRAIN (page 126) command.
The following conditions are checked before multiple geometric constraints
are applied:
■

Are the objects perpendicular or tangential to each other within the
tolerances specified in the AutoConstrain tab?

■

Do they also intersect within the specified tolerances?

If the first condition is met, then tangent and perpendicular constraints are
always applied if the check boxes are cleared.
If you select the additional check boxes, then the distance tolerance is
considered for intersecting objects. If the objects do not intersect but the
nearest distance between them is within the distance tolerance specified, then
the constraint will be applied even if the check boxed are selected.

214 | Chapter 2 Commands

Autoconstrain Headings
■ Applied — Controls the constraints that are applied when applying
constraints to multiple objects.
■

Constraint Type — Controls the type of constraint applied to objects.

Tolerances Sets the acceptable tolerance values to determine whether a
constraint can be applied.
■ Distance — Distance tolerance are applied to coincident, concentric,
tangent, and collinear constraints.
■

Angle — Angular tolerance are applied to horizontal, vertical, parallel,
perpendicular, tangent, and collinear constraints.

Tangent Objects Must Share an Intersection Point Specifies that two curves
must share a common point (as specified within the distance tolerance) for
the tangent constraint to be applied.
Perpendicular Objects Must Share an Intersection Point Specifies that lines
must intersect or the endpoint of one line must be coincident with the other
line or endpoint of the line as specified within the distance tolerance.
See also:
Overview of Constraints

+CONSTRAINTSETTINGS
Controls the tab that is displayed by default when the Constraint Settings
dialog box is invoked.
Tab Index

Tab Displayed

0

Geometric tab

1

Dimensional tab

2

AutoConstrain tab

See also:
Overview of Constraints

Commands | 215

CONTENT
Opens the Content palette.

Access

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block Tool group (expanded) ➤ Content
Palette
Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Content
Menu: Window ➤ Content
Command entry: Cmd-2

Summary
The Content palette (page 216) allows you to insert blocks from the current
drawing or a custom library of blocks. You create libraries to access and
organize your blocks. Blocks that you use frequently can be added to the
Favorites library.
See also:
The Content Palette

Content Palette
Allows you to access and insert your blocks stored in libraries.

216 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Libraries List
Displays the available libraries. Select a library to insert blocks from or select
Manage Libraries to display the Manage Content Libraries dialog box (page
218). The following libraries are available by default:
■

Favorites - Blocks that you have selected as favorites from the Blocks list.

■

Blocks in Current Drawing - Lists the blocks in the current drawing
that you can create new inserts from.

Manage Content Libraries
Displays the Manage Content Libraries dialog box (page 218) in which you
create and manage content of libraries.

Blocks List
Displays the blocks in the library selected from the Libraries list.
Click a block from the list to insert it in the current drawing. If you right-click
in the Blocks list, one of two shortcut menus is displayed. The Blocks List
shortcut menu (page 218) is displayed when you right-click an empty area of
the Blocks list, while the Block shortcut menu (page 218) is displayed when
you right-click over a block thumbnail.

Filter Blocks List
Filters the blocks displayed in the Blocks list. Click the ‘X’ in the text box to
clear the current filter.

Commands | 217

Enter a text string to control which blocks are displayed in the Blocks list.
Only the names of the blocks that contain the text string are displayed in the
Blocks list.

Blocks List Shortcut Menu
The following options are available when you right-click in an empty area of
the Blocks list:
■

Small Thumbnails - Small thumbnails for the blocks in the current
library are displayed in the Blocks list.

■

Medium Thumbnails - Medium thumbnails for the blocks in the current
library are displayed in the Blocks list.

■

Large Thumbnails - Large thumbnails for the blocks in the current
library are displayed in the Blocks list.

■

Manage Libraries - Displays the Manage Content Libraries dialog box
(page 218).

Block Shortcut Menu
The following options are available when you right-click a block thumbnail
in the Blocks list:
■

Insert in Drawing - Starts the insertion of the block in the current
drawing.

■

Add to Favorites - Adds the block to the Favorites content library.

■

Thumbnail Size - Controls the size of the thumbnails displayed in the
Blocks list: small, medium, or large.

■

Remove - Removes the selected block from the current content library.

■

Manage Libraries - Displays the Manage Content Libraries dialog box
(page 218).

See also:
The Content Palette

Manage Content Libraries Dialog Box
Allows you to create and manage the blocks in a library.

218 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Libraries List
Lists the available libraries. The Favorites library is available by default. Select
a library to manage the blocks contained in the library in the Blocks list.
Double-click the name of a library to rename it.
Create Library (+) Creates a new library and prompts you to enter a name in
an in-place editor.
Delete Library (-) Removes the selected library from the Libraries list.

Blocks List
Lists the blocks contained in the selected library.
Add Block (+) Displays the Open File Dialog (a standard navigation dialog
box) in which you select a drawing (DWG) or drawing template (DWT) file
to add to the selected library.
NOTE Hold down the Command key to select more than one file.
Delete Library (-) Removes the selected block from the library.
Filter Blocks List Filters the blocks displayed in the Blocks list. Click the ‘X’
in the text box to clear the current filter. Enter a text string to control which
blocks are displayed in the Blocks list. Only the names of the blocks that
contain the text string are displayed in the Blocks list.
See also:
The Content Palette

Commands | 219

CONTENTCLOSE
Closes the Content palette.

Summary
Closes the Content palette that is displayed with the CONTENT (page 216)
command.
See also:
The Content Palette

CONVERT
Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release
13 or earlier.

Sumary
Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous release
is opened in Release 14 or later. Information about the rotation of a hatch
pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS since
creating the hatch. When updating hatches with CONVERT, it is recommended
that you use the Select option so that you can check your results.
In most cases, you do not need to update polylines with CONVERT. By default,
the PLINETYPE (page 1396) system variable specifies that polylines are updated
automatically when you open an older drawing. Polylines may be created in
the old format by third-party applications, and they may be contained in an
older drawing that was inserted as a block and then exploded.
NOTE
Polylines containing curve-fit or splined segments always retain the old format,
as do polylines that store extended object data on their vertices. Editing
commands make no distinction between the two formats.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

220 | Chapter 2 Commands

Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch (page 221)/Polyline
(page 221)/All (page 221)] : Enter h for hatches, p for polylines, or
a for both
Hatch Converts all hatches in the drawing.
Polyline Converts all polylines in the drawing.
All Converts all polylines and hatches in the drawing.
See also:
Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications

CONVTOMESH
Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh
objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ Convert to Mesh

Summary
Take advantage of the detailed modeling capabilities of 3D mesh by converting
objects such as 3D solids and surfaces to mesh.

Use this method to convert 3D faces (3DFACE) and legacy polygonal and
polyface meshes (from AutoCAD 2009 and earlier). You can also convert 2D
objects such as regions and closed polylines.

Commands | 221

The level of smoothness upon conversion depends on the mesh type setting
(FACETERMESHTYPE (page 1291) system variable). If the mesh type is not set
to be optimized, the converted object is not smoothed.
To convert mesh objects to 3D surfaces or solids, use CONVTOSOLID (page
223) or CONVTOSURFACE (page 225) commands.
Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh
Object type
3D solids
3D surfaces
3D faces
Polyface and polygon meshes (legacy)
Regions
Closed polylines

See also:
Create Meshes by Conversion

CONVTONURBS
Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ Convert to NURBS

Summary
Converts solids and procedural surfaces to NURBS surfaces.

222 | Chapter 2 Commands

To convert meshes to NURBS surfaces, convert them to a solid or surface first
with CONVTOSOLID (page 223) or CONVTOSURFACE (page 225) and then
convert them to NURBS surfaces.
See also:
Create NURBS Surfaces

CONVTOSOLID
Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Convert to Solid

Summary
Take advantage of the solid modeling capabilities available for 3D solids. When
you convert mesh, you can specify whether the converted objects are smoothed
or faceted, and whether the faces are merged.

Commands | 223

The smoothness and number of faces of the resulting 3D solid are controlled
by the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT (page 1437) system variable. Whereas the
previous example shows a conversion to a smooth, optimized 3D solid, the
following example shows a conversion to a faceted 3D solid in which the faces
are not merged, or optimized.

The following tables list the objects that can be converted to solid objects and
some limitations on their conversion.
Objects that Can Be Converted to 3D Solids
Object

Required properties

Mesh

Encloses a volume with no gaps between edges (watertight)

Polyline

Closed, uniform-width, with thickness

Polyline

Closed, zero-width, with thickness

Surface

Encloses a volume with no gaps between edges (such as a revolved
surface that is capped at both ends or closed mesh objects that
were converted to surfaces). If the surfaces enclose a watertight
area, you can also convert to a solid with the SURFSCULPT (page
1023) command.

Limitations on Conversion to Solid Objects
Object

Description

Polyline

Cannot contain zero-width vertices.

Polyline

Cannot contain segments of variable width.

224 | Chapter 2 Commands

Object

Description

Separate objects
that simulate a
closed surface

Cannot be a planar surface with contiguous edges or an exploded
3D solid box into six regions. However, you cannot convert those
separate objects back to a solid with CONVTOSOLID.

Planar surfaces
with contiguous
edges

Cannot convert separate objects unless they enclose a volume
without gaps. If the surfaces enclose a watertight area, you can
convert to a solid with the SURFSCULPT (page 1023) command.

Exploded 3D solid

Cannot convert separate objects (in this case, regions) with the
CONVTOSOLID command. You can, however, convert them to a
solid with the SURFSCULPT (page 1023) command.

You can select the objects to convert before you start the command.
The DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable controls whether the geometry used
to create 3D objects is automatically deleted when the new object is created
or whether you are prompted to delete the objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects Specifies one or more objects to convert to 3D solid objects.
You can select objects with thickness or mesh objects.
If one or more objects in the selection set are invalid for the command, you
will be prompted again to select objects.
See also:
Create 3D Solids from Objects

CONVTOSURFACE
Converts objects to 3D surfaces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Convert to Surface

Commands | 225

Summary
As you convert objects to surfaces, you can specify whether the resulting object
is smooth or faceted.

When you convert a mesh, the smoothness and number of faces of the
resulting surface are controlled by the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT (page 1437)
system variable. Whereas the previous example shows a conversion to a
smooth, optimized surface, the following example shows a conversion to a
faceted surface in which the faces are not merged, or optimized.

With the CONVTOSURFACE command, you can convert the following objects
into surfaces:
Objects That Can Be Converted to 3D Surfaces
Objects
2D solids
3D solids
Regions

226 | Chapter 2 Commands

Objects
Open, zero-width polylines with thickness
Lines with thickness
Arcs with thickness
Mesh objects
Planar 3D faces

objects converted to surfaces

You can select the objects to convert before you start the command.

Commands | 227

NOTE You can create surfaces from 3D solids with curved faces, such as a cylinder,
with the EXPLODE (page 407) command.
The DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable controls whether the geometry used
to create 3D objects is automatically deleted when the new object is created
or whether you are prompted to delete the objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects Specifies one or more objects to convert to surfaces.
If one or more objects in the selection set are invalid for the command, you
will be prompted again to select objects.
See also:
Convert Objects to Procedural Surfaces

COPY
Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Copy
Menu: Modify ➤ Copy
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, and right-click in the drawing
area. Click Copy Selection.

228 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary

With the COPYMODE (page 1202) system variable, you can control whether
multiple copies are created automatically.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you
finish
Specify base point or [Displacement/mOde/Multiple]
: Specify a base point or enter an option
Specify second point or [Array] : Specify a second point or enter an option

Commands | 229

Displacement
Specifies a relative distance and direction using coordinates.
The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far from the
original the copied objects are to be placed and in what direction.
If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is
interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3
for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects are copied
2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current
location.

Mode
Controls whether the command repeats automatically (COPYMODE (page
1202) system variable).
Single Creates a single copy of selected objects and ends the command.
Multiple Overrides the Single mode setting. The COPY command is set to
repeat automatically for the duration of the command.

Array
Arranges a specified number of copies in a linear array.
Number of Items to Array Specifies the number of items in the array,
including the original selection set.
Second Point Determines a distance and direction for the array relative to
the base point. By default, the first copy in the array is positioned at the
specified displacement. The remaining copies are positioned in a linear array
beyond that point using the same incremental displacement.
Fit Positions the final copy in the array at the specified displacement. The
other copies are fit in a linear array between the original selection set and the
final copy.
See also:
Copy Objects

COPYBASE
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard along with a specified base point.

230 | Chapter 2 Commands

Access Methods
Menu: Edit ➤ Copy with Base Point
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Clipboard ➤ Copy with Base Point.

Summary
The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard.
■ Use PASTECLIP (page 766) to move the copied objects from the Clipboard
to a location in the same document or to another document.
■

When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE, it is placed relative to
the specified base point.

See also:
Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

COPYCLIP
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard.

Access Methods
Menu: Edit ➤ Copy
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Clipboard ➤ Copy.
Command entry: Cmd-C

Summary
COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the
contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing.
NOTE If the cursor is in the drawing area, the selected objects are copied to the
Clipboard. If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window, the selected
text is copied to the Clipboard.
When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available
formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format

Commands | 231

that retains the most information is used. You can also use Copy and Paste
to transfer objects between drawings.
See also:
Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

COPYHIST
Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard.

Summary
The text is copied to the Clipboard.
See also:
View and Edit Within the Command History

CUI
Manages the customized user interface elements in the product.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface (CUI)

Summary
The Customize dialog box is displayed.
You use the Customize dialog box to customize the menu bar and Tool Sets
palette. For information about customizing the different user interface elements
found in the Customize dialog box, see Customize the User Interface in the
Customization Guide.
See also:
Understand User Interface Customization

232 | Chapter 2 Commands

Customize Dialog Box
Manages customized user interface elements for the menu bar and Tool Sets
palette.

List of Tabs
The Customize User Interface Editor includes the following tabs:
■ Commands (page 233)
■

Menus (page 236)

■

Tool Sets (page 237)

For more information, see Customize the User Interface in the Customization
Guide.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Reset to Default
Resets the commands and user interface elements back to their initial installed
default settings.
See also:
Understand User Interface Customization

Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Creates and manages the available commands that can be added to menus
and tool sets.

Commands | 233

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Commands List
Displays all the standard and custom commands available.
■

Image - Thumbnail of the current image assigned to the command.

■

Command - Name of the command. Displayed on the menu bar when
the command is assigned to a menu or in a tooltip when the command is
assigned to a tool group on the Tool Sets palette.

■

Source - Name of the customization group that the command is stored
in.

Create New Command (+) Adds a new command to the Commands list that
can be added to the user interface.
A custom command can be used to start a core AutoCAD for Mac command
or one defined by a third party. Commands can also contain AutoLISP code.

234 | Chapter 2 Commands

Options Displays a menu which allows you to manage existing commands
in the Commands list.
■ Duplicate - Creates a copy of the command currently selected in the
Commands list. Duplicating a command allows you to modify an existing
command without changing the original one.
■

Delete - Removes the selected command from the Commands list.
Commands that are currently assigned to a menu or Workflow cannot be
deleted.
NOTE
There is no way to undo the removal of a command, be sure to selected
the correct command before you click Delete.

Filter Commands List Filters the commands displayed in the Commands list.
Click the ‘X’ in the text box to clear the current filter.
Enter a text string to control which commands are displayed in the Commands
list. Only the names of the commands that contain the text string are displayed
in the Commands list.

Properties
Displays the properties and values that define the selected command in the
Command list.
Name Displays the name of the command. The name you enter is the label
or tooltip name displayed in the program.
Description Displays the description for the command. The description you
enter is displayed in a tooltip.
Macro Displays the macro assigned to the command. Enter a new or change
the existing macro for the command.
Image Specifies the raster image to use for the command when it is added to
a tool set.
Preview Displays a thumbnail of the image currently assigned to the command.

Information
Displays some basic information about the field that currently has cursor focus
under Properties.
See also:
Customize Commands

Commands | 235

Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Creates and manages the menus and menu items on the Mac OS menu bar.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Commands List
Displays a list of the standard and custom commands that can be added to
menus and tool sets. You must be on the Commands tab (page 233) if you want
to create or edit a command.
Drag the command to the location in the menu you want it positioned and
drop it. The location of the command is indicated by the horizontal bar. If
you hover over a menu or sub-menu while dragging a command, the menu
or sub-menu will expand after a short interval.
Filter Commands List Filters the commands displayed in the Commands list.
Click the ‘X’ in the text box to clear the current filter.

236 | Chapter 2 Commands

Enter a text string to control which commands are displayed in the Commands
list. Only the names of the commands that contain the text string are displayed
in the Commands list.

Menus List
Lists the menus available on the Mac OS menu bar. Expand a menu to see the
commands and sub-menus that are assigned to the menu.
Create New Element(+) Displays a menu which allows you to create a new
menu or sub-menu.
■ Add Menu - Creates a new parent menu that is displayed directly on the
Mac OS menu bar.
■

Add Sub-menu - Creates a new sub-menu that is used to organize related
commands on a menu.

Options Displays a menu which allows you to manage the commands and
sub-menus in a menu.
■ Insert Separator - Adds a new separator after the selected command or
sub-menu in the Menus list. When inserted, a solid horizontal line is
displayed in the menu when displayed from the Mac OS menu bar.
■

Duplicate - Creates a copy of the command, sub-menu, or separator
currently selected in the Menus list.

■

Delete - Removes the selected command, sub-menu, or separator from
the Menus list.

See also:
Customize Menus

Tool Sets Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Creates and manages the tools in the Workflow palette.

Commands | 237

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Commands List
Displays a list of the standard and custom commands that can be added to
menus and tool sets. You must be on the Commands tab (page 233) if you want
to create or edit a command.
Drag the command to the location in the menu you want it positioned and
drop it. The location of the command is indicated by the horizontal bar. If
you hover over a menu or sub-menu while dragging a command, the menu
or sub-menu will expand after a short interval.
Filter Commands List Filters the commands displayed in the Commands list.
Click the ‘X’ in the text box to clear the current filter.
Enter a text string to control which commands are displayed in the Commands
list. Only the names of the commands that contain the text string are displayed
in the Commands list.

238 | Chapter 2 Commands

Tool Sets List
Lists the tool sets available on the Tool Sets palette. Expand a tool set to see
the commands, tool groups, and drop-downs (also known as flyouts) that are
assigned to the tool set.
Right-click over a tool set in the list and choose Specify Tool Set Image to
display the Specify Tool Set Image dialog box (page 240). The image assigned
appears next to the tool set name in the Tool Sets list on the Tool Sets palette.
Create New Element(+) Displays a menu which allows you to create a new
tool set, tool group, or drop-down.
■ Add Tool Set - Creates a new tool set that can be accessed from the Tool
Sets palette. Only one tool set can be displayed at a time on the Tool Sets
palette.
You do not add commands directly to a tool set, but to a tool group under
a tool set.
■

Add Tool Group - Creates a new tool group that is used to organize
related commands in a tool set.
Tool groups are collapsed by default, and display the commands and
drop-downs above the separator in the tool group. Commands and
drop-downs below the separator are hidden until the discolsure triangle
for the tool group is clicked on the Tool Sets palette. Click the Lock icon
on a tool group’s title bar to keep it expanded.

■

Add Drop-down - Creates a new drop-down (of flyout) that is used to
group related commands into a single button on a tool group.

Options Displays a menu which allows you to manage the tool groups,
commands, and drop-downs in a tool set.
■ Insert Separator - Adds a new separator after the selected command or
drop-down in the Tool Sets list. When inserted, a solid horizontal line is
displayed in the tool group or drop-down. A separator on a tool group
controls which commands and drop-downs are displayed by default or are
only available when the tool group is expanded.
■

Duplicate - Creates a copy of the selected tool group, command,
drop-down, or separator currently selected in the Tool Sets list.

■

Delete - Removes the selected tool group, command, drop-down, or
separator from the Tool Sets list.

See also:
Customize Tool Sets

Commands | 239

Specify Tool Set Image Dialog Box
Assigns an external image or internal resource to a tool set.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Image Displays the name of the resource or external image file that is assigned
to the tool set.
Click […] to display the Select an Image File dialog box and specify the external
image to assign to the tool set.
Preview Displays a thumbnail of the selected image.
See also:
Customize Tool Sets

CUTCLIP
Copies selected objects to the Clipboard and removes them from the drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: Edit ➤ Cut
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Clipboard ➤ Cut.
Command entry: Cmd-X

240 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
CUTCLIP copies selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from the
drawing.
You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document (see PASTECLIP
(page 766)).
When you want to use objects from a drawing file in another application, you
can cut these objects to the Clipboard and then paste them into another
application. You can also use Cut and Paste to transfer objects between
drawings.
See also:
Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard

CVADD
Adds control vertices to NURBS surfaces and splines.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤
Add CV

Summary
Adds control vertices in the U or V direction, or adds points directly on a
surface or spline. This illustration shows a row of control vertices added in
the V direction.

Commands | 241

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select a NURBS surface or curve to add control vertices. Select a valid

NURBS surface or curve and press Enter.
Point Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter.
Insert Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to place

a point directly on a surface. This option only displays if you select a surface;
it does not display for splines.
Insert Edit Point Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you

to place a point directly on a spline. This option only displays if you select a
spline; it does not display for surfaces.
Direction Specifies whether to add control vertices in the U or V direction.

This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.
See also:
Edit NURBS Surfaces

CVHIDE
Turns off the display of control vertices for all NURBS surfaces and curves.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤
Hide CV

Summary
Turns off the CV display for all NURBS objects.

242 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Edit NURBS Surfaces

CVREBUILD
Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ NURBS Surface Editing
➤ Rebuild

Summary
If you have difficulties editing the control vertices or there are too many
control vertices, you can rebuild a surface or curve with less control vertices
in the U or V direction. CVREBUILD also allows you to change the degree of
the surface or curve.

Commands | 243

If you select a surface, the Rebuild Surface dialog box (page 244) is displayed.
If you select a spline, the Rebuild Curve dialog box (page 245) is displayed.
See also:
Edit NURBS Surfaces

Rebuild Surface Dialog Box
Rebuilds the CV hull of a NURBS surface.

Summary
Reshapes a NURBS surface by rebuilding the CV hull.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Control Vertices Count
Specifies the number of control vertices in the U and V directions.
In U Direction
Specifies the number of control vertices in the U direction. (REBUILDU (page
1416) system variable)
In V Direction
Specifies the number of control vertices in the V direction. (REBUILDV (page
1417) system variable)

Degree
Specifies the number of control vertices available per span. The higher the
number, the more complex the surface.

244 | Chapter 2 Commands

In U Direction
Specifies the degree of the NURBS surface in the U direction. (REBUILDDEGREEU (page 1415) system variable)
In V Direction
Specifies the degree of the NURBS surface in the V direction. (REBUILDDEGREEV (page 1415) system variable)

Options
Specifies the build options. (REBUILDOPTIONS (page 1416) system variable)
Delete Input Geometry
Specifies whether the original surface is retained along with the rebuilt surface.
(REBUILDOPTIONS (page 1416) system variable)
Retrim Previously Trimmed Surface
Specifies whether trimmed areas from the original surface are applied to the
rebuilt surface. (REBUILDOPTIONS (page 1416) system variable)

Maximum Deviation
Displays the maximum deviation between the original surface and the new
one.
See also:
Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

Rebuild Curve Dialog Box
Rebuilds the shape of a NURBS curve.

Summary
Changes the number of control vertices and the degree of a NURBS curve.
Rebuilding the curve changes its shape.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Curve Geometry Details
Control Vertices Count

Commands | 245

Specifies the number of control vertices. (REBUILD2DCV (page 1413) system
variable)
Degree
Specifies the degree of the NURBS curve. (REBUILD2DDEGREE (page 1414) system
variable)

Options
Specifies the build options. (REBUILDOPTIONS (page 1416) system variable)
Delete input geometry
Specifies whether the original curve is retained along with the rebuilt curve.
(REBUILD2DOPTION (page 1414) system variable)

Maximum Deviation
Displays the maximum deviation between the original curve and the new
one.
See also:
Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves

CVREMOVE
Removes control vertices from NURBS surfaces and curves.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤
Remove CV

Summary
Removes control vertices in the U or V direction. This illustration shows a row
of control vertices deleted in the V direction.
NOTE
The minimum number of control vertices that you can have on a surface or
curve is two in any direction. If you try to remove more, an error displays.

246 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select a NURBS surface or curve to remove control vertices Select a

valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter.
Point Specifies a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter.
Remove Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to

remove a point directly from the surface. This option only displays if you
select a surface; it does not display for splines.
Remove Edit Point Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you

to remove a point directly from the spline. This option only displays if you
select a spline, it does not display for surfaces.
Direction Specifies whether to remove control vertices in the U direction.

This option only displays if you have selected a surface; it does not display
for splines.
See also:
Edit NURBS Surfaces

CVSHOW
Displays the control vertices for specified NURBS surfaces or curves.

Commands | 247

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤
Show CV

Summary
Prompts you to select the NURBS surfaces and curves whose control vertices
you want to display. Non-NURBS surfaces do not have control vertices. You
can convert objects to NURBS surfaces with the CONVTONURBS command.

See also:
Edit NURBS Surfaces

CYLINDER
Creates a 3D solid cylinder.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Cylinder
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Cylinder

248 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
In the illustration, the cylinder was created using a center point (1), a point
on the radius (2), and a point for the height (3). The base of the cylinder is
always on a plane parallel with the workplane. You can control the smoothness
of curved 3D solids, such as a cylinder, in a shaded or hidden visual style with
the FACETRES system variable.

During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the
previously entered base radius value.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify center point of base or [3P (page ?)/2P (page ?)/Ttr
(page ?)/Elliptical (page ?)]: Specify a center point or enter an option
Specify base radius or [Diameter (page ?)] : Specify
a base radius, or enter d to specify a diameter, or press Enter to specify the default
base radius value
Specify height or [2Point/Axis endpoint] : Specify a
height, enter an option, or press Enter to specify the default height value

3P (Three Points)
Defines the base circumference and base plane of the cylinder by specifying
three points.
2Point Specifies that the height of the cylinder is the distance between the
two specified points.
Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the cylinder axis. This
endpoint is the center point of the top face of the cylinder. The axis endpoint
can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length
and orientation of the cylinder.

Commands | 249

2P (Two Points)
Defines the base diameter of the cylinder by specifying two points.
■

2Point

■

Axis endpoint

TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)
Defines the base of the cylinder with a specified radius tangent to two objects.
Sometimes more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program
draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the
selected points.
■

2Point

■

Axis endpoint

Elliptical
Specifies an elliptical base for the cylinder.

Center Creates the base of the cylinder by using a specified center point.
■

2Point

■

Axis endpoint

Diameter
Specifies the diameter for the base of the cylinder.

■

2Point

■

Axis endpoint

250 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Create a Solid Cylinder

D Commands
DBLIST
Lists database information for each object in the drawing.

Summary
The text window displays information about each object in the current
drawing. The program pauses when the window fills with information. Press
Enter to resume output, or press Esc to cancel.
See also:
Display and Change the Properties of Objects

DCALIGNED
Constrains the distance between two points on different objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional
Contraints flyout ➤ Aligned
Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Aligned
Toolbar:

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Aligned option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page
284).

Commands | 251

The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points:
Valid Objects or Points

Characteristics

Line
Polyline segment
Arc
Two constraint points on objects
Line and constraint point
Two lines

■

When a line or an arc is selected, the
distance between the endpoints of the
object is constrained.

■

When a line and a constraint point are
selected, the distance between the
point and the closest point on the line
is constrained.

■

When two lines are selected, the lines
are made parallel and the distance
between them is constrained.

For example,

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first contraint point (page ?) or [Object (page
?)/Point & line (page ?)/2Lines (page ?)] : Pick a
constraint point or select an object, a point and a line, or two lines to be constrained

Constraint Point
Specifies a constraint point for the object.
First Constraint Point Specifies the first point of the object to be constrained.
Second Constraint Point Specifies the second point of the object to be
constrained.

252 | Chapter 2 Commands

Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.

Object
Selects an object instead of a constraint point.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.

Point & Line
Selects a point and a line object. The aligned constraint controls the distance
between a point and the closest point on a line.
Constraint Point Constraint Point (page ?)
Line Selects a line object.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.

2Lines
Selects two line objects. The lines are made parallel and the aligned constraint
controls the distance between the two lines.
First Line Select the first line to be constrained.
Second Line to Make Parallel Select the second line to constrain the distance
between the two selected lines.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.
See also:
Apply Dimensional Constraints

DCANGULAR
Constrains the angle between line or polyline segments, the angle swept out
by an arc or a polyline arc segment, or the angle between three points on
objects.

Access Methods

Button

Commands | 253

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional
Contraints flyout ➤ Angular
Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Angular

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Angular option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page
284).
When you enter or edit an angle value that is either negative or is greater than
360 degrees, the number entered is stored for the expression (for example,
390), but the value displayed is based on the formatting of the units (for
example, 30 if decimal degrees).
When an expression with variables evaluates to greater than 360 or less than
-360, the constraint value is displayed in the Parameters Manager based on
the units of the drawing.
The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points:
Valid Objects or Points

Characteristics

Pair of lines
Pair of polyline segment
Three constraint points
Arc

■

When two lines are selected, the angle
between the lines is constrained. The
initial value always defaults to a value
less than 180 degrees.

■

When three constraint points are specified, the following applies:

■

For example,

254 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

First point — angle vertex

■

Second and third points — endpoints of the angle

When an arc is selected, a three-point
angular constraint is created. The angle
vertex is at the center of the arc and
the angle endpoints of the arc are at
the endpoints of the arc.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select first line (page ?) or arc (page ?) or [3Point (page
?)] <3Point>: Pick a line, or an arc, or three points to be constrained

Line
Selects a line object.
First Line Specifies the first line to be constrained.
Second Line Specifies the second line to be constrained.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.

Arc
Selects an arc and constrains the angle.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.

3Point
Selects three valid constraint points on the object.
Angle Vertex Specifies the angle vertex, which is at the center point of the
constraint.
First Angle Constraint Point Specifies the first angle endpoint of the arc.
Second Angle Constraint Point Specifies the second angle endpoint of the
arc.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.

Commands | 255

See also:
Apply Dimensional Constraints

DCCONVERT
Converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints.

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Convert option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page
284).
Objects other than associative dimensions are ignored and filtered from the
selection set.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select associative dimensions to convert: Select the associative
dimensions to be converted to dimensional constraints
See also:
Apply Dimensional Constraints

DCDIAMETER
Constrains the diameter of a circle or an arc.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional
Contraints flyout ➤ Diameter
Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Diameter

256 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Diameter option in DIMCONSTRAINT
(page 284).
The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points:
Valid Objects or Points

Characteristics

Circle
Arc

■

Constrains the diameter of the circle or
arc.

For example,

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select arc or circle: Select an arc or a circle to be constrained

Dimension Line Location
Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object.
See also:
Apply Dimensional Constraints

DCDISPLAY
Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of
objects.

Commands | 257

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Contraint Display
flyout ➤ Show Dynamic Constraints
Menu: Parametric ➤ Dynamic Dimensions ➤ Select Objects

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Select objects to display or hide the dimensional constraints
Enter an option [Show (page ?)/Hide (page ?)] : Enter
the appropriate value to show or hide dynamic constraints for the selection set of
objects

Show
Displays the dynamic dimensional constraints for any selection set of objects.

Hide
Hides the dynamic dimensional constraints for any selection set of objects.
See also:
Control the Display of Dimensional Constraints

DCFORM
Specifies whether the dimensional constraint being created is dynamic or
annotational.

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Form option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page
284).
Setting the value for this command defines the Constraint Form property of
the object.

258 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter constraint form [Annotational (page ?)/Dynamic (page
?)] : Select a constraint form

Annotational
Applies annotational dimensional constraints to objects.

Dynamic
Applies dynamic dimensional constraints to objects.
See also:
Apply Dimensional Constraints

DCHORIZONTAL
Constrains the X distance between points on an object, or between two points
on different objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional
Contraints flyout ➤ Horizontal
Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Horizontal

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Horizontal option in DIMCONSTRAINT
(page 284).
The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points:
Valid Objects or Points

Characteristics

Line
Polyline segment
Arc

■

When a line or an arc is selected, the
horizontal distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained.

Commands | 259

Valid Objects or Points

Characteristics

Two constraint points on objects

For example,

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first constraint point (page ?) or [Object (page
?)] : Pick a constraint point or select an object

Constraint Point
Specifies a constraint point for the object.
First Constraint Point Specifies the first point of the object to be constrained.
Second Constraint Point Specifies the second point of the object to be
constrained.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.

Object
Selects an object instead of a constraint point.
See also:
Apply Dimensional Constraints

DCLINEAR
Creates a horizontal, vertical, or rotated constraint based on the locations of
the extension line origins and the dimension line.

260 | Chapter 2 Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional
Contraints flyout ➤ Linear

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Linear option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page
284).
The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points:
Valid Objects or Points

Characteristics

Line
Polyline segment
Arc
Two constraint points on objects

■

When a line or an arc is selected, the
horizontal or vertical distance between
the endpoints of the object is constrained.

When a line or an arc is selected, the horizontal or vertical distance between
the endpoints of the object is constrained.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first constraint point (page ?) or [Object (page
?)] : Pick a constraint point or select an object

Constraint Point
Specifies a constraint point for the object.
First Constraint Point Specifies the first point of the object to be constrained.
Second Constraint Point Specifies the second point of the object to be
constrained.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.

Object
Selects an object instead of a constraint point.

Commands | 261

See also:
Apply Dimensional Constraints

DCRADIUS
Constrains the radius of a circle or an arc.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional
Constraints flyout ➤ Radius
Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Radius

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Radius option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page
284).
The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points:
Valid Objects or Points

Characteristics

Circle
Arc

■

For example,

262 | Chapter 2 Commands

Constrains the radius of the circle or
arc.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select arc or circle: Select an arc or a circle to be constrained

Dimension Line Location
Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object.
See also:
Apply Dimensional Constraints

DCVERTICAL
Constrains the Y distance between points on an object, or between two points
on different objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional
Contraints flyout ➤ Vertical
Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Vertical

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Vertical option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page
284).
The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points:
Valid Objects or Points

Characteristics

Line
Polyline segment
Arc
Two constraint points on objects

■

When a line or an arc is selected, the
vertical distance between the endpoints
of the object is constrained.

For example,

Commands | 263

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first constraint point (page ?) or [Object (page
?)] : Pick a constraint point or select an object

Constraint Point
Specifies a constraint point for the object.
First Constraint Point Specifies the first point of the object to be constrained.
Second Constraint Point Specifies the second point of the object to be
constrained.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located
on the constrained object.

Object
Selects an object instead of a constraint point.
See also:
Apply Dimensional Constraints

DDEDIT
Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control
frames.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit

264 | Chapter 2 Commands

Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and
click Edit.
Pointing device: Double-click a text object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select an annotation object or [Undo]:
Object Selection Displays the appropriate editing method for the type of text
you select:
■ Text created using TEXT (page 1044) displays the In-Place Text Editor (page
675) without the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler.
■

Text created using MTEXT (page 674) displays the In-Place Text Editor (page
675).

■

Attribute definitions (not part of a block definition) display the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box (page 265).

■

Feature control frames display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (page
1058).

DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press Enter to end the command.
Undo Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous value. You can
use this option immediately after editing.
See also:
Change Text

Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box
Edits an attribute text object.

Commands | 265

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Tag
Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute in the drawing. The
tag can contain exclamation marks (!). The case change is not immediately
displayed in the tag field.
Prompt
Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when you insert a block
containing this attribute definition.
Default
Specifies the default attribute value.
To use a field as the value, right-click and click Insert Field on the shortcut
menu to display the Insert Field dialog box (page 429).
See also:
Change Text

DDPTYPE
Specifies the display style and size of point objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤
Point Style
Menu: Format ➤ Point Style
Command entry: 'ddptype for transparent use

Summary
The Point Style dialog box (page 267) is displayed.

266 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Draw Reference Points

Point Style Dialog Box
Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting an
icon.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Point Size
Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen
or in absolute units. The point display size is stored in the PDSIZE (page 1389)
system variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value.
Set Size Relative to Screen Sets the point display size as a percentage of the
screen size. The point display does not change when you zoom in or out.
Set Size in Absolute Units Sets the point display size as the actual units you
specify under Point Size. Points are displayed larger or smaller when you zoom
in or out.

Commands | 267

Point Style
Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in
the PDMODE (page 1388) system variable.
See also:
Draw Reference Points

DELAY
Provides a timed pause within a script.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'delay for transparent use

Summary
Specifies the duration of a pause. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays
the start of execution of the next command for about one second. The longest
delay available is 32767, which is slightly less than 33 seconds.
See also:
Overview of Command Scripts

DELCONSTRAINT
Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of
objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group (expanded) ➤ Delete
Menu: Parametric ➤ Delete Constraints

268 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The number of constraints removed are displayed on the command line.
Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from the selected objects.
See also:
Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied

DIM and DIM1
Accesses Dimensioning mode commands.

Summary
The Dim prompt indicates that you're in Dimensioning mode, in which you
can use a special set of dimensioning commands (page ?). (DIM and DIM1
are provided only for compatibility with previous releases.)
Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning
command. Use DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately
return to the Command prompt. To exit Dimensioning mode, enter e or exit,
or press Esc.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Dim: Enter a Dimensioning mode command

Dimensioning Mode Commands
The following commands are available at the DIM prompt.
Dimensioning mode commands
Command

Description

EXIT

Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command prompt. You
can also press Esc to exit Dimensioning mode.

REDRAW

Redraws the current viewport.

STYLE

Changes the current text style.

Commands | 269

Dimensioning mode commands
Command

Description

UNDO or U

Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any
new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning
mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session.

The following table shows which AutoCAD for Mac commands are equivalent
to the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these
Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD for Mac
command.
Dimensioning mode command equivalents
Dimensioning mode
command

Equivalent
command

ALIGNED

DIMALIGNED (page 272)

ANGULAR

DIMANGULAR (page 274)

BASELINE

DIMBASELINE (page 280)

CENTER

DIMCENTER (page 283)

CONTINUE

DIMCONTINUE (page 286)

DIAMETER

DIMDIAMETER (page 289)

HOMETEXT

DIMEDIT (page 291) Home

HORIZONTAL

DIMLINEAR (page 299) Horizontal

LEADER

LEADER (page 567)

JOG

DIMJOGGED (page 296)

NEWTEXT

DIMEDIT (page 291) New

270 | Chapter 2 Commands

Dimensioning mode command equivalents
Dimensioning mode
command

Equivalent
command

OBLIQUE

DIMEDIT (page 291) Oblique

ORDINATE

DIMORDINATE (page 304)

OVERRIDE

DIMOVERRIDE (page 306)

RADIUS

DIMRADIUS (page 307)

RESTORE

-DIMSTYLE (page 314) Restore

ROTATED

DIMLINEAR (page 299) Rotated

SAVE

-DIMSTYLE (page 314) Save

STATUS

-DIMSTYLE (page 314) Status

TEDIT

DIMTEDIT (page 350)

TROTATE

DIMEDIT (page 291) Rotate

UPDATE

-DIMSTYLE (page 314) Apply

VARIABLES

-DIMSTYLE (page 314) Variables

VERTICAL

DIMLINEAR (page 299) Vertical

See also:
Overview of Dimensioning

Commands | 271

DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Aligned
Menu: Dimension ➤ Aligned

Summary
Creates a linear dimension that is aligned with the origin points of the
extension lines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first extension line origin (page 272) or : Specify a point, enter an option,
or press Enter to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify feature location (page 281) or [Undo/Select] : Specify a point, enter an option,
or press Enter to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify feature location (page 288) or [Undo/Select] : Specify a point or press Enter to select an object to
dimension
After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension,
the following prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension line location (page ?) or [Mtext (page
?)/Text (page ?)/Angle (page ?)/Horizontal (page ?)/Vertical (page ?)/Rotated (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option

First Extension Line Origin
Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify
the origin point of the first.

300 | Chapter 2 Commands

Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the
direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the
dimension is drawn.

Mtext
Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension
text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters
or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1049).
If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display
them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting
dimension text, see Select and Modify Objects.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.

Text
Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated
dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets.
To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent
the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the
dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets
([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.

Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.

Commands | 301

Horizontal
Creates horizontal linear dimensions.

Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension
line.
■ Mtext (page ?)
■

Text (page ?)

■

Angle (page ?)

Vertical
Creates vertical linear dimensions.

Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location (page ?)
■ Mtext (page ?)
■

Text (page ?)

■

Angle (page ?)

Rotated
Creates rotated linear dimensions.

302 | Chapter 2 Commands

Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension
lines after you select an object.
For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc
segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly
scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins
of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by
the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of
the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE
(page 314). This value is stored in the DIMEXO (page 1231) system variable.

If you select a circle, the diameter endpoints are used as the origins of the
extension line. When the point used to select the circle is close to the north
or south quadrant point, a horizontal dimension is drawn. When the point
used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant point, a vertical
dimension is drawn.
See also:
Create Linear Dimensions

Commands | 303

DIMORDINATE
Creates ordinate dimensions.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Dimension
flyout ➤ Ordinate
Menu: Dimension ➤ Ordinate

Summary
Ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal or vertical distance from an
origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These
dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the
features from the datum.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify feature location: Specify a point or snap to an object
Specify leader endpoint (page 304) or [Xdatum (page 305)/Ydatum
(page 305)/Mtext (page 305)/Text (page 305)/Angle (page 305)]:
Specify a point or enter an option
Leader Endpoint Specification Uses the difference between the feature
location and the leader endpoint to determine whether it is an X or a Y
ordinate dimension. If the difference in the Y ordinate is greater, the dimension
measures the X ordinate. Otherwise, it measures the Y ordinate.

304 | Chapter 2 Commands

Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader
line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompt is displayed, where you
can specify the endpoint.

Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader
line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompts are displayed, where
you can specify the endpoint.

Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the
dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter
special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page
1049).
If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display
them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting
dimension text, see Select and Modify Objects.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated
dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets.
To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent
the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the
dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets
([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.

Commands | 305

See also:
Create Ordinate Dimensions

DIMOVERRIDE
Controls overrides of system variables used in selected dimensions.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group (expanded)
➤ Override
Menu: Dimension ➤ Override

Summary
Overrides a specified dimensioning system variable for selected dimensions,
or clears the overrides of selected dimension objects, returning them to the
settings defined by their dimension style.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter dimension variable name to override (page 306) or [Clear
overrides (page 306)]: Enter the name of a dimension variable, or enter c
Dimension Variable Name to Override Overrides the value of the
dimensioning system variable you specify.
Clear Overrides Clears any overrides on selected dimensions.
The dimension objects return to the settings defined by their dimension style.
See also:
Override a Dimension Style

306 | Chapter 2 Commands

DIMRADIUS
Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Dimension
flyout ➤ Radius
Menu: Dimension ➤ Radius

Summary
Measures the radius of a selected circle or arc and displays the dimension text
with a radius symbol in front of it. You can use grips to reposition the resulting
radius dimension easily.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select arc or circle:
Specify dimension line location (page 307) or [Mtext (page
308)/Text (page 308)/Angle (page 308)]: Specify a point or enter an option
Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and
the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc
resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD for Mac
automatically draws an arc extension line.

Commands | 307

Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the
dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter
special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page
1049).
If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display
them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting
dimension text, see Select and Modify Objects.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated
dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets.
To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent
the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the
dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets
([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.
See also:
Create Radial Dimensions

DIMREASSOCIATE
Associates or reassociates selected dimensions to objects or points on objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Reassociate
Dimension
Menu: Dimension ➤ Reassociate Dimensions

308 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association
points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed.
A marker is displayed for each association point prompt.
■ If the definition point of the current dimension is not associated to a
geometric object, the marker appears as an X
■

If the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X inside a
box.

NOTE
The marker disappears if you pan or zoom.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select dimensions to reassociate...
Select objects or [Disassociated]: Select the dimension objects to
reassociate or press D to select all disassociated dimensions.
Press Esc to terminate the command without losing the changes that were
already specified. Use UNDO (page 1089) to restore the previous state of the
changed dimensions.
The prompts for the different types of dimensions are:
Linear Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] : Specify an
object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press Enter to skip to
the next prompt
Specify second extension line origin : Specify an object snap location, or
press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Aligned Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] : Specify an
object snap location, enter s and select a geometric object, or press Enter to skip to
the next prompt
Specify second extension line origin : Specify an object snap location, or
press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Angular (Three Point) Specify angle vertex or [Select arc or circle] :
Specify an object snap location, enter s and select an arc or a circle, or press Enter
to skip to the next prompt
Specify first angle endpoint : Specify an object snap location or press Enter
to skip to the next prompt

Commands | 309

Specify second angle endpoint : Specify an object snap location or press
Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Angular (Two Line) Select first line : Select a line, or press Enter to skip
to the next prompt
Select second line : Select another line, or press Enter to skip to the next
dimension object, if any
Diameter Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to
skip to the next dimension object, if any
Leader Specify leader association point : Specify an object snap location,
or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Ordinate Specify feature location : Specify an object snap location, or
press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Radius Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to skip
to the next dimension object, if any
NOTE DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC (page 1234) in
a dimension. Use DIMOVERRIDE (page 306) to clear dimension linear factors in
legacy drawings.
See also:
Change Dimension Associativity

DIMREGEN
Updates the locations of all associative dimensions.

Summary
The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are updated.
Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in the
following cases:
■ After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model
space active; update associative dimensions created in paper space.
■

After opening a drawing containing external references that are
dimensioned in the current drawing; update associative dimensions if the
associated external reference geometry has been modified.

310 | Chapter 2 Commands

NOTE After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version,
the association between dimensions and objects or points may need to be updated.
You can use the DIMREASSOCIATE (page 308) command to reassociate modified
dimensions with the objects or points that they dimension.
See also:
Associative Dimensions

DIMROTATED
Creates a rotated linear dimension.

Summary
Creates a linear dimension with a rotated dimension line.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify angle of dimension line <0>: Specify an angle or press Enter
to accept the default value
Specify first extension line origin (page ?) or : Select one or more objects
and press Enter, or press Enter to select all displayed objects
Select object to extend (page ?) or shift-select to trim
(page ?) or [Fence (page ?)/Crossing (page ?)/Project
(page ?)/Edge (page ?)/Undo (page ?)]: Select objects to extend,
or hold down Shift and select an object to trim, or enter an option

Boundary Object Selection
Uses the selected objects to define the boundary edges to which you want to
extend an object.

Object to Extend
Specifies the objects to extend. Press Enter to end the command.

Commands | 411

Shift-Select to Trim
Trims the selected objects to the nearest boundary rather than extending
them. This is an easy method to switch between trimming and extending.

Fence
Selects all objects that cross the selection fence. The selection fence is a series
of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points.
The selection fence does not form a closed loop.

Crossing
Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points.
NOTE
Some crossing selections of objects to be extended are ambiguous. EXTEND
resolves the selection by following along the rectangular crossing window in
a clockwise direction from the first point to the first object encountered.

Project
Specifies the projection method used when extending objects.

None Specifies no projection. Only objects that intersect with the boundary
edge in 3D space are extended.

UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate
system (UCS). Objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects in 3D
space are extended.

412 | Chapter 2 Commands

View Specifies projection along the current view direction.

Edge
Extends the object to another object's implied edge, or only to an object that
actually intersects it in 3D space.

Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another
object or its implied edge in 3D space.

No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object
that actually intersects it in 3D space.

Commands | 413

Undo
Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND.
See also:
Trim or Extend Objects

EXTERNALREFERENCES
Opens the Reference Manager palette.

Access Methods
Menu: Insert ➤ References Manager

Summary
The EXTERNALREFERENCES command opens the Reference Manager palette
(page 414) when the palette is closed.
NOTE The FILEDIA (page 1296) system variable is ignored when attaching files from
the Reference Manager palette.
See also:
Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Reference Manager Palette
Manage external references attached to the current drawing.

414 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The Reference Manager palette organizes, displays, and manages referenced
files, such as DWG files (xrefs) and raster images.
The Reference Manager palette contains a toolbar along the top. You can
right-click over the files list to display a shortcut menu that allows you to
attach or manage an attached external reference. Click the Show Details button
on the toolbar to view details and thumbnail preview for the selected external
reference.

Commands | 415

See also:
Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Reference Manager Palette Toolbar
Use the toolbar at the top of the Reference Manager palette to attach a drawing
and to refresh the status of a referenced file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Attach Reference
Displays the Select Reference File dialog box. Select the file format you want
to attach and then the file you want to attach to the drawing.
You can attach the following reference file types:
■

DWG files. Starts the XATTACH (page 1137) command.

■

Raster images files. Starts the IMAGEATTACH (page 513) command.

Edit Reference
Opens the selected file reference for edit in the current drawing window.
(REFEDIT (page 871) command)

Toggle References State
Unloads the selected file reference or reloads the file reference if it is currently
unloaded.

Detach Referenced File
Detaches the selected file reference from the drawing.

Refresh Content
Synchronizes the status of the selected file reference with the data in memory.

Relink File
Displays the Select  File to Relink dialog box where you can
update the location of the selected file reference.

Show Details
Displays the Details and Preview panel (page 420) which displays a thumbnail
preview and details for the selected file reference.

416 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

File References Panel Shortcut Menus
When working in the File References panel, there are several shortcut menus
that can be displayed when you right-click on a file reference or an empty
area. The following tables show the shortcut menu items that you are presented
under certain conditions.

Current Drawing File Selected
When the current drawing file is selected, the top node in the tree, the shortcut
menu presents the following functions:
Menu Item

Description

Show Details

Displays the thumbnail preview and details for the selected
file reference.

Open a Copy

Opens the drawing in a new drawing window as read-only.

Reveal in Finder

Opens Finder and displays the location where the current
drawing file is stored.

Print

Displays the Print dialog box.

Reload

Reloads all file referenced files attached to the current drawing.
(Unavailable if no file references are attached.)

Close File

Closes the drawing file. If changes were made, you are
prompted to save or discard them before the drawing can be
closed.

Commands | 417

No File Reference Selected
When no file reference is selected, the shortcut menu presents the following
functions:
Menu Item

Description

Attach Reference

Displays the Select Reference File dialog box.

Reload All References

Reloads all file referenced files attached to the current drawing.
(Unavailable if no file references are attached.)

File Reference Selected
When you select a file reference, the shortcut menu presents the following
functions:
Menu Item

Description

Reference Status

Show in Model

Zooms to the location of the file reference attachment in the drawing so it is
fully displayed in the drawing area.

Available only for file references with a Loaded status Unavailable when Unloaded,
Not Found or Unresolved.

Edit Xref in
Place

Opens the selected file reference for
edit in the current drawing window.

Available only for DWG file
references with a Loaded
status - Unavailable when
Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.

Open File

Opens the selected file reference in the
default editor (specified by the operating system).

Available only for file references with a Loaded status Unavailable when Unloaded,
Not Found or Unresolved.

Show Details

Displays the thumbnail preview and
details for the selected file reference.

Always available - status has
no affect on this function.

Reveal in Finder

Opens Finder and displays the location
where the file reference is stored.

Available only for file references with a Loaded status -

418 | Chapter 2 Commands

Menu Item

Description

Reference Status
Unavailable when Unloaded,
Not Found or Unresolved.

Attach

Switches the selected DWG file reference to the Attach attachment type.

Always available for DWG file
references - status has no affect on this function.

Overlay

Switches the selected DWG file reference to the Overlay attachment type.

Always available for DWG file
references - status has no affect on this function.

Unload

Unloads the selected file references.

Always available - status has
no affect on this function.

Reload

Reloads the selected file reference.

Always available - status has
no affect on this function.

Relink File

Displays the Select 
File to Relink dialog box dialog box
where you can update the location of
the selected file reference.

Always available - status has
no affect on this function.

Bind

Binds the selected DWG reference to
the current drawing. Xref-dependent
named objects are changed from
blockname|definitionname to blockname$n$definitionname syntax. In this
manner, unique named objects are
created for all xref-dependent definition
tables bound to the current drawing.

Available only for DWG file
references with a Loaded
status - Unavailable when
Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.

Bind-Insert

Binds the DWG reference to the current
drawing in a way similar to detaching
and inserting the reference drawing.
Rather than being renamed using
blockname$n$definitionname syntax,
xref-dependent named objects are
stripped of the xref name. As with insert-

Available only for DWG file
references with a Loaded
status - Unavailable when
Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved.

Commands | 419

Menu Item

Description

Reference Status

ing drawings, no name-incrementing
occurs if a local named object shares
the same name as a bound xref-dependent named object. The bound xref-dependent named object assumes the
properties of the locally defined named
object.
Detach

Detaches the selected file reference.

Available for all file references
types.

See also:
Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

Details and Preview Panel
The Details and Preview panel, located below the File References panel, allows
you to get information about the file reference in AutoCAD for Mac and
information about the file on disk.

420 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Details
Each file reference shares a common set of properties. Referenced images,
display additional properties specific to the file type. The common set of details
displayed for each file reference is name, status, file size, file type, creation
date, saved path, and found at path. Some of the properties can be edited.
Reference Name Displays the file reference name. This property is editable
for all file reference types.
Status Shows whether the file reference is loaded, unloaded or not found.
This property cannot be edited.
Size Shows the file size of the selected file reference. The size is not displayed
for file references that are not found. This property cannot be edited.
Type Indicates whether the file reference is an attachment or overlay, or the
type of raster image file. This property cannot be edited.
However, if the file reference is a DWG, the property can be toggled from the
File Reference panel.

Commands | 421

Date Displays the last date the file reference was modified. This date is not
displayed if the file reference is not found. This property cannot be edited.
Saved Path Shows the saved path of the selected file reference (this is not
necessarily where the file reference is found). This property cannot be edited.
Found At Displays the full path of the currently selected file reference. This
is where the referenced file is actually found and is not necessarily the same
as the saved path. Clicking the Open button displays the Open dialog box
where you can select a different path or file name. You can also type directly
into the path field. These changes are stored to the Saved Path property if the
new path is valid.

DWG Specific Properties
If you select a referenced DWG (xref), additional properties are displayed.
None of the added image properties can be edited.
Block Unit Specifies the INSUNITS (page 1335) value for the inserted block.
Unit factor Displays the unit scale factor, which is calculated based on the
INSUNITS (page 1335) value of the block and the drawing units.

Image Specific Properties
If you select a referenced image, additional properties are displayed. None of
the added image properties can be edited.
Color System Displays the color system.
Color Depth The amount of information that is stored in each pixel of a raster
image. Higher color depth values produce smoother degrees of shading.
Pixel Width The width of the raster image measured in pixels.
Pixel Height The height of the raster image measured in pixels.
Resolution The width and height resolution in dots per inch (dpi).
Default Size The width and height of the raster image measured in AutoCAD
for Mac units.

Thumbnail Preview
The thumbnail preview displays a small image of the file reference that was
selected from the File References panel. If there is no preview available, the
text “Preview not available” is displayed in the center of the pane.
See also:
Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

422 | Chapter 2 Commands

EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE
Closes the Reference Manager palette.

Summary
The EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE command closes the Reference Managers
palette when currently displayed.
See also:
Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings

EXTRUDE
Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Extrude
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Extrude

Summary
When extruded, open curves create surfaces and closed curves create solids or
surfaces, depending on the specified mode. For surfaces, use the SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1453) system variable to control whether the surface use a
NURBS surface or a procedural surface. Use the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY (page
1452) system variable to control whether procedural surfaces are associative. To
extrude meshes, use the MESHEXTRUDE (page 632) command.

Commands | 423

You can extrude either an open or closed object to create a 3D surface or solid.
If you extrude a surface, you will create a regular surface or a NURBS surface
depending on how the SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1453) system variable
is set. To extrude meshes, use the MESHEXTRUDE (page 632) command.

The DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable controls whether the object(s) and path
(if selected) are automatically deleted when the solid or surface is created or
whether you are prompted to delete the object(s) and path.
You can use the following objects and subobjects with EXTRUDE:
Objects That Can Be Extruded or Used as Paths
Object type

Can be extruded?

3D faces

X

Arcs

X

X

Circles

X

X

Ellipses

X

X

424 | Chapter 2 Commands

Can be extrusion path?

Comments

Object type

Can be extruded?

Can be extrusion path?

Elliptical arcs

X

X

Helixes

Comments

X

Lines

X

X

Meshes: faces

X

Meshes: edges

X

X

2D Polylines

X

X

3D Polylines

X

X

Regions

X

2D Solids

X

3D Solids: edges

X

3D Solids: faces

X

Splines: 2D and 3D

X

X

Surfaces: edges

X

X

Surfaces: planar
and non-planar

X

X

2D polylines with crossing
segments cannot be extruded.
Thickness and width are
ignored.
The extrusion extends
from the center line.

X

Commands | 425

Object type

Can be extruded?

Traces

X

Can be extrusion path?

Comments

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Objects to Extrude Specifies the objects to extrude.

NOTE
Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them.
Mode Controls whether the extruded object is a solid or a surface. Surfaces
are extruded as either NURBS surfaces or procedural surfaces, depending on
the SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1453) system variable.
Height of extrusion Extrudes objects along the positive Z axis of the object's
coordinate system if you enter a positive value. If you enter a negative value,
the objects are extruded along the negative Z axis. Objects do not have to be
parallel to the same plane. If all objects are on a common plane, the objects
are extruded in the direction of the normal of the plane.
By default, planar objects are extruded in the direction of the object’s normal.

Direction Specifies the length and direction of the extrusion with two specified
points. (The direction cannot be parallel to the plane of the sweep curve
created by the extrusion.)
■ Start point of direction. Specifies the first point in the direction vector.
■

End point of direction. Specifies the second point in the direction
vector.

426 | Chapter 2 Commands

Path Specifies the extrusion path based on a selected object. The path is moved
to the centroid of the profile. Then the profile of the selected object is extruded
along the chosen path to create solids or surfaces.

NOTE
Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them.
The path should not lie on the same plane as the object, nor should the path
have areas of high curvature.
The extrusion starts from the plane of the object and maintains its orientation
relative to the path.
If the path contains segments that are not tangent, the program extrudes the
object along each segment and then miters the joint along the plane bisecting
the angle formed by the segments. If the path is closed, the object should lie
on the miter plane. This allows the start and end sections of the solid to match
up. If the object is not on the miter plane, the object is rotated until it is on
the miter plane.
Objects with multiple loops are extruded so that all of the loops appear on
the same plane at the end section of the extruded solid.
Taper angle Specifies the taper angler for the extrusion.

Positive angles taper in from the base object. Negative angles taper out. The
default angle, 0, extrudes a 2D object perpendicular to its 2D plane. All selected
objects and loops are tapered to the same value.
Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object
or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion
height.

Commands | 427

Individual loops of a region are always extruded to the same height.
When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion, the angle of the arc remains
constant, and the radius of the arc changes.
■

Angle of taper. Specifies the taper between -90 and +90 degrees.

■

Specify two points. Specifies the taper angle based on two specified
points. The taper angle is the distance between the two specified points.

Drag the cursor horizontally to specify and preview the taper angle. You can
also drag the cursor to adjust and preview the height of the extrusion. The
dynamic input origin should be placed on the extruded shape, on the
projection of the point to the shape.
When you select the extruded object, the position of the taper grip is the
correspondent point of the dynamic input origin on the top face of the
extrusion.
Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the extrusion height. See
Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations.
See also:
Extrude Objects

F Commands
FIELD
Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically
as the field value changes.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Fields tool group ➤ Insert Field
Menu: Insert ➤ Field
Shortcut menu: Right-click while editing text in an in-place text editor, and
click Insert Field.

428 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Fields can be inserted in any kind of text except tolerances. The FIELDEVAL
system variable and the UPDATEFIELD command determine how fields are
updated.
The Insert Field dialog box (page 429) is displayed.
See also:
Use Fields in Text

Insert Field Dialog Box
Inserts a field in the drawing.

Summary
The options available change based on the selected field category and field
name.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Field Category Sets the types of fields to be listed under Field Names (for
example, Date & Time, Document, and Objects).

Commands | 429

Field Names Lists the fields that are available in a category. Select a field name
to display the options available for that field.
Field Value Displays the current value of the field, or displays an empty string
(----) if the field value is invalid.
The label for this item changes with the field name. For example, when
Filename is selected in the Field Names list, the label is Filename and the value
is the name of the current drawing file. The label is Property for object fields.
Exception: when a date field is selected, the selected date format is displayed;
for example, M/d/yyyy.
Format List Lists options for display of the value of the field. For example,
date fields can display the name of the day or not, and text strings can be
uppercase, lowercase, first capital, or title case. The value displayed in the
Fields dialog box reflects the format that you select.
Field Expression Displays the expression that underlies the field. The field
expression cannot be edited, but you can learn how fields are constructed by
reading this area.

Options for Fields in the Objects Field Category
Named Object Type/Object Type When NamedObject is selected in Field
Names, lists the types of named objects in the drawing. When Object is
selected, displays the type of object selected. Use the Select Object button to
temporarily close the dialog box and select an object in the drawing.
Property/Name When NamedObject is selected in Field Names, lists the names
of all the objects in the drawing of the selected type. When Object is selected
in Field Names, lists the properties of the selected object that are available as
fields. When a block with attributes is selected, the attribute names are
displayed in the list of properties.

Formula
When Formula is selected in Field Names, provides a place for creating a
formula to insert in text or in a table cell.
Average/Sum/Count When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the
Field dialog box temporarily while you specify table cells. The result is
appended to the formula.
Cell When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box
temporarily while you specify a table cell. The cell address is appended to the
formula.
Precision Specifies precision for fields based on the selected format. Select
Current Precision to use the current setting of the LUPREC (page 1364) system
variable.

430 | Chapter 2 Commands

Additional Format Displays the Additional Format dialog box (page 1034).
See also:
Use Fields in Text

FILL
Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter mode [ON (page 431)/OFF (page 431)] : Enter on or
off, or press Enter
On Turns on Fill mode. For the filling of a 3D object to be visible, its extrusion
direction must be parallel to the current viewing direction, and hidden lines
must not be suppressed.

Off Turns off Fill mode. Only the outlines of objects are displayed and plotted.
Changing Fill mode affects existing objects after the drawing is regenerated.
The display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode setting.

See also:
Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and
Text

Commands | 431

FILLET
Rounds and fillets the edges of objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Fillet
Menu: Modify ➤ Fillet

Summary
In the example, an arc is created that is tangent to both of the selected lines.
The lines are trimmed to the ends of the arc. To create a sharp corner instead,
enter a radius of zero.

You can fillet arcs, circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, splines,
and xlines.
You can also fillet 3D solids and surfaces. If you select a mesh object for
filleting, you can choose to convert the mesh to a solid or surface and continue
the operation.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current
Select first object (page ?) or [Undo (page ?)/Polyline
(page ?)/Radius (page ?)/Trim (page ?)/Multiple (page
?)]: Use an object selection method or enter an option

432 | Chapter 2 Commands

First Object
Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or selects the edge
of a 3D solid to round or fillet the edge.

Select second object or shift-select to apply corner: Use an object selection method
or hold down Shift and select an object to create a sharp corner
If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the
fillet arc. You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override the
current fillet radius with a value of 0.
If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they can be
adjacent or separated by one other segment. If they are separated by another
polyline segment, FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and replaces
it with the fillet.
More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. Select the objects close
to where you want the endpoints of the fillet.

FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.

Commands | 433

If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the
edges individually.
Enter fillet radius : Specify a distance or press Enter
Select an edge or [Chain/Loop/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, l, or r

Edge
Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press
Enter.

If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner
of a box, FILLET computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the three
incident fillets have the same radii.

Chain
Changes from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent edges,
called a chain selection.

434 | Chapter 2 Commands

Edge Chain Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single
edge. For example, if you select an edge on the top of a 3D solid box, FILLET
also selects the other tangential edges on the top.

Edge Switches to a single-edge selection mode.

Loop
Specifies a loop of edges on the face of a solid. For any edge, there are two
possible loops. After selecting a loop edge, you are prompted to Accept the
current selection, or choose the Next loop.

Radius
Defines the radius of the rounded edge.

Undo
Reverses the previous action in the command.

Polyline
Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments meet.
Select 2D polyline:
If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they approach
the arc segment, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet
arc.

Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET
commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs.

Trim
Controls whether FILLET trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.

Commands | 435

Multiple
Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects.
See also:
Create Fillets

FILLETEDGE
Rounds and fillets the edges of solid objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group ➤ Fillet Edge
Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Fillet Edges

Summary
You can select more than one edge. Enter a value for the fillet radius or click
and drag the fillet grip.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select an Edge Specifies one or more edges on the same solid body to fillet.
After pressing Enter, you can drag the fillet grip to specify a radius, or use the
Radius option.

436 | Chapter 2 Commands

Chain Specifies more than one edge when the edges are tangent to one
another.
Loop Specifies a loop of edges on the face of a solid. For any edge, there are
two possible loops. After selecting a loop edge you are prompted to Accept the
current selection or choose the Next loop.
Radius Specifies a radius value.
See also:
Create Fillets
Modify Edges on 3D Objects

FIND
Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Text tool group ➤ Find Text
Menu: Edit ➤ Find
Shortcut menu: With no commands active, right-click in the drawing area
and click Find.

Summary
The Find and Replace dialog box (page 437) is displayed.
See also:
Find and Replace Text

Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND
Specifies the text you want to find, replace, or select and controls the scope
and results of the search.

Commands | 437

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Where to Check
Specifies whether to search the entire drawing, the current layout, or the
currently-selected object. If an object is already selected, then Selected Objects
is the default value. If no object is selected, then Entire Drawing is the default
value. You can use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the dialog
box and create or modify the selection set.
Find What
Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a text string, including any
wild-card characters, or choose one of the six most recently used strings from
the list.
For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the
User’s Guide.
Replace With
Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text. Enter a
string, or choose one of the most recently used strings from the list.
Select Objects Button
Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select objects in your
drawing. Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
When you select objects, Where to Check displays Selected Objects by default.

438 | Chapter 2 Commands

Replace
Replaces found text with the text that you enter in Replace With and moves
to the next instance of the found text if one exists.
Replace All
Finds all instances of the text that you enter in Find What and replaces it with
the text in Replace With.
The Where to Check setting controls whether to find and replace text in the
entire drawing or text in the currently selected object or objects.
Find
Finds the text that you enter in Find What. The first text object that matches
the search criteria is zoomed to. Once you find the first instance of the text,
the Find option acts like a Find Next, which you can use to find the next text
object.

Search Options
Defines the type of objects and words to be found.
Match Case
Includes the case of the text in Find What as part of the search criteria.
Find Whole Words Only
Finds only whole words that match the text in Find What. For example, if
you select Find Whole Words Only and search for “Front Door,” FIND does
not locate the text string “Front Doormat.”
Use Wildcards
Allows the use of wild-card characters in searches.
For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the
User’s Guide.
Search XRefs
Includes text in externally referenced files in search results.
Search Blocks
Includes text in blocks in search results.
Ignore Hidden Items
Ignores hidden items in search results. Hidden items include text on layers
that are frozen or turned off, text in block attributes created in invisible mode,
and text in visibility states within dynamic blocks.

Commands | 439

Match Diacritics
Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results.
Match Half or Full Width Forms
Matches half- and full-width characters in search results.

Text Types
Specifies the type of text objects you want to include in the search. By default,
all options are selected.
Block Attribute Value
Includes block attribute text values in search results.
Dimension or Leader Text
Includes dimension and leader object text in search results.
Single-Line or Multiline Text
Includes text objects such as single-line and multiline text in search results.
Table Text
Includes text found in AutoCAD for Mac table cells in search results.
Hyperlink Description
Includes text found in hyperlink descriptions in search results.
Hyperlink
Includes hyperlink URLs in search results.
See also:
Find and Replace Text

FLATSHOT
Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view.

Access Methods

Button

440 | Chapter 2 Commands

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Section tool group ➤ Flatshot

Summary
The Flatshot dialog box (page 441) is displayed.
The edges of all 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes are projected line-of-sight
onto a plane parallel to the viewing plane. The 2D representations of these
edges are inserted as a block on the XY plane of the UCS. This block can be
exploded for additional changes.

See also:
Create a Flattened View

Flatshot Dialog Box
Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view.

Commands | 441

Summary
The edges of all 3D solids and surfaces are projected line-of-sight onto a plane
parallel to the viewing plane. The 2D representations of these edges are inserted
as a block on the XY plane of the UCS. This block can be exploded for
additional changes. The result can also be saved as a separate drawing file.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Destination
Controls where the flattened representation is created.
Insert As New Block
Specifies to insert the flattened representation as a block in the current drawing.
Replace Existing Block
Replaces an existing block in the drawing with the newly created block.
Select Block

442 | Chapter 2 Commands

Closes the dialog box temporarily while you select the block you are replacing
in the drawing. When you finish selecting the block, press Enter to re-display
the Flatshot dialog box.
Block Selected / No Block Selected
Indicates whether a block has been selected.
Export to a File
Saves the block to an external file.

Foreground Lines
Contains controls for setting the color and linetype of lines that are not
obscured in the flattened view.
Color
Sets the color of lines that are not obscured in the flattened view.
Linetype
Sets the linetype of lines that are not obscured in the flattened view.

Obscured Lines
Controls whether lines that are obscured in the drawing are displayed in the
flattened view, and sets the color and linetype of these obscured lines.
Show
Controls whether obscured lines are shown in the flattened representation.
When selected, the 2D flattened representation displays lines hidden by other
objects.
Color
Sets the color of lines that lie behind geometry in the flattened view.
Linetype
Sets the linetype of lines that lie behind geometry in the flattened view.

Include Tangential Lines
Creates silhouette edges for curved surfaces.

Create
Creates the flattened view.
See also:
Create a Flattened View

Commands | 443

FREESPOT
Creates free spotlight which is similar to a spotlight without a specified target.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Specify source location <0,0,0>: Enter coordinate values or use the
pointing device
If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is
displayed:
Enter an option to change [Name (page ?)/Intensity (page
?)/Status (page ?)/Hotspot (page ?)/Falloff (page
?)/shadoW (page ?)/Attenuation (page ?)/Color (page
?)/eXit] :
If the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the following prompt
is displayed:
Enter an option to change [Name (page ?)/Intensity factor
(page ?)/Photometry (page ?)/Status (page ?)/Hotspot (page
?)/Falloff (page ?)/shadoW (page ?)/filterColor (page
?)/eXit] :
NOTE
When the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2, the Attenuation
option has no affect on the creation of the light. It is only maintained for
scripting compatibility.

Name
Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters,
numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum
length is 256 characters.

Intensity/Intensity Factor
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum
value that is supported by your system.

Hotspot
Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known to
lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160
degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS (page 1177).

444 | Chapter 2 Commands

Falloff
Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as
the field angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The default is 50
degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS (page 1177). The falloff angle
must be greater than or equal to the hotspot angle.

Status
Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting
has no effect.

Photometry
Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to
1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible
light sources.
In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted
by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived
power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the
perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous
flux incident on a surface, per unit area.
Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a
luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident
on a surface.
■ Candela (symbol: cd) is the SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power
emitted by a light source in a particular direction). Cd/Sr
■

Lux (symbol: lx) is the SI unit of illuminance. Lm/m^2

■

Foot-candle (symbol: fc) is the American unit of illuminance. Lm/ft^2

Enter f to specify the perceived power in a luminous flux value.
If you enter i, you can specify the intensity of the light based on an
illuminance value.
The illuminance value can be specified in either lux or foot-candles. Enter d
to specify a distance to use to calculate illuminance.
Color Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin
temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names.
Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color
names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices.
If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin
temperature value.

Shadow
Makes the light cast shadows.

Commands | 445

Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows
off increases performance.
Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase
performance.
Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges.
Map Size Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate
the shadow map.
Softness Specifies the softness that should be used to calculate the shadow
map.
Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra)
based on extended light sources.
Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of
the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of
a rectangle.)
Specify the sample size by entering a.
Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v.

Attenuation
Enter an option to change [attenuation Type/Use limits/attenuation start
Limit/attenuation End limit/eXit]:
Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther
away an object is from a spotlight, the darker the object appears. Attenuation
is also known as decay.
■ None. Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the spotlight are as bright as
objects close to the light.
■

Inverse Linear. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance
from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is half as strong
as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter as strong.
The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity.

■

Inverse Squared. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the
distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is one
quarter as strong as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one
sixteenth as strong.

Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits or not.
Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset
from the center of the light. The default is 0.

446 | Chapter 2 Commands

Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from
the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit
increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the
calculations are wasted processing time.

Color/Filter Color
Controls the color of the light.
True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue).
Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color.
Color Book Specifies a color from a color book.
See also:
Use Spotlights

FREEWEB
Creates a free web light which is similar to a web light without a specified
target.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify source location <0,0,0>: Enter coordinate values or use the
pointing device
Enter an option to change [Name (page ?)/Intensity factor
(page ?)/Status (page ?)/Photometry (page ?)/weB (page
?)/shadoW (page ?)/filterColor (page ?)/eXit] :
NOTE
The LIGHTINGUNITS system variable must be set to a value other than 0 to
create and use freeweb lights.

Name
Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters,
numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum
length is 256 characters.

Commands | 447

Intensity Factor
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum
value that is supported by your system.

Status
Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting
has no effect.

Photometry
Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to
1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible
light sources.
In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted
by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived
power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the
perceived power emitted in all directions. Luminance is the total luminous
flux incident on a surface, per unit area.
Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a
luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident
on a surface.
■ Candela (symbol: cd) is the SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power
emitted by a light source in a particular direction). Cd/Sr
■

Lux (symbol: lx) is the SI unit of illuminance. Lm/m^2

■

Foot-candle (symbol: fc) is the American unit of illuminance. Lm/ft^2

Enter f to specify the perceived power in a luminous flux value.
If you enter i, you can specify the intensity of the light based on an
illuminance value.
The illuminance value can be specified in either lux or foot-candles. Enter d
to specify a distance to use to calculate illuminance.
Color Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin
temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names.
Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color
names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices.
If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin
temperature value.

Web
Specifies the intensity for a light at points on a spherical grid.
File Specifies which web file to use to define the properties of the web. Web
files have the file extension .ies.

448 | Chapter 2 Commands

X Specifies the X rotation for the web.
Y Specifies the Y rotation for the web.
Z Specifies the Z rotation for the web.

Shadow
Makes the light cast shadows.
Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows
off increases performance.
Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase
performance.
Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges.
Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map.
Softness Specifies the softness that should be used to calculate the shadow
map.
Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra)
based on extended light sources.
Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of
the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of
a rectangle.)
Specify the sample size by entering a.
Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v.

Filter Color
Controls the color of the light.
True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue).
Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color.
Color Book Specifies a color from a color book.
See also:
Overview of Weblights

Commands | 449

G Commands
GCCOINCIDENT
Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a
curve).

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Coincident
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Coincident

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Coincident option in GEOMCONSTRAINT
(page 464).
A constraint point on an object can be made coincident with an object or a
constraint point on another object.
Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

■

Circle

■

Arc

■

Polyline arc

■

Ellipse

■

Spline

■

Two valid constraint points

The constraint points on objects vary based on object types. For example, you
can constrain midpoints and endpoints of a line.
The second selected point or object is made coincident to the first.

450 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select first point (page ?) or [Object (page ?)/Autoconstrain (page ?)] : Select a constraint point, or an object, or
enterato apply constraints to selected objects

Point
Specifies a point to be constrained.
First Point Specifies the first point of the object to be constrained.
Second Point Specifies the second point of the object to be constrained.

Object
Selects an object to be constrained.
Point Point (page ?)
Multiple Picks successive points to coincide with the first object. The Multiple
option is displayed when you use the Object option to select the first object.

Autoconstrain
Selects multiple objects. Coincident constraints are applied to selected objects
with unconstrained points that are coincident to each other.
The number of constraints applied is displayed at the Command prompt.
When a coincident constraint is applied between a point and an arc or line,
the point can lie on the line or arc or the extension of the line or arc.
See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

Commands | 451

GCCOLLINEAR
Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Collinear
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Collinear

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Collinear option in GEOMCONSTRAINT
(page 464).
Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

■

Ellipse

■

Multiline text

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select first object (page ?) or [Multiple (page ?)]: Select
an object or entermto select multiple points or objects

Object
Selects an object to be constrained.
First object Selects the first object to be constrained.
Second object Selects the second object to be constrained.
The second selected line is made collinear with the first line.

Multiple
Picks successive points or objects to be made collinear with the first object.

452 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCCONCENTRIC
Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Concentric
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Concentric

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Concentric option in GEOMCONSTRAINT
(page 464).
Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Circle
■

Arc

■

Polyline arc

■

Ellipse

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select first object (page ?): Select a circle, arc, or ellipse

Object
Selects an object to be constrained.
First object Selects the first circle, arc, or ellipse to be constrained.
Second object Selects the second circle, arc, or ellipse to be constrained.
The second selected object is made concentric with the first object.

Commands | 453

See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCEQUAL
Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same radius, or selected lines to the
same length.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Equal
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Equal

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Equal option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page
464).
Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

■

Circle

■

Arc

■

Polyline arc

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select first object (page ?) or [Multiple (page ?)]: Select
an object or entermto select multiple objects

Object
Selects an object to be constrained.
First object Selects the first object to be constrained.
Second object Selects the second object to be made equal with the first object.

454 | Chapter 2 Commands

Use the Multiple option to make two or more objects equal.

Multiple
Picks successive objects to be made equal with the first object.
See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCFIX
Locks points and curves in position.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Fix
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Fix

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Fix option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page
464).
When you apply the Fix constraint to a point on an object, you lock the node
in place. You can move the object around the locked node.
When you apply the Fix constraint to an object, the object is locked and
cannot be moved.
For example,

Using the Fix constraint, you lock the center of the circle. The circle stays
locked even if you stretch the line.

Commands | 455

Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

■

Circle

■

Arc

■

Polyline arc

■

Ellipse

■

Spline

See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCHORIZONTAL
Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current
coordinate system.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Horizontal
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Horizontal

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Horizontal option in GEOMCONSTRAINT
(page 464).
You can select different constraint points on the same object or different
objects.
The following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

■

Ellipse

456 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

Multiline text

■

Two valid constraint points

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select an object or [2Points (page ?)] <2Points>: Select an
object or two constraint points

2Points
Selects two constraint points instead of an object.
The second selected point on an object is made horizontal to the first selected
point.

See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCPARALLEL
Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Parallel
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Parallel

Commands | 457

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Parallel option in GEOMCONSTRAINT
(page 464).
The second selected object is made parallel to the first.
Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

■

Ellipse

■

Multiline text

See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCPERPENDICULAR
Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Perpendicular
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Perpendicular

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Perpendicular option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464).
Lines do not have to intersect to be perpendicular.
The second selected object is made perpendicular to the first.
Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

458 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

Ellipse

■

Multiline text

See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCSMOOTH
Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with another
spline, line, arc, or polyline.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Smooth
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Smooth

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Smooth option in GEOMCONSTRAINT
(page 464).
Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Spline, line
■

Polyline segment

■

Arc

■

Polyline arc

The splines are updated to be contiguous with one another.
NOTE Endpoints of the curves to which you apply the smooth constraints are
made coincident.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Commands | 459

Select first spline curve (page ?): Select a spline object

Curve
Selects an endpoint of a curve.
First Spline Curve Selects the first spline curve to be constrained.
Second Curve Selects the second curve to be made continuous with the first
spline curve.
The first object selected must be a spline. The second selected object is made
G2 continuous with the first spline.

See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCSYMMETRIC
Causes selected objects to become symmetrically constrained about a selected
line.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Symmetric
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Symmetric

460 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Symmetric option in GEOMCONSTRAINT
(page 464).
For lines, the line’s angle is made symmetric (and not the endpoints). For arcs
and circles, the center and radius are made symmetric (not the endpoints of
the arc).
Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

■

Circle

■

Arc

■

Polyline arc

■

Ellipse

NOTE You must have an axis around which you will constrain the objects or points
to be symmetrical. This is referred to as the symmetry line.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select first object (page ?) or [2Points (page ?)]
<2Points>: Select an object or two constrained points

Object
Selects an object to be constrained.
First Object Selects the first object to be made symmetrical.
Second Object Selects the second object to be made symmetrical.
Symmetric Line Specifies the axis in which the objects and points are made
to be symmetrical.
For example,

Commands | 461

2Points
Selects two points and a symmetry line.
First Point Selects the first point to be made symmetrical.
Second Point Selects the second point to be made symmetrical.
Select Symmetric Line Select Symmetric Line (page 461)
See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCTANGENT
Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their
extensions.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Tangent
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Tangent

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Tangent option in GEOMCONSTRAINT
(page 464).

462 | Chapter 2 Commands

Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

■

Circle, arc, polyline arc, ellipse

■

Combination of circles, arcs, or ellipses

A circle can be tangent to a line even if the circle does not touch the line. A
curve can be tangent to another even if they do not physically share a point.
For example,

See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GCVERTICAL
Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current
coordinate system.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric
Constraints flyout ➤ Vertical
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Vertical

Commands | 463

Summary
This command is equivalent to the Vertical option in GEOMCONSTRAINT
(page 464).
Following are the valid constraint objects and points:
■ Line
■

Polyline segment

■

Ellipse

■

Multiline text

■

Two valid constraint points

You can select different constraint points on the same object or two separate
objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select an object or [2Points (page ?)] <2Points>: Select an
object or two constraint points

2Points
Selects two constraint points instead of an object.
The second selected point on an object is made vertical to the first selected
point.
See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GEOMCONSTRAINT
Applies or persists geometric relationships between objects or points on objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints

464 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
When you apply a geometric constraint to a pair of objects, the order in which
the objects are selected and the point on which each object is selected can
affect how the objects are positioned relative to each other.
The following table outlines the valid constraint points for an object.
Objects

Valid Constraint Points

Line

Endpoints, midpoint

Arc

Center, endpoints, midpoint

Spline

Endpoints

Circle

Center

Ellipse

Center, major and minor axes

Polyline

Endpoints, midpoints of line and arc subobjects, center of arc subobjects

Xref, attribute, table

Insertion point

Block

Insertion point, nested entities

Text, multiline text

Insertion point, alignment point

The following commands are equivalent to each GEOMCONSTRAINT option:
Horizontal (GCHORIZONTAL (page 456))
Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current
coordinate system.
Vertical (GCVERTICAL (page 463))
Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current
coordinate system.
Perpendicular (GCPERPENDICULAR (page 458))
Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another.
Parallel (GCPARALLEL (page 457))

Commands | 465

Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other.
Tangent (GCTANGENT (page 462))
Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their
extensions.
Smooth (GCSMOOTH (page 459))
Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with another
spline, line, arc, or polyline.
Coincident (GCCOINCIDENT (page 450))
Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a
curve).
Concentric (GCCONCENTRIC (page 453))
Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point.
Collinear (GCCOLLINEAR (page 452))
Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line.
Symmetric (GCSYMMETRIC (page 460))
Causes selected objects to become symmetrically constrained about a selected
line.
Equal (GCEQUAL (page 454))
Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same radius, or selected lines to the
same length.
Fix (GCFIX (page 455))
Locks points and curves in position.
See also:
Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints

GRADIENT
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group ➤ Gradient

466 | Chapter 2 Commands

Menu: Draw ➤ Gradient

Summary
The Gradient visor (page 486) or Hatch and Gradient dialog box (page 472) is
displayed.
A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between one or two colors.

See also:
Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill

GRID
Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Grid

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify grid spacing(X) (page 468) or [ON (page 468)/OFF (page
468)/Snap (page 468)/Major (page 468)/aDaptive (page 468)/Limits
(page 468)/Follow (page 468)/Aspect (page 468)] : Specify
a value or enter an option

Commands | 467

Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. Entering x after the
value sets the grid spacing to the specified value multiplied by the snap
interval.
On Turns on the grid using the current spacing.
Off Turns off the grid.
Snap Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP (page
952) command.
Major Specifies the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid
lines. Grid lines rather than grid dots are displayed in any visual style except
2D Wireframe. (GRIDMAJOR (page 1306) system variable)
Adaptive Controls the density of grid lines when zoomed in or out.
■ Adaptive Behavior. Limits the density of grid lines or dots when zoomed
out. This setting is also controlled by the GRIDDISPLAY (page 1305) system
variable.
■

Allow Subdivision Below Grid Spacing. If turned on, generates
additional, more closely spaced grid lines or dots when zoomed in. The
frequency of these grid lines is determined by the frequency of the major
grid lines.

Limits Displays the grid beyond the area specified by the LIMITS (page 573)
command.
Follow Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS.
This setting is also controlled by the GRIDDISPLAY (page 1305) system variable.
Aspect Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions, which can have
different values.
Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple of the snap interval
rather than the drawing units.
The Aspect option is not available when the current snap style is Isometric.
See also:
Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

GROUP
Creates saved sets of objects called groups.

468 | Chapter 2 Commands

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Group

Summary
If you enter -group at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
469).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects or [Name/Description]: Select objects to add to the new
group or enter an option
Name Specifies the group name. Group names can be up to 31 characters long
and can include letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($),
hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces. The name is converted to
uppercase characters.
Description Specifies the description for the group. You can use up to 64
characters for a description.
See also:
Group Objects

-GROUP
Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter a group option [?óList Groups (page ?)/Order (page
?)/Add (page ?)/Remove (page ?)/Explode (page ?)/REName
(page ?)/Selectable (page ?)/Create (page ?)] :
Enter an option or press Enter

?—List Groups
Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing.

Commands | 469

Order
Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful
when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the cut order for the
horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern.
Position Number Specifies the position number of the object to reorder. To
reorder a range of objects, specify the first object's position number.
Reverse Order Reverses the order of all members in a group.

Add
Adds objects to a group.

Remove
Removes objects from a group.
If you remove all the group's objects, the group remains defined. You can
remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option.

Explode
Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component objects.

Rename
Assigns a new name to an existing group.

Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting
one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen
layers are not selected.

Create
Creates a group.
Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers,
and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not
spaces. The name is converted to uppercase characters.
See also:
Group Objects

GROUPEDIT
Adds and removes objects from the selected group, or renames a selected
group.

470 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
For existing groups, add or remove objects; or rename a group.
The following prompts are displayed.
Select group or [Name]:
In the drawing area, select a group or enter the name of a group. If a selected
object is not included in a group, you are prompted again.

List of Options
When a group is selected, the following options are displayed.
Enter an option [Add objects (page 471)/Remove objects (page
471)/REName (page 471)]:
Add Objects Select objects to add to the current group.
Remove Objects Select grouped objects to remove from the current group.
Rename Name or rename the current group.
See also:
Group Objects

H Commands
HATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or
gradient fill.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group ➤ Hatch
Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch

Commands | 471

Summary
The Hatch visor (page 484) or Hatch and Gradient dialog box (page 472) is
displayed.
If you enter -hatch at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
490).
NOTE To prevent the creation of an enormous number of hatch lines, the
maximum number of hatch lines created in a single hatch operation is limited.
This limit prevents memory and performance problems. However, you can change
the maximum number of hatch lines with the HPMAXLINES (page 1326) system
variable.
Choose from several methods to specify the boundaries of a hatch.
■ Specify a point in an area that is enclosed by objects.
■

Select objects that enclose an area.

■

Specify boundary points using the -HATCH Draw option.

See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box
Defines the boundaries, pattern, or fill properties, and other parameters for
hatches and fills.

472 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The dialog box includes the following:
■ Hatch tab (page 476)
■

Gradient tab (page 479)

■

More Options section (page 481)

■

Add: Pick Points (page ?)

■

Add: Select Objects (page ?)

■

Remove Boundaries (page ?)

■

Recreate Boundary (page ?)

■

View Selections (page ?)

■

Display Boundary Objects (page ?)

■

Options (page ?)

■

Preview (page ?)

Add: Pick Points
Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area
around the specified point.

If you turn on Island Detection, objects that enclose areas within the outermost
boundary are detected as islands. How HATCH detects objects using this option
depends on which island detection method is specified.
NOTE Red circles are displayed at unconnected endpoints of boundary objects
to identify gaps in the hatch boundary. These circles are temporary and can be
removed with REDRAW (page 869) or REGEN (page 877).

Add: Select Objects
Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area.

Commands | 473

Interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select the objects
within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the
current island detection style.

Each time you click Add: Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection
set.

Remove Boundaries
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were added
previously.

Recreate Boundary
Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally
associates the hatch object with it.

474 | Chapter 2 Commands

View Selections
Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings.
This option is available only when a boundary has been defined.

Display Boundary Objects
Selects the objects that form the boundaries of the selected associative hatch
object. Use the displayed grips to modify the hatch boundaries.
NOTE This option is available only in the Hatch Edit dialog box (page 497) and
replaces the View Selections option.
When you select an associative hatch, a single, circular grip called the control
grip is displayed. No boundary grips are displayed because the boundaries of
an associative hatch can be modified only by changing its associated boundary
objects. Use the Select Boundary Objects option to select and grip-edit the
boundary objects.
To modify the boundaries of a nonassociative hach, you modify the boundaries
of the hatch object itself. Thus, when you select a nonassociative hatch, both
the control grip and the boundary grips are displayed.

Options
Controls several commonly used hatch or fill options.
Annotative Specifies that the hatch is annotative. This property automates
the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct
size on the paper. (HPANNOTATIVE (page 1319) system variable)
Associative Specifies that the hatch or fill is associative. A hatch or fill that
is associative is updated when you modify its boundary objects. (HPASSOC
(page 1319) system variable)
Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch
objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified.
(HPSEPARATE (page 1329) system variable)
Draw Order Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or
fill behind all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch
boundary, or in front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER (page 1323)
system variable)
Layer Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current
layer. Select Use Current to use the current layer. (HPLAYER (page 1325) system
variable)
Transparency Sets the transparency level for new hatch or fills, overriding
the current object transparency. Select Use Current to use the current object
transparency setting. (HPTRANSPARENCY (page 1330) system variable)

Commands | 475

Inherit Properties Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill
properties of a selected hatch object.
After selecting the hatch object whose properties you want the hatch to inherit,
right-click in the drawing area and use the options on the shortcut menu to
switch between the Select Objects and Pick Internal Point options.
The HPINHERIT (page 1324) system variable controls whether the hatch origin
of the resulting hatch is determined by HPORIGIN (page 1327) or by the source
object.

Preview
Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings.
Click in the drawing area or press Esc to return to the dialog box. Right-click
or press Enter to accept the hatch or fill.

More Options
Expands the dialog box to display more options (page 481).
See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Hatch Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)
Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.

476 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Type and Pattern
Specifies the hatch’s type, pattern, color, and background color.
Type
Specifies whether to create a predefined, user-defined, or custom hatch pattern.
Predefined patterns are stored in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat files supplied with
the program.
User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A
custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you
have added to the search path.
Pattern
Displays a selection of ANSI, ISO, and other industry-standard hatch patterns.
Select SOLID to create solid fill. The Pattern option is available only when
Type is set to Predefined. (HPNAME (page 1326) system variable)
[…] Button

Commands | 477

Displays the Hatch Library (page 487), in which you can preview images for
all predefined patterns.
Hatch Color
Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid
fills. (HPCOLOR (page 1321) system variable)
Background Color
Specifies the background color for new hatch objects. Choose None to turn
off the background color. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR (page 1320) system variable)
Swatch
Displays a preview of the selected pattern. Click the swatch to display the
Hatch Library (page 487).
Custom Pattern
Lists the available custom patterns. The most recently used custom patterns
appear at the top of the list. The Custom Pattern option is available only when
Type is set to Custom. (HPNAME (page 1326) system variable)
[…] Button
Displays the Hatch Library (page 487), in which you can preview images for
all custom patterns.

Angle and Scale
Specifies an angle and scale for the selected hatch pattern.
Angle
Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current
UCS. (HPANG (page 1319) system variable)
Scale
Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. This option is available
only when Type is set to Predefined or Custom. (HPSCALE (page 1329) system
variable)
Double
For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines at 90 degrees to the
original lines, creating a crosshatch. This option is available only when Type
is set to User Defined. (HPDOUBLE (page 1322) system variable)
Relative to Paper Space

478 | Chapter 2 Commands

Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. This allows you to display
hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your named layout. This option
is available only from a named layout.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. This option is available
only when Type is set to User Defined. (HPSPACE (page 1330) system variable)
ISO Pen Width
Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. This option
is available only when Type is set to Predefined and Pattern is set to one of
the available ISO patterns.

Hatch Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches,
such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch
boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
Use Current Origin
Uses the hatch origin point stored in the HPORIGIN (page 1327) system variable.
Specified Origin
Assigns a new hatch origin using the following options.
Click to Set New Origin
Specifies the new hatch origin point directly.
Default to Boundary Extents
Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular extents of the boundary for
the hatch object. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents and
its center. (HPORIGINMODE (page 1328) system variable)
Store as Default Origin
Stores the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN system variable.
See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Gradient Tab (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)
Defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be applied.

Commands | 479

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Color
Specifies whether to fill the hatch boundary with a monochormatic or
two-color blend.
One Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between a color and a specified
tint (the color mixed with white) or between a color and a specified shade
(the color mixed with black). (GFCLRSTATE (page 1303) system variable)
Two Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors. (GFCLRSTATE
(page 1303) system variable)
Color Swatches
Specifies the colors for the gradient fill (either one color or two colors). Click
the Browse button […] to display the Color Palette dialog box (page 198), where

480 | Chapter 2 Commands

you can select an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color, true color, or color book
color. (GFCLR1 (page 1302) and GFCLR2 (page 1303) system variables)
Shade and Tint Slider
Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected
color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color.
(GFCLRLUM (page 1303) system variable)

Gradient Patterns
Displays fixed patterns for gradient fills. These patterns include linear sweep,
spherical, and parabolic.

Orientation
Specifies the angle of the gradient and whether it is symmetrical.
Centered
Specifies a symmetrical gradient configuration. If this option is not selected,
the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion of a light
source to the left of the object. (GFSHIFT (page 1305) system variable)
Angle
Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the
current UCS. This option is independent of the angle specified for hatch
patterns. (GFANG (page 1302) system variable)
See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

More Options (Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box)
Controls the operation of islands and boundaries.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Islands
Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost
boundary.
Island Detection
Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected.
(HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE (page 1325) system variable)

Commands | 481

Normal
Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If an internal island is
encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until another island within the
island is encountered. (HPISLANDDETECTION (page 1324) system variable)

Outer (Recommended)
Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This option hatches or fills
only the specified area and leaves the internal islands unaffected. (HPISLANDDETECTION (page 1324) system variable)

Ignore
Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. (HPISLANDDETECTION (page 1324) system variable)

The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut
menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select
objects to define your boundaries.

Boundary Retention
Specifies whether to create an object that encloses the hatch.
Retain Boundaries
Creates an object that encloses each hatch object. (HPBOUNDRETAIN (page
1321) system variable)

482 | Chapter 2 Commands

Object Type
Controls the type of the new boundary object. The resulting boundary object
can be either a polyline or a region object. This option is available only when
Retain Boundaries is selected. (HPBOUND (page 1320) system variable)
For more information about regions, see Create and Combine Areas (Regions).

Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified
point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects
to define a boundary.
By default, when you use the Add: Pick Point option to define a boundary,
HATCH analyzes all objects in the current viewport extents. By redefining the
boundary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries
without having to hide or remove those objects. For large drawings, redefining
the boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because HATCH
examines fewer objects.
Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from all objects within the extents
of the current viewport.
Existing Set Defines the boundary set from the objects selected with the New
option.
New
Specifies a limited set of objects for evaluation by the pick point when creating
the hatch.

Gap Tolerance
Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as
a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose
the area with no gaps.
Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of
gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary. Any
gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify are ignored, and the
boundary is treated as closed. ( HPGAPTOL (page 1324) system variable)

Inherit Options
Controls whether to inherit the hatch origin when you create a hatch with
the Inherit Properties option. (HPINHERIT (page 1324) system variable)
Use Current Origin Uses the current hatch origin setting.
Use Source Hatch Origin Uses the hatch origin of the source hatch.

Commands | 483

See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Hatch Visor
Defines the boundaries, pattern or fill properties, and other parameters for
hatch and fills.

Summary
The Hatch visor is displayed when you start the HATCH command, select a
pattern or fill from the Hatch Library palette, or select an existing hatch object
with a pattern or fill in a drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Pattern
Displays a preview image of the current hatch pattern.
Click the preview image to display the Hatch Library palette and select a new
pattern to use.

Properties
Hatch Color Overrides the current color for solid fills and hatch patterns.
(HPCOLOR (page 1321) system variable)
Background Color Specifies the color for hatch pattern backgrounds. Not
available when using the Solid pattern. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR (page 1320)
system variable)
Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch or fill relative to the X axis of the current
UCS. Valid values are from 0 to 359. (HPANG (page 1319) system variable)
Scale Expands or contracts a predefined or custom hatch pattern. This option
is available only when Hatch Type is set to Pattern. (HPSCALE (page 1329) system
variable)

484 | Chapter 2 Commands

Pick Points
Determines the boundary to hatch or fill from existing objects that form an
enclosed area around a specified point.

Select Boundary
Determines the boundary to hatch or fill from selected objects that form an
enclosed area.

When you use the Select Boundary option, HATCH does not automatically
detect interior objects. You must select the objects within the selected boundary
to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style.
Right-click and choose Settings to change the current island detection style.

Remove Boundary
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were previously
added. Option is only available after a boundary has been defined.

Create Boundary
Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally
associates the hatch object with it. Option is only available when modifying
an existing hatch object.

Create Separated Hatches
Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created
when several separate closed boundaries are specified. (HPSEPARATE (page
1329) system variable)

Commands | 485

Match Hatch Properties
Sets the properties of a hatch with a selected hatch object.

Exit the Hatch Editor and Close the Visor
Quits the current command and closes the Hatch visor.
See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Gradient Visor
Defines the boundaries, pattern or fill properties, and other parameters for
gradient fills.

Summary
The Gradient visor is displayed when you start the GRADIENT command,
select a gradient pattern from the Hatch Library palette, or select an existing
gradient fill in a drawing.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Pattern
Displays a preview image of the current gradient pattern.
Click the preview image to display the Hatch Library palette and select a new
gradient pattern to use.

Properties
Gradient Color 1 Specifies the first of two gradient colors. (GFCLR1 (page 1302)
system variable)
Gradient Color 2 Specifies the second gradient color. (GFCLR2 (page 1303)
system variable)
Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch or fill relative to the X axis of the current
UCS. Valid values are from 0 to 359. (HPANG (page 1319) system variable)

486 | Chapter 2 Commands

Pick Points
Determines the boundary to hatch or fill from existing objects that form an
enclosed area around a specified point.

Select Boundary
Determines the boundary to hatch or fill from selected objects that form an
enclosed area.
When you use the Select Boundary option, interior objects are not
automatically detected. You must select the objects within the selected
boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection
style. Right-click and choose Settings to change the current island detection
style.

Remove Boundary
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were previously
added. Option is only available after a boundary has been defined.

Create Boundary
Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally
associates the hatch object with it. Option is only available when modifying
an existing hatch object.

Create Separated Hatches
Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created
when several separate closed boundaries are specified. (HPSEPARATE (page
1329) system variable)

Match Hatch Properties
Sets the properties of a hatch with a selected hatch object.

Exit the Hatch Editor and Close the Visor
Quits the current command and closes the Gradient visor.
See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Hatch Library
Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns, and gradient
fill patterns.

Commands | 487

The Hatch Library can be displayed as a dialog box when using the Hatch and
Gradient dialog box, or as a palette from the Hatch or Gradient visors.

488 | Chapter 2 Commands

The Hatch Library can be displayed as a dialog box when using the Hatch and
Gradient dialog box, or as a palette from the Hatch or Gradient visors.

Summary
Organizes patterns into five categories, with patterns listed alphabetically.
Click an image to select a pattern.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Pattern Category
Lists the pattern categories used to group related hatch and gradient patterns.
The following categories are listed:
■

Show All. Shows all patterns in all categories.

■

ANSI. Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with the program.

■

ISO. Displays all ISO patterns shipped with the program.

■

Other Predefined. Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped
with the program.

■

Custom. Displays a list of custom PAT files that you have added to the
Support File Search Path of the program.

■

Gradient. Displays all gradient patterns.

Add Patterns Loads a PAT file into the Hatch Library.
Find in Finder Displays the PAT file in Finder that contains the selected
pattern in the Pattern list.

Pattern List
Displays a list of all available patterns based on the selected pattern category.

List/Icon View
Toggles the view of the pattern previews between List and Icon only. List view
displays a small preview image and the name of the pattern.

Search
Filters the Pattern list based on the entered text string. Click 'X' to clear the
current text string.
See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

Commands | 489

-HATCH
Uses command prompts to fill an enclosed area or selected objects with a
hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify internal point (page ?) or [Properties (page
?)/Select objects (page ?)/draW boundary (page ?)/remove
Boundaries (page ?)/Advanced (page ?)/DRaw order (page
?)/Origin (page ?)/ANnotative (page ?)/hatch COlor (page
?)/LAyer (page ?)/Transparency (page ?)]: Specify a point or
enter an option

Internal Point
Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area
around the specified point.
Pick Internal Point While specifying internal points, you can right-click in
the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut menu that contains several
options.

If you turn on Island Detection, objects that enclose areas within the outermost
boundary are detected as islands. How HATCH detects objects using this option
depends on which island detection method is specified.
NOTE Red circles are displayed at unconnected endpoints of boundary objects
to identify gaps in the hatch boundary. These circles are temporary and can be
removed with REDRAW (page 869) or REGEN (page 877).

Properties
Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply.

490 | Chapter 2 Commands

Pattern Name—Predefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the
acad.pat or acadiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file.
Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the
pattern name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead
of a hatch object.
?—List Pattern Names Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the
acad.pat file.
Solid Specifies a solid fill and redisplays the first HATCH prompt, where you
can define a boundary.
User Defined Specifies a user-defined pattern. Enter u, followed by an optional
hatch style code. Precede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with
individual lines instead of a hatch object.
Double Hatch Area Specifies a second set of lines to be drawn at 90 degrees
to the original lines.

Select Objects
Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area.
Select Objects Interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select
the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according
to the current island detection style.

Each time you click Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set.

Commands | 491

While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or fill.

Draw Boundary
Uses specified points to define the boundary of a hatch or fill.
The options that are available as you specify points are also available in PLINE
(page 785). When you complete the polyline boundary, press Enter. You can
then create additional polyline boundaries, or press Enter to twice to apply
the hatch.
NOTE
To enclose an area completely, use the Close option. Do not make the first
and last points coincident.

Remove Boundaries
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were previously
added.
Select Objects Removes objects from the boundary definition.
Add Boundaries Adds objects to the boundary definition.

Advanced
Sets the method used to create the hatch boundary.

Boundary Set
Specifies a limited set of objects, called a boundary set, for evaluation by the
pick point of the hatch
New Creates a boundary set from the selected objects.
Everything Creates a boundary set from everything visible in the current
viewport. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set and uses
everything visible in the drawing or in the current viewport.

Retain Boundary
Creates an object that encloses each hatch object.

Island Detection
Specifies whether to use objects within the outermost boundary as boundary
objects.
Specifying no island detection prompts for the ray casting method.
Nearest Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then
traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.

492 | Chapter 2 Commands

+X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point you specify to the
first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

-X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point you specify to the
first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

+Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point you specify to the
first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

-Y Runs a line in the negative Y direction from the point you specify to the
first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

Commands | 493

Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you specify to the first
object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise
direction.

Style
Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost hatch
boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no
effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use
the Normal style.
Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them.

Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This
option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the
internal structure blank.

Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters
an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another
island within the island.

494 | Chapter 2 Commands

Associativity
Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are
modified.
A new hatch pattern's associativity is set by the HPASSOC (page 1319) system
variable. Changing the associativity setting here also changes the setting in
the HPASSOC system variable.

Gap Tolerance
Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as
a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose
the area with no gaps.
Any gaps equal to or smaller than the value you specify in the gap tolerance
are ignored, and the boundary is treated as closed.

Separate Hatches
Controls whether the command creates a single hatch object or multiple hatch
objects when several separate closed boundaries are specified.

Draw Order
Assigns the draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind
all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or
in front of the hatch boundary.

Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches,
such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch
boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
Use Current Origin Sets the value of the HPORIGINMODE (page 1328) system
variable. The last 5 options listed below correspond to the values 1-5.
Set New Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly.
Default to Boundary Extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular
extents of the hatch. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents
and its center. You can also store the value of the new hatch origin in the
HPORIGIN (page 1327) system variable.

Commands | 495

Annotative
Specifies that the hatch is annotative. This property automates the process of
scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper.

Hatch Color
Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid
fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR (page 1321) system variable.
When Hatch Type is set to Pattern, you can also specify a new background
color. The background color value is stored in the HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR
(page 1320) system variable.
To set the hatch color back to the current color for objects, enter “.” or Use
Current. To turn off the background color, enter “.” or none.
Default Object Color Enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color
name (the names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the
color red by entering the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) number 1 or the ACI
name red. You can also set the hatch color to ByLayer or ByBlock.
Truecolor Specify an RGB color expressed as values from 0 to 255, such as
210,155,95.
Colorbook Specify a custom color from a color book installed on your system.

Layer
Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer.
Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current layer. (HPLAYER (page 1325) system
variable)

Transparency
Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding the current
object transparency. Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current object
transparency setting. (HPTRANSPARENCY (page 1330) system variable)
See also:
Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills

HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or fill.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Hatch

496 | Chapter 2 Commands

Toolbar: Select a hatch or gradient fill to edit its properties on the Hatch
or Gradient visor.
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch or gradient fill to edit. Right-click in the
drawing area and click Hatch Edit.
Pointing device: Double-click a hatch or gradient fill.

Summary
Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an
existing hatch or fill.
If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, the associated options are
displayed (page 498) in the command line.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Select hatch object: Use an object selection method
The Hatch Edit dialog box (page 497) is displayed.
See also:
Modify Hatches and Fills

Hatch Edit Dialog Box
Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale and angle for an
existing hatch or fill.

Summary
The options in the Hatch Edit dialog box are the same as the options for the
Hatch and Gradient dialog box (page 472). Certain options are available only
when creating hatches.
See also:
Modify Hatches and Fills

Commands | 497

-HATCHEDIT
Uses command prompts to modify hatch-specific properties, such as pattern,
scale, and angle for an existing hatch or fill.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select hatch object:
Enter hatch option [DIsassociate (page ?)/Style (page
?)/Properties (page ?)/DRaw order (page ?)/ADd boundaries
(page ?)/Remove boundaries (page ?)/recreate Boundary (page
?)/ASsociate (page ?)/separate Hatches (page ?)/Origin
(page ?)/ANnotative (page ?)/hatch COlor (page ?)/LAyer
(page ?)/Transparency (page ?)] : Enter an option
or press Enter

Disassociate
Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch or fill.

Style
Specifies the method used to hatch or fill boundaries within the outermost
boundary.
Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them.
Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
HATCH turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal island. This
option hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the
internal structure blank.
Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If HATCH encounters
an internal island, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another
island within the island.

Properties
Specifies new hatch properties for the selected hatch. For an explanation of
setting pattern and fill properties at the Command prompt, see -HATCH (page
490).

Draw Order
Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all
other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in
front of the hatch boundary. (HPDRAWORDER (page 1323) system variable)

498 | Chapter 2 Commands

Add Boundaries
Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by adding boundaries.
For more information, see Add: Pick Points (page ?) or Add: Select Objects
(page ?).

Remove Boundaries
Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by removing boundaries.
For more information, see Remove Boundaries (page ?).

Recreate Boundary
Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally
associates the hatch object with it.
For more information, see Recreate Boundary (page ?).

Associate
Specifies that the hatch or fill is associative. A hatch or fill that is associative
is updated when you modify its boundary objects.
Specify Internal Point Determines a boundary from existing objects that
form an enclosed area around the specified point, and associates the selected
hatch with the boundary objects.
Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an
enclosed area, and associates the selected hatch with the boundary objects.

Separate Hatches
Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created
when several separate closed boundaries are specified.

Origin
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation. Some hatches,
such as brick patterns, are meant to be aligned with a point on the hatch
boundary. By default, all hatch origins correspond to the current UCS origin.
Use Current Origin Sets the value of the HPORIGINMODE (page 1328) system
variable. The last 5 options listed below correspond to the values 1-5.
Set New Origin Specifies the new hatch origin point directly.
Default to Boundary Extents Calculates a new origin based on the rectangular
extents of the hatch. Choices include each of the four corners of the extents
and its center. You can also store the value of the new hatch origin in the
HPORIGIN (page 1327) system variable.

Annotative
Specifies that the hatch is annotative. This property automates the process of
scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper.

Commands | 499

Hatch Color
Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid
fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR (page 1321) system variable.
When Hatch Type is set to Pattern, you can also specify a new background
color. The background color value is stored in the HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR
(page 1320) system variable.
To set the hatch color back to the current color for objects, enter “.” or Use
Current. To turn off the background color, enter “.” or none.
Default object color Enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color
name (the names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the
color red by entering the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) number 1 or the ACI
name red. You can also set the hatch color to ByLayer or ByBlock.
Truecolor Specify an RGB color expressed as values from 0 to 255, such as
210,155,95.
Colorbook Specify a custom color from a color book installed on your system.

Layer
Assigns new hatch objects to the specified layer, overriding the current layer.
Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current layer.

Transparency
Sets the transparency level for new hatches or fills, overriding the current
object transparency. Enter Use Current or “.” to use the current object
transparency setting.
See also:
Modify Hatches and Fills

HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY
Creates a non-associated polyline around a selected hatch.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Generate
Boundary.

Summary
Creates a new non-associative polyline boundary around the selected hatch.

500 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select hatch objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter.
See also:
Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills
Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

HATCHSETBOUNDARY
Redefines a selected hatch or fill to conform to a different closed boundary.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Boundary.

Summary
Trims a selected hatch to within a selected boundary or geometry.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select hatch object: Select hatch object to be trimmed.
Select objects to be used for the new boundary: Select the new
boundary or geometry and press Enter.
See also:
Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills
Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

HATCHSETORIGIN
Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation for a selected hatch.

Commands | 501

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Origin.

Summary
Controls the hatch origin location point for solid and gradient hatches. You
can select and change multiple hatch objects and change their hatch origin
for multiple hatches at the same time.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select hatch object: Select the hatch object.
Select new hatch origin: Click inside the hatch to change the origin point.
See also:
Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills
Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

HATCHTOBACK
Sets the draw order for all hatches in the drawing to be behind all other objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Move/Rotate/Scale tool group (expanded)
➤ Draw Order flyout ➤ Send Hatches to Back
Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order ➤ Send Hatches to Back

Summary
Selects all hatches in the drawing, including hatch patterns, solid fills, and
gradient fills, and sets their draw order to be behind all other objects. Hatch
objects on locked layers are also modified.

502 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills
Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed

HELIX
Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤
Helix
Menu: Draw ➤ Helix

Summary
Use a helix as a sweep path for the SWEEP (page 1027) command to create
springs, threads, and circular stairways.

Initially, the default base radius is set to 1. During a drawing session, the
default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius
value for any solid primitive or helix.
The default value for the top radius is always the value of the base radius.
The base radius and top radius cannot both be set to 0.

Commands | 503

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Number of turns = 3 (default)
Twist = CCW (default)
Specify center point of base: Specify a point
Specify base radius or [Diameter (page ?)] <1.0000>: Specify
a base radius, enter d to specify the diameter, or press Enter to specify the default
base radius value
Specify top radius or [Diameter (page ?)] <1.0000>: Specify a
top radius, enter d to specify the diameter, or press Enter to specify the default top
radius value
Specify helix height or [Axis endpoint (page ?)/Turns (page
?)/turn Height (page ?)/tWist (page ?)] <1.0000>: Specify a
helix height, or enter an option

Diameter (Base)
Specifies the diameter of the base of the helix.
Specify diameter <2.0000>: Specify a diameter or press Enter to specify the default
value
Initially, the default base diameter is set to 2. During a drawing session, the
default value for the base diameter is always the previously entered base
diameter value.

Diameter (Top)
Specifies the diameter of the top of the helix.
Specify diameter <2.0000>: Specify a diameter or press Enter to specify the default
value
The default value for the top diameter is always the value of the base diameter.

Axis Endpoint
Specifies the endpoint location for the helix axis. The axis endpoint can be
located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and
orientation of the helix.
Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point

Turns
Specifies the number of turns (revolutions) for the helix. The number of turns
for a helix cannot exceed 500.

504 | Chapter 2 Commands

Initially, the default value for the number of turns is three. During a drawing
session, the default value for the number of turns is always the previously
entered number of turns value.
Enter number of turns: Enter a number

Turn Height
Specifies the height of one complete turn within the helix.
The number of turns in the helix will automatically update accordingly when
a turn height value is specified. If the number of turns for the helix has been
specified, you cannot enter a value for the turn height.
Specify distance between turns : Enter a number to specify the height
for each turn in the helix

Twist
Specifies whether the helix is drawn in the clockwise (CW) or the
counterclockwise (CCW) direction. The default value for the helix twist is
CCW.
Enter twist direction of helix [CW/CCW] : Specify a twist direction for
the helix
See also:
Draw Helixes

HELP
Displays Help.

Access Methods
Menu: Help ➤ AutoCAD Help
Command entry: Cmd-/ or Fn-F1 (or 'help for transparent use)

Summary
Executing the HELP command while a command is active displays Help for
that command. You can also click the Help icon that appears on the right side
of the command line when a command is active. Clicking the Help button in
a dialog box displays Help for that dialog box.

Commands | 505

See also:
Access and Search the Product Help

HIDE
Regenerates a 3D wireframe model with hidden lines suppressed.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Hide

Summary
When you use VPOINT (page 1114), DVIEW (page 385), or VIEW (page 1104) to
create a 3D view of your 2D drawing, a wireframe is displayed in the current
viewport. All lines are present, including those hidden by other objects. HIDE
eliminates the hidden lines from the screen.
HIDE considers the following to be opaque surfaces that hide objects: circles,
solids, traces, text, regions, wide polyline segments, 3D faces, polygon meshes,
and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness.
If they are extruded, circles, solids, traces, and wide polyline segments are
treated as solid objects with top and bottom faces. You cannot use HIDE on
objects whose layers have been frozen; however, you can use HIDE on objects
whose layers have been turned off.
To hide text created with MTEXT or TEXT, the HIDETEXT (page 1318) system
variable must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness value.

When using the HIDE command, if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY (page 1342)
system variable is on, face-to-face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed
as polylines.
The 3D Hidden visual style does not honor the setting of
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY.

506 | Chapter 2 Commands

If the DISPSILH (page 1254) system variable is on, HIDE displays 3D solid objects
with silhouette edges only. It won't show the internal edges produced by
objects that have facets.
If the HIDETEXT system variable is off, HIDE ignores text objects when
producing the hidden view. Text objects are always displayed regardless of
whether they are obscured by other objects, and objects obscured by text
objects are unaffected.
See also:
Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model

HIDEOBJECTS
Hides selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ Hide Objects
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ Hide
Objects.

Commands | 507

Summary
Temporarily hides selected objects in the current view. All other objects are
visible.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
See also:
Control the Display of Objects

HIDEPALETTES
Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window.

Access Methods
Command entry: Tab

Summary
Hides all currently displayed palettes such as the Command Line, Layers, and
Properties Inspector.
See also:
Specify the Behavior of Palettes

I Commands
ID
Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ ID Point

508 | Chapter 2 Commands

Command entry: 'id for transparent use

Summary
ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate
of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by
entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point
The UCS coordinate values of the location are displayed at the Command
prompt.
If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as
that of the selected feature of the object.
See also:
Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations

IMAGE
Displays the Reference Manager palette.

Access Methods
Menu: File ➤ Attach
Menu: Insert ➤ Reference Manager

Summary
The Reference Manager palette (page 414) is displayed.
If you enter -image at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
510).
See also:
Attach Raster Images

Commands | 509

-IMAGE
Attaches a raster image to the drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter image option [? (page ?)/Detach (page ?)/Path (page
?)/Reload (page ?)/Unload (page ?)/Attach (page ?)]
: Enter an option or press Enter

?—List Images
Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is
attached to the drawing, and the path where the image is stored. Images are
listed in alphabetical order, regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT (page
1367) system variable.

Detach
Detaches the named image from the drawing, marks it for deletion, and erases
all occurrences of the image.

Path
Updates the path name (including file name) associated with a particular
image. This option is useful if you change the location of an image file, rename
the file, or replace an old image file with a new file; for instance, you can
update image01.png and save it as image02.png.
If you enter an asterisk (*), the following prompt is displayed:
Old path: Lists the current path name for each image
Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image

Reload
Reloads the selected images, making that information available for display
and plotting.

Unload
Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not
displayed, thus improving performance. All information associated with the
image remains stored with the drawing. The image frame of each attached
image remains visible.

Attach
Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing.
The Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed.

510 | Chapter 2 Commands

The file name without the extension is assigned as the image name. Image
names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and
any special characters not used by the operating system or this program. If
the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object, the Substitute
Image Name dialog box is displayed. A valid image name is generated from
the file name and an underscore and number are appended to the name.
If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing, the
following prompts are displayed and the image is inserted as a copy:
Image file name has already been loaded.
Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition.
Specify insertion point <0,0>: Specify an insertion point
Base image size: Width: current width, Height: current height, current unit
Specify scale factor: Enter a value or press Enter
Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or press Enter
If the FILEDIA (page 1296) system variable is set to 0, the following prompt is
displayed instead of the dialog box:
Enter image file name to attach : Enter an image name
The last image name attached to the drawing during the current session is the
default. To avoid errors when entering an image name, it is recommended
that you specify both the image name and the file name as follows:
imagename=path name/long file name.bmp
or
imagename="path name/long file name.bmp"
If you enter a valid image name without a file extension, the program searches
for the file in this order: first, an existing image definition in the drawing,
and second, an image file in the folders in order of the search path. The
program searches for all the image files with the specified name, regardless of
extension, and uses the first name found. If no image name or image file is
found, the message “Image Not Found” is displayed and the prompt is repeated.
To specify a long file name that does not conform to this program's naming
rules, enter the name as follows:
"imagename=filename"
You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the
imagename=filename convention at the Command prompt. Enter a tilde (~) at

Commands | 511

the Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt. If you press Esc after the dialog
box opens, the Enter Image Name prompt is displayed.
See also:
Attach Raster Images

IMAGEADJUST (-IMAGEADJUST)
Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of
images.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Adjust

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
If you select a single image, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and
Fade are the current property settings of the image. If you select multiple
images, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are 50, 50, and
0, respectively.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly, the fading effect of the image.
The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary
color.
Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image.
The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become
white when you increase contrast.
Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more
the image blends with the current background color. A value of 100 blends
the image completely into the background. Changing the screen background
color causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting, the background
color for fade is white.
See also:
Change Raster Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade

512 | Chapter 2 Commands

IMAGEATTACH
Inserts a reference to an image file.

Access Methods
Menu: Insert ➤ Raster Image Reference

Summary
When you attach an image file, you link that referenced file to the current
drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current
drawing when it is opened or reloaded.
The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page
720)) is displayed. Once you select an image file, the Attach Image dialog box
(page 513) is displayed.
See also:
Attach Raster Images

Attach Image Dialog Box
Locates, inserts, names, and defines the parameters and details of attached
images.

Commands | 513

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Name
Identifies the image you have selected to attach.

Browse
Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box
(page 720)).

Preview
Displays the image that you have selected to attach.

Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the selected image file. Specify On-Screen is
the default. The default insertion point is 0,0,0.
Specify On-Screen Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing
device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the insertion point in X, Y, and
Z.
X Sets the X coordinate value.
Y Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z Sets the Z coordinate value.

Scale
Specifies the scale factor of the selected image.

514 | Chapter 2 Commands

If INSUNITS (page 1335) is set to “unitless” or if the image does not contain
resolution information, the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD
units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or
feet, and the image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after
the true width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined.
Specify On-Screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the
pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale
factor. The default scale factor is 1.
Scale Factor Field Enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor
is 1.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image.
Specify On-Screen If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait until you
exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a
rotation angle value at the Command prompt.
Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the
dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0.

Path Type
Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the image file, or No Path,
the name of the image file (the image file must be located in the same folder
as the current drawing file).

Details
Displays details about the selected image file.
Resolution Displays the number of horizontal and vertical pixels per the
current unit measurement in AutoCAD for Mac.
Unit Displays the current AutoCAD for Mac unit.
Image Size in Pixels Displays the width and height of the raster image
measured in pixels.
Image Size in Units Displays the width and height of the raster image
measured in AutoCAD for Mac units.
Path
■ Found In. Displays the path where the image file is located.
■

Saved Path. Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the
image file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.

Commands | 515

See also:
Attach Raster Images

IMAGECLIP
Crops the display of a selected image to a specified boundary.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Image

Summary
The clipping boundary determines the portion of a raster image that is hidden,
either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary
is controlled by the IMAGEFRAME (page 1331) system variable. The boundary
you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

On
Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined
boundary.

Off
Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame.
If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off, clipping is automatically
turned back on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when
clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.

Delete
Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image.

New Boundary
Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal
clipping boundary from a polyline.
NOTE
You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected IMAGE underlay
after the old boundary is deleted.

516 | Chapter 2 Commands

Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline
can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect
itself.
Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points
that you specify for the vertices of a polygon.
Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify
for opposite corners.
Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped
either outside the boundary or inside the boundary.
See also:
Clip Raster Images

IMAGEQUALITY
Controls the display quality of images.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Quality

Summary
The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take
longer to display. Changing the setting updates the display immediately
without causing a regeneration of the drawing.
NOTE
Images are always plotted using a high-quality setting.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
High Produces a high-quality display of the image.
Draft Produces a lower-quality display of the image.

Commands | 517

See also:
Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images

IMPORT
Imports files of different formats into the current drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: File ➤ Import

Summary
You can import data files, other than DWG files, that were created with other
applications into the current drawing. The import process translates data into
the corresponding DWG file data.
The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is
displayed.
In Files of type, select the file format to import. In File Name, select the file
name to import. The file is imported into the drawing. The following formats
are available for import:
■ ACIS (*.sat): ACIS solid object files (see ACISIN (page 56))
If FILEDIA (page 1296) = 0, the following prompt is displayed:
Enter import file name: Enter path and file name
See also:
Import Other File Formats

IMPRINT
Imprints 2D geometry on a 3D solid or surface, creating additional edges on
planar faces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Imprint Edges

518 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
2D geometry located on a face or the intersection of a 3D solid with a face
can be combined with that face to create additional edges. These edges can
provide a visual effect, and can be pressed and pulled to create indentations
and extrusions.

The object to be imprinted must intersect one or more faces on the selected
solid in order for imprinting to be successful. Imprinting is limited to the
following objects: arcs, circles, lines, 2D and 3D polylines, ellipses, splines,
regions, bodies, and 3D solids.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select a 3D solid or surface Specifies a 3D solid or surface object to be
imprinted.
Select an object to imprint Specifies an object that intersects the 3D object
you selected.
Delete the source object Specifies whether to remove the object whose shape
served as the imprint outline.
See also:
Add Edges and Faces to Solids

INSERT
Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.

Commands | 519

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Insert
Menu: Insert ➤ Block

Summary
The Insert Block dialog box (page 520) is displayed.
If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
523).
A good practice is to insert a block from a block library. A block library can
be a drawing file that stores related block definitions or it can be a folder that
contains related drawing files, each of which can be inserted as a block. With
either method, blocks are standardized and accessible to multiple users.
See also:
Insert Blocks

Insert Dialog Box
Specifies the name and position of the block or drawing to insert.

520 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS.

Name
Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a block.
Browse
Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box)
where you can select a block or drawing file to insert.
Path
Specifies the path to the block.
Explode Block
Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When Explode
is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only.

Commands | 521

Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects
having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the
CONTINUOUS linetype.
Description Displays the description that was saved with the block.
Preview
Displays a preview of the specified block to insert. A lightning bolt icon in
the lower-right corner of the preview indicates that the block is dynamic. A
icon indicates that the block is annotative.

Show\Hide Insertion Options
Expands or collapses the Insertion Options section to allow you to specify the
insertion point, rotation and scale for the block reference being created.

Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the block.
Specify On-Screen
Specifies the insertion point of the block using the pointing device.
X
Sets the X coordinate value.
Y
Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z
Sets the Z coordinate value.

Scale
Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X,
Y, and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block.
Specify On-Screen
Specifies the scale of the block using the pointing device.
X
Sets the X scale factor.

522 | Chapter 2 Commands

Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Uniform Scale
Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS.
Specify On-Screen
Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device.
Angle
Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block.

Block Unit
Displays information about the block units.
Unit
Specifies the INSUNITS (page 1335) value for the inserted block.
Factor
Displays the unit scale factor, which is calculated based on the INSUNITS
(page 1335) value of the block and the drawing units.
See also:
Insert Blocks

-INSERT
Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Commands | 523

Enter block name (page ?) or [? (page ?)] : Enter a name,
enter ?, enter ~, or press Enter
Units:  Conversion:

Specify insertion point (page ?) or [Basepoint (page
?)/Scale (page ?)/X (page ?)/Y (page ?)/Z (page ?)/Rotate
(page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option

Block Name
Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box).
You can control block insertion behavior in response to the Enter Block Name
prompt by following the listed examples.
■

Inserting Exploded Blocks: Preceding the name of the block with an asterisk
(*) explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of it. The block
definition is not added to the drawing.

■

Updating a Block Path: If you enter a block name without a path name,
INSERT searches the current drawing data for an existing block definition
by that name. You can replace an existing block definition with an external
file by entering the following at the Enter Block Name prompt:
block name=file name

■

Updating a Block Definition: If you make changes to a block file that is
inserted in your drawing and you want to change the existing block
definition without creating a new block insertion, enter the following at
the Specify Insertion Point prompt (following the Enter Block Name
prompt):
block name=
If you enter = after the block name, the following prompt is displayed:
Block "current" already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] : Entery, enter n,
or press Enter
If you choose to redefine the block, the existing block definition is replaced
with the new block definition. The drawing is regenerated, and the new
definition is applied to all existing insertions of the block definition. Press
Esc when prompted for the insertion point if you do not want to insert a
new block into the drawing.

NOTE Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups.
You can list unnamed groups with the GROUP command.

524 | Chapter 2 Commands

?—List Block Names
Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing.

Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the block or drawing.
Scale Factor All X and Y dimensions of the block or drawing are multiplied
by the X and Y scale factors. The block or drawing is rotated by the specified
angle, using the insertion point as the center of rotation.
Corner Defines the X and Y scale factors at the same time, using the insertion
point and another point as the corners of a box. The X and Y dimensions of
the box become the X and Y scale factors. The insertion point is the first
corner.
XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.
■ X Scale Factor: Defines X, Y, and Z scale factors for the block or drawing.
■

Corner: Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the insertion
point and another point as the corners of a box, and then defines the Z
scale.

Basepoint
Temporarily drops the block in the drawing where it is currently positioned
and allows you to specify a new base point for the block reference as it is
dragged into position. This does not affect the actual base point defined for
the block reference.

Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the
absolute value of the specified scale factor.

X
Sets the X scale factor.

Y
Sets the Y scale factor.

Z
Sets the Z scale factor.

Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for the block.
See also:
Insert Blocks

Commands | 525

INTERFERE
Creates a temporary 3D solid from the interferences between two sets of
selected 3D solids.

Access Methods

Button

Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Interference Checking

Summary
Interferences are highlighted with a temporary 3D solid that represents the
intersecting volume. You can also choose to retain the overlapping volumes.

If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set
against one another. If you define two selection sets, INTERFERE checks the
solids in the first selection set against those in the second selection set. If you
include the same 3D solid in both selection sets, INTERFERE considers the 3D
solid part of the first selection set and ignores it in the second selection set.

526 | Chapter 2 Commands

Pressing Enter starts the interference testing of pairs of 3D solids and displays
the Interference Checking dialog box (page 528).
If you enter -interfere at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
530).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
First set of objects Specifies a set of objects to be checked. If you do not select
a second set of objects, all objects in this selection set are checked against each
other.
■ Second set of objects (page 527)
■

Nested selection (page 527)

■

Settings (page 527)

Second set of objects Specifies an additional set of objects to be compared
against the first set of objects. If you select the same object twice, the object
is handled as part of the first selection set.
■ Second set of objects (page 527)
■

Nested selection (page 527)

■

Check first set. Initiates interference checking for only the first selection
set and displays the Interference Checking dialog box.

■

Check. Initiates interference checking for both sets of objects and displays
the Interference Checking dialog box.

Nested selection Provides access to individual solid objects that are nested in
blocks and xrefs.
■ Select nested objects. Specifies which nested objects to include in the
selection set.
■

Exit. Restores normal object selection (not nested).

Settings Displays the Interference Settings dialog box (page 528).
See also:
Check 3D Models for Interferences

Commands | 527

Interference Settings Dialog Box
Controls the display of interference objects

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Interference Objects
Specifies the visual style and color for interference objects.
Visual Style
Specifies the visual style for interference objects (INTERFEREOBJVS (page 1340)).
Color
Specifies the color for interference objects (INTERFERECOLOR (page 1340)).
Highlight Interfering Pair
Highlights the interfering pair of solids.
Highlight Interference
Highlights the interference objects created from the interfering pair.

Viewport
Specifies the viewport display while checking for interferences.
Visual Style
Specifies the visual style for the viewport while checking for interferences
(INTERFEREVPVS (page 1341)).
See also:
Check 3D Models for Interferences

Interference Checking Dialog Box
Cycles through, zooms, and deletes or retains interference objects.

528 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Interfering Objects
Displays the number of interferences found between each set during the INTERFERE (page 526) command.
First Set
Displays the number of objects selected in the first set.
Second Set
Displays the number of objects selected in the second set.
Interfering Pairs Found
Displays the number of interferences found among the selected objects.

Zoom
Closes the dialog box and starts the ZOOM (page 1153) command.

Pan
Closes the dialog box and starts the PAN (page 763) command.

3D Orbit
Closes the dialog box and starts the 3DORBIT (page 40) command.

Delete Interference Objects Created on Close
Deletes the interference objects when the dialog box is closed.

Zoom to Pair
Zooms to interference objects while using Previous and Next.

Previous
Highlights the previous interference object.

Commands | 529

Next
Highlights the next interference object.

Close
Closes the dialog box and deletes the interference objects if that option is
selected.
See also:
Check 3D Models for Interferences

-INTERFERE
Summary
INTERFERE highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of
objects selected and the number of interfering pairs.
If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set
against one another. If you define two selection sets, INTERFERE checks the
solids in the first selection set against those in the second selection set. If you
include the same 3D solids in both selection sets, INTERFERE considers the
3D solid part of the first selection set and ignores it in the second selection
set.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Check for interferences between 2 sets of objects or within
1 set of objects...
Select first set of objects or [Nested selection (page ?)]:
Use an object selection method or enter an option
Select second set of objects or [Nested selection (page
?)/checK current] : Use an object selection method, enter n, or
press Enter to check for interferences
Create Interference Objects Creates and highlights new 3D solids on the
current layer that are the intersections of the interfering pairs of 3D solids.
If there are more than two interfering 3D solids, it may not be clear which
pairs are interfering if all the interfering 3D objects are highlighted at once.
■

Zoom to pairs of interfering objects

530 | Chapter 2 Commands

Next Pair Cycles through the interfering pairs of 3D solids.

Nested Selection
Allows you to select individual solid objects that are nested in blocks and
xrefs.
See also:
Check 3D Models for Interferences

INTERSECT
Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or
regions.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group ➤ Booleans flyout
➤ Intersect
Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Intersect

Summary
With INTERSECT, you can create a 3D solid from the common volume of two
or more existing 3D solids, surfaces, or regions. If you select a mesh, you can
convert it to a solid or surface before completing the operation.
You can extrude 2D profiles and then intersect them to create a complex
model efficiently.

Commands | 531

The selection set can contain regions, solids, and surfaces that lie in any
number of arbitrary planes. INTERSECT divides the selection set into subsets
and tests for intersections within each subset. The first subset contains all the
solids and surfaces in the selection set. The second subset contains the first
selected region and all subsequent coplanar regions. The third subset contains
the next region that is not coplanar with the first region and all subsequent
coplanar regions, and so on until all regions belong to a subset.

See also:
Create Composite Objects

ISOLATEOBJECTS
Displays selected objects across layers; unselected objects are hidden.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ Isolate Objects
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ Isolate
Objects.

Summary
Displays selected objects in the current view. All other objects are temporarily
hidden.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method

532 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Control the Display of Objects

ISOPLANE
Specifies the current isometric plane.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'isoplane for transparent use

Summary

The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode
is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho mode
uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current isometric
plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE
(page 402).
You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing Fn-F5 (or F5).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter isometric plane setting [Left (page 533)/Top (page
533)/Right (page 534)] : Enter an option or press Enter
Left

Selects the left-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 150-degree axis pair.
Top

Commands | 533

Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane, defined by the 30-degree
and 150-degree axis pair.
Right

Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair.
See also:
Set Isometric Grid and Snap

J Commands
JOIN
Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group (expanded) ➤ Join
Menu: Modify ➤ Join

Summary
Combines a series of finite linear and open curved objects at their common
endpoints to create a single 2D or 3D object. The type of object that results
depends on the types of objects selected, the type of object selected first, and
whether the objects are coplanar.

534 | Chapter 2 Commands

You can join objects in different planes if the source object is a spline or a 3D
polyline. Each type of object has additional restrictions.

NOTE
Construction lines, rays, and closed objects cannot be joined.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select source object or multiple objects to join at once:
Select lines, polylines, 3D polylines, arcs, elliptical arcs, helixes, or splines.

Source Object
Specifies a single source object to which you can join other objects. Press Enter
after selecting the source object to begin selecting the objects to join. The
following rules apply for each type of source object:
Line Only line objects can be joined to the source line. The line objects must
all be collinear, but can have gaps between them.
Polyline Lines, polylines, and arcs can be joined to the source polyline. All
objects must be contiguous and coplanar. The resulting object is a single
polyline.
3D Polyline Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source 3D
polyline. All the objects must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The
resulting object is either a single 3D polyline or a single spline, depending on
whether you are joining to a linear or a curved object respectively.
Arc Only arcs can be joined to the source arc. All the arc objects must have
the same radius and center point, but can have gaps between them. The arcs
are joined in a counterclockwise direction starting from the source arc.
The Close option converts the source arc into a circle.

Commands | 535

Elliptical Arc Only elliptical arcs can be joined to the source elliptical arc.
The elliptical arcs must be coplanar and have the same major and minor axes,
but can have gaps between them. The elliptical arcs are joined counterclockwise
starting from the source elliptical arc.
The Close option converts the source elliptical arc into an ellipse.
Helix Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source helix. All objects
must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The resulting object is a single
spline.
Spline Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source spline. All
objects must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The resulting object is
a single spline.

Multiple Objects to Join at Once
Joins multiple objects without specifying a source object. The rules and
resulting object types are as follows:
■ A line object results from joining collinear lines. The lines can have gaps
between their endpoints.
■

An arc or circle object results from joining coplanar arcs with the same
center point and radius. The arcs can have gaps between their endpoints.
Lengthening occurs in a counterclockwise direction. A circle object results
if the joined arcs form a complete circle.

■

A spline object results from joining splines, elliptical arcs, or helixes
together, or to other objects. The objects can be noncoplanar.

■

A polyline object results from joining coplanar lines, arcs, polylines, or 3D
polylines.

■

A 3D polyline results from joining noncoplanar objects other than curved
objects.

See also:
Break and Join Objects

JPGOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format.

536 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page
720)) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects or : Press Enter to
select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter
A JPEG file is created that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot options
are preserved in the file when you use this command.
Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if
the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No.
NOTE When the FILEDIA (page 1296) system variable is set to 0 (Off), command
prompts are displayed.
See also:
Export Raster Files

L Commands
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.

Access Methods
Menu: Format ➤ Layer
Command entry: 'layer for transparent use

Summary
The Layers Palette (page 538) is displayed.
If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 551).

Commands | 537

Use layers to control the visibility of objects and to assign properties such as
color and linetype. Objects on a layer normally assume the properties of that
layer. However, you can override any layer property of an object. For example,
if an object’s color property is set to BYLAYER, the object displays the color
of that layer. If the object’s color is set to Red, the object displays as red,
regardless of the color assigned to that layer.
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Layers Palette
Displays a list of the layers in the drawing and their properties.

538 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
You can add, delete, and rename layers, change their properties, set property
overrides for layout viewports, or add layer descriptions and apply changes
in realtime.
When switching layouts or when activating a viewport on named (paper space)
layout, the Layers palette is updated and displays the current state of the layer
properties in the current space.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Layer Drop-down
Displays the current layer and its color, along with some of its common
properties. Click the drop-down list to adjust a layer’s On/Off, Lock/Unlock,
or Thaw/Freeze state. You can also select a layer to set it current.

Toolbar
Make Current Sets the current layer to that of a selected object. (See LAYMCUR
(page 560))
Layer Match Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination
layer. (See LAYMCH (page 559))

Commands | 539

Previous Layer Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings.
(See LAYERP (page 555))
Isolate Layer Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects. (See
LAYISO (page 557))
Unisolate Layer Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO
command. (See LAYUNISO (page 566))
Freeze Layer Freezes the layer of selected objects. (See LAYFRZ (page 556))
Layer Off Turns off the layer of a selected object. (See LAYOFF (page 562))
Lock Layer Locks the layer of a selected object. (See LAYLCK (page 559))
Unlock Layer Unlocks the layer of a selected object. (See LAYULK (page 566))

Show/Hide Layer List
Displays or hides the Layer list which you use to modify the properties of the
layers in the current drawing.

Layer List
Displays the layers and layer groups in the current drawing and their properties.
Click in the columns for a layer to change its properties.
Status Indicates the status of the layer: layer in use, empty layer, or current
layer.
Object Selection Indicates if the layer is assigned to an object that is currently
selected. Objects must be selected when no command is active.
Visibility Indicates if the layer is on and off. When a layer is on, it is visible
and available for plotting. When a layer is off, it is invisible and not plotted,
even if Plot is on.
Description Text string that describes the layer.
Name Displays the name of the layer.
Press Fn-F2 to enter a new name or click over the name when the layer is
highlighted.
Freeze Indicates if the layer is frozen or thawed.
Layers can be frozen in all layouts and viewports, including the Model layout.
You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM (page 1153), PAN (page 763), and many
other operations; improve object selection performance; and reduce
regeneration time for complex drawings.
Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, plotted, hidden, rendered, or
regenerated.

540 | Chapter 2 Commands

Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long periods. If you plan to switch
visibility settings frequently, use the On/Off property to avoid regenerating
the drawing. You can freeze a layer in all viewports, in the current layout
viewport, or in new layout viewports as they are created.
Lock Indicates if the layer is locked or unlocked. Objects on a locked layer
cannot be modified.
Lineweight Displays the lineweight associated with the layer. Clicking the
lineweight name displays a drop-down list with the available lineweights.
Linetype Displays the linetype associated with the layer. Clicking the linetype
name displays a drop-down list with the loaded linetypes. Choose Other at
the bottom of the drop-down list to display the Select Linetype dialog box
(page 550).
Transparency Controls the visibility of all objects on the selected layer. When
transparency is applied to individual objects, the objects’ transparency property
overrides the transparency setting of the layer. Drag the slider to adjust the
transparency of objects on the layer.
Plot (Print) Indicates if the objects on layer should be plotted or not.
If you turn off plotting for a layer, the objects on that layer are still displayed.
Layers that are off or frozen are not plotted, regardless of the Plot setting.
Plot Style Displays the plot style associated with the layer. If you are working
with color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY (page 1410) system variable
is set to 1), you cannot change the plot style associated with a layer. Clicking
the plot style name displays a drop-down list with the available plot styles.
New VP Freeze Freezes the layer in new viewports created on a named (paper
space) layout.
For example, freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new viewports restricts
the display of dimensions on that layer in any newly created named layout
viewports but does not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in existing viewports. If
you later create a viewport that requires dimensions, you can override the
default setting by changing the current viewport setting.
VP Freeze (not available on the Model layout) Freezes the layer in the current
named (paper space) layout viewport. You can freeze or thaw layers in the
current viewport without affecting layer visibility in other viewports.
VP Freeze overrides the Thaw setting for a layer in the drawing. That is, you
can freeze a layer in the current viewport if it's thawed in the drawing, but
you can't thaw a layer in the current viewport if it's frozen or off in the
drawing. A layer is not visible when it is set to Off or Frozen in the drawing.

Commands | 541

VP Color (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the color
associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space) layout
viewport.
VP Lineweight (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the
lineweight associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space)
layout viewport.
VP Linetype (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the
linetype associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space)
layout viewport.
VP Transparency (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for
transparency associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper
space) layout viewport.
VP Plot Style (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the
plot style associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space)
layout viewport. Override settings are not visible in the viewport or plotted
when the visual style in the drawing is set to Conceptual or Realistic. If you
are working with color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY (page 1410)
system variable is set to 1), you cannot set a plot style override.

Layer List - Column Heading Label Shortcut Menu
Display All Layer Colors Toggles the display of the White color swatch in
the Color column of the Layer list.
Optimize All Columns Changes the width of all columns to maximize display
of the column content.
Optimize Column Changes the width of a column to maximize display of
the column content.
Restore All Columns to Defaults Restores all columns to their default display
and width settings.

Layer List - Layer Item Shortcut Menu
Make Active Sets the selected layer as the current layer. (See CLAYER (page
1191) system variable)
Layer Status Toggles the Freeze, Lock, Freeze in New Viewports, or Prints layer
status of the selected layers. The Isolate option isolates the selected layers in
the drawing. All layers except those selected, are turned off and locked. (See
LAYISO (page 557))
Remove Viewport Overrides For (not available on the Model layout)
Removes the layer property overrides assigned to all layers in the drawing or
only for the selected layers in the current viewport only or in all viewports.

542 | Chapter 2 Commands

Rename Renames the selected layer.
Delete Deletes the selected layer from the drawing. You can delete only
unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers
containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer,
and xref-dependent layers.
NOTE Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared
project or one based on a set of layering standards.
Duplicate Layer Creates a new layer based on the selected layer. The new
layer inherits all properties and statuses of the selected layer.
Combine with Layer Displays the Choose a Layer dialog box (page 549) which
allows you to merge the selected layers to a specified layer. After the layers are
merged, the selected layers are removed from the drawing. (See -LAYMRG
(page 561))
Create Group from Layers Creates a new layer group and adds the selected
layers as references of the layer group.
Move to Group Displays the Choose a Group dialog box (page 548) which
allows you to add the selected layers as references to a specified layer group.
Remove From Group Removes the selected layers from the layer group.
Group Similar Layers Displays the New Dynamic Group dialog box (page
546) and defines a rule for each of the layer's properties. Name the new dynamic
group or modify the rules for the new dynamic group before creating the
dynamic group.
New Layer Creates a new layer. The layer list displays a layer named Layer1.
You can edit the name immediately. The new layer inherits the properties of
the currently selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and so on).
New Group Creates a new layer group. The layer list displays a layer group
named Group1. You can edit the name immediately.
New Dynamic Group Displays the New Dynamic Group dialog box (page
546) and allows you to create a layer group that contains all the layers based
on the layer properties specified.
Select All Layers Selects all layers displayed in the list view.
Select All Others Selects all other layers in the list view except the current
selected layers.

Commands | 543

Layer List - Layer Group Item Shortcut Menu
Edit Group (Applies to dynamic layer groups only) Displays the New
Dynamic Group dialog box and allows you to modify the groups rules.
Group Layer Status Toggles the Visibility, Freeze, or Lock, Freeze in New
Viewports, or Prints layer status of the selected layers. The Isolate option
isolates the selected layers in the drawing. All layers except those selected, are
turned off and locked. (See LAYISO (page 557))
Rename Group Renames the selected layer group.
Delete Group Deletes the selected layer group. You have the option to delete
just the layer group, or the layer group and the layers that the group references.
The GROUPLAYERDELETABLE (page 1313) system variable controls the removal
behavior of layers referenced by a layer group when it is being deleted.
Duplicate Group Creates a new layer group based on the selected layer group.
The new layer group inherits the references to all the layers of the selected
layer group.
Merge Group Layers Displays the Choose a Layer dialog box (page 549) which
allows you to merge the layers in the selected layer group to a specified layer.
After the layers are merged, the selected layers are removed from the drawing.
(See -LAYMRG (page 561))
Convert to Group Creates a layer group from the selected dynamic layer
group. When new layers are added or changed, they are no longer
automatically added to or removed from the group based on their properties.
New Layer Creates a new layer. The layer list displays a layer named Layer1.
You can edit the name immediately. The new layer inherits the properties of
the currently selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and so on).
New Group Creates a new layer group. The layer list displays a layer group
named Group1. You can edit the name immediately.
New Dynamic Group Displays the New Dynamic Group dialog box and allows
you to create a layer group that contains all the layers based on the layer
properties specified.
Select Layers in Group Selects all the layers in the selected layer group.

New Layer
Creates a new layer. The layer list displays a layer named Layer1. You can edit
the name immediately. The new layer inherits the properties of the currently
selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and so on).

544 | Chapter 2 Commands

New Layer Group
Creates a new layer group. The layer list displays a layer group named Group1.
You can edit the name immediately.

New Dynamic Layer Group
Displays the New Dynamic Group dialog box and allows you to create a layer
group that contains all the layers based on the layer properties specified.

Delete Selected (-)
Deletes the selected layers or layer groups.
You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0
and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block
definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers.
NOTE Be careful about deleting layers or layer groups if you are working on a
drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards.

Display Settings
Displays a menu of options that controls the display of layer groups, layers,
and column headers in the Layer list.
Show Layer Groups Toggles the display of all layer groups. (See SHOWGROUPS
(page 1431))
■ Show Groups on Top. Displays all layer groups sorted at the top of the
Layer list. (See GROUPSONTOP (page 1314))
■

Show Groups on Bottom. Displays all layer groups sorted at the bottom
of the Layer list. (See GROUPSONTOP (page 1314))

Show Empty Groups Toggles the display of empty layer groups. (See
SHOWEMPTYGROUPS (page 1430))
Show Xref Layers Toggles the display of all layers in attached external
references (xrefs). (See SHOWXREFLAYERS (page 1434))
Show Automatic Groups Toggles the display of layer groups that are populated
dynamically by the product.
■ All Used Layers. Toggles the display of the All Used Layers layer group.
This layer group dynamically updates to list all the layers that do not
currently have any objects on them. (See SHOWALLUSEDLAYERSGROUP
(page 1430))
■

External References. Toggles the display of the Xref layer group. This
layer group dynamically updates to list all attached external references
(xrefs) as nested layer groups and their layers. Show Xref Layers must be
enabled before this layer group can be displayed. (See SHOWXREFGROUPS
(page 1434))

Commands | 545

■

Layers with Overrides. Toggles the display of the Viewport Overrides
layer group. This layer group dynamically updates to list all the layers in
the active layout viewport that contain property overrides. (See SHOWVPOVERRIDESGROUP (page 1433))

■

Unreconciled Layers. Toggles the display of the Unreconciled Layers
layer group. This layer group dynamically updates to list all the layers that
have not been reconciled. (See SHOWUNRECONCILEDLAYERSGROUP
(page 1433))

View Options Toggles the display of the column headings, and provides
options to automatically adjust the size of all or the selected column to its
maximum width in the Layer list.

Search for Layer
Filters the Layer list by name quickly as you enter characters. This filter is not
saved when you close the Layers palette.
See also:
Work with Layers

New Dynamic Group Dialog Box
Groups layers based on the criteria you select.

Summary
When a dynamic layer group is added to the Layers palette (page 538), layers
that match the rules are displayed in the Layer list under the layer group when
expanded.

546 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Group Name
Provides a space to enter a name for the layer group.

Parent Group
Displays a list of all the layer groups that the new dynamic layer group can
be nested under.

Rules
Displays the properties of layers. You can use one or more properties to define
the layer group. For example, you can define a layer group that displays all
layers that are either Red or Blue and in use. To include more than one color,
linetype, or lineweight, add another rule and select a different setting.
Name Use wild-card characters in the edit field to filter layer names. For
example, enter *mech* to include all layers with the letters mech in the name.
All the wild-card characters are listed in the table in Filter and Sort the List of
Layers in the User's Guide.
Freeze State Selects Frozen or Thawed layers.
Viewport Visibility Selects Visible (On) or Hidden (Off) layers.
Lock State Selects Locked or Unlocked layers.
Plot State Selects Plotting or Non-plotting layers.
Color Selects layers that match or do not match the selected color. Choose
Select Color to display the Color Palette dialog box (page 198).
Linetype Selects layers that match or do not match the selected linetype.
Choose Manage to display the Select Linetype dialog box (page 550).
Lineweight Selects layers that match or do not match the selected lineweight.
Choose Manage to display the Lineweight Settings dialog box.
Transparency Selects layers that match or do not match the specified
transparency. Drag the slider to specify a transparency level.
Plot Style (Applies to drawings that use named plot styles) Selects layers
that match or do not match the selected named plot style.
New VP Freeze State Selects Frozen or Thawed layers in new viewports.
Viewport Color Selects layers that have a color override, and match or do not
match the selected color. Choose Select Color to display the Color Palette
dialog box (page 198).

Commands | 547

Viewport Freeze State Selects Frozen or Thawed layers in the current viewport.
Viewport Linetype Selects layers that have a linetype override, and match or
do not match the selected linetype. Choose Manage to display the Select
Linetype dialog box (page 550).
Viewport Lineweight Selects layers that have a lineweight override, and
match or do not match the selected lineweight. Choose Manage to display
the Lineweight Settings dialog box.
Viewport Transparency Selects layers that have a transparency override, and
match or do not match the specified transparency. Drag the slider to specify
a transparency level.
Viewport Plot Style (Applies to drawings that use named plot styles) Selects
layers that have a plot style override, and match or do not match the selected
named plot style.
Layer Selects Used or Not-Used layers in Model space or a viewport.

Remove Rule
Removes a single rule or a grouping of rules.

Create Rule Group
Creates an And grouping of rules. Grouping rules allows you to make complex
filters.

Add Rule
Adds a new rule. Use the new set of controls to specify the layer properties
and conditions for the rule.

Create Group
Adds the new dynamic group to the Layers palette.
See also:
Work with Layers

Choose a Group Dialog Box
Adds references of the selected layers to a specified layer group.

548 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Choose a group to add the layer to
Lists the available layer groups in the current drawing that you can add the
selected layers to.
See also:
Work with Layers

Choose a Layer Dialog Box
Merges selected layers to a specified layer.

Commands | 549

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Choose an existing layer to move content to
Lists the available layers in the current drawing that you can merge the selected
layers with from the Layers palette. All objects on the selected layers from the
Layers palette are moved to the specified layer and then the layers are removed
from the drawing.
See also:
Work with Layers

Select Linetype Dialog Box
Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.

550 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Loaded Linetypes
Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing.
Load
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (page 578), in which you can
load selected linetypes into the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes.
See also:
Work with Layers

-LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current layer: <"current">
Enter an option [? (page ?)/Make (page ?)/Set (page ?)/New
(page ?)/Rename (page ?)/ON (page ?)/OFF (page ?)/Color

Commands | 551

(page ?)/Ltype (page ?)/LWeight (page ?)/TRansparency
(page ?)/MATerial (page ?)/Plot (page ?)/PStyle (page
?)/Freeze (page ?)/Thaw (page ?)/LOck (page ?)/Unlock
(page ?)/stAte (page ?)/Description (page ?)/rEconcile
(page ?)]:
NOTE
The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.

?—List Layers
Displays a list of the currently defined layers, showing their names, states,
color numbers, linetypes, lineweights, and whether they are externally
dependent layers.

Make
Creates a layer and makes it current. New objects are drawn on the current
layer.
If no layer exists for the name you enter, a new layer with that name is created.
The new layer is on and assumes the following properties by default: color
number 7, the CONTINUOUS linetype, and a lineweight of DEFAULT.
If the layer exists but is turned off, it is turned on.

Set
Specifies a new current layer but does not create the layer if it does not already
exist. If the layer exists but is turned off, it is turned on and made current. A
frozen layer cannot be made current.

New
Creates layers. You can create two or more layers by entering names separated
by commas.

Rename
Renames an existing layer.

On
Makes selected layers visible and available for plotting.

Off
Makes selected layers invisible and excludes them from plotting.

Color
Changes the color associated with a layer. Enter a color name or a number
from 1 through 255.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three
integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color.

552 | Chapter 2 Commands

Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book, guide, or set to use for
the selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed,
such as "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43".
The color is assigned to the layer or layers, and the layers are turned on. To
assign a color but turn off the layer, precede the color with a minus sign (-).

Ltype
Changes the linetype associated with a layer.

Lweight
Changes the lineweight associated with a layer.
If you enter a valid lineweight, the current lineweight is set to the new value.
If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, the current lineweight is set to the
nearest fixed lineweight value. If you would like to plot an object with a
custom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the
Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights.

Transparency
Changes the transparency level associated with a layer. Enter a value from 0
to 90.
After specifying a transparency value, the following prompt is displayed:
Enter name list of layer(s) for transparency specified value% <0>: Enter the names
of the layers to which to apply this transparency level, or press Enter to apply it to
the current layer only

Material
Attaches a material to a layer. The material must be available in the drawing
before it can be assigned to a layer.

Plot
Controls whether visible layers are plotted. If a layer is set to plot but is
currently frozen or turned off, the layer is not plotted.

Pstyle
Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are
using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY
(page 1410) system variable is set to 1).
If you select a plot style other than NORMAL, the following prompt is
displayed:
Enter name list of layer(s) for plot style current : Enter the names of the
layers to use this plot style, or press Enter to apply the style to the current layer only

Commands | 553

Freeze
Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration
and plotting.

Thaw
Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and
plotting.

Lock
Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers.

Unlock
Unlocks selected locked layers, permitting editing of objects on those layers.

State
Saves and restores the state and property settings of the layers in a drawing.
?—List Named Layer States Lists the named layer state (LAS) files in the
support path for the drawing.
Save Saves the state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing under
a specified layer state name. When saving a layer state, you specify which
layer settings are affected when the layer state is later restored.
Restore Restores the state and property settings of all layers to previously
saved settings. Restores only those layer state and property settings that were
selected when the layer state was saved.
Edit Changes the saved layer settings for a specified layer state. When the
layer state is restored, the specified settings are used.
Name Changes the name of a saved layer state.
Delete Removes a saved layer state.
Import Loads a previously exported layer state (LAS) file, or layers states from
a file (DWG, DWT) into the current drawing. Additional layers may be created
as a result of importing a layer state file.
Export Saves a selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file.

Description
Sets the description property value of the existing layer.
A warning prompt is displayed when you enter a description to a layer with
an existing description.

Reconcile
Sets the unreconciled property of an unreconciled layer.
? - Name List of Layers Displays a list of all unreconciled layers.

554 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LAYERCLOSE
Closes the Layers palette.

Summary
Closes the Layers palette if it is open.
See also:
Work with Layers

LAYERP
Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Previous Layer
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Previous

Summary
Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. If
settings are restored, a message is displayed: “Restored previous layer states.”
When you use Layer Previous, it undoes the most recent change using the
Layers palette or -LAYER command. Every change you make to layer settings
is tracked and can be undone by Layer Previous.
LAYERP (Layer Previous) does not undo the following changes:
■ Renamed layers: If you rename a layer and change its properties, Layer
Previous restores the original properties but not the original name.

Commands | 555

■

Deleted layers: If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does not
restore it.

■

Added layers: If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous does
not remove it.

See also:
Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties

LAYERPMODE
Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings.

Summary
When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When
Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked.
See also:
Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties

LAYFRZ
Freezes the layer of selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Freeze Layer
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Freeze

Summary
Objects on frozen layers are invisible. In large drawings, freezing unneeded
layers speeds up operations involving display and regeneration. In a layout,
you can freeze layers in individual layout viewports.

556 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Viewports=current, Block nesting level=current
Select an object on a layer to be frozen (page ?) or [Settings (page ?)/Undo (page ?)]: Select an object or enter s or u
Layer  has been frozen.

Select an Object on a Layer to be Frozen
Specifies the layer to be frozen.
Layer “” has been frozen.

Settings
Displays settings for viewports and block definitions. The setting you choose
persists from session to session.
Enter setting type for [Viewports/Block selection]:
Viewports Displays settings for viewports.
In paper space viewport use [Freeze/Vpfreeze] : Enterf to freeze objects
in all viewports orv to freeze an object in the current viewport only
Block Selection Displays settings for block definitions.
■ Block. If a selected object is nested in a block, freezes the layer of that
block. If a selected object is nested in an xref, freezes the layer of the object.
■

Entity. Freezes the layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an
xref or a block.

■

None. If a block or an xref is selected, freezes the layer containing that
block or xref.

Undo
Cancels the previous layer selection.
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LAYISO
Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects.

Commands | 557

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Isolate Layer
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Isolate

Summary
All layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen
in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting.
The layers that remain visible and unlocked are called isolated.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current setting: 
Select objects on the layer(s) to be isolated or [Settings]:
Select objects or enters

Select Objects on the Layer(s) to be Isolated
After selecting one or more objects, all layers except the layers of the selected
objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked,
depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked
are termed isolated.
NOTE Locked layers are faded by default. You can specify the percent of the fading
from the Lock option in this command. You can later change the value with the
LAYLOCKFADECTL (page 1348) system variable.
If you make changes to layers within a session and you want to restore the
layers to the state they were in immediately before you entered the LAYISO
command, use the LAYUNISO (page 566) command.

Settings
Controls whether layers are turned off, frozen in the current layout viewports,
or locked.
Off Turns off or freezes all layers except the layers of the selected objects.
Vpfreeze In a layout, freezes all but the selected layers in the current layout
viewport only. Other layout viewports in the drawing are unchanged.
If not in a layout, all other layers are turned off instead.

558 | Chapter 2 Commands

Off Turns off all but the selected layers in all viewports.

Lock and Fade
Locks all layers except the layers of the selected objects, and sets the fading for
locked layers.
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LAYLCK
Locks the layer of a selected object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Lock Layer
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Lock

Summary
Using this command, you can prevent objects on a layer from being
accidentally modified. You can also fade the objects on a locked layer using
the LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable.
See also:
Prevent Objects from Being Selected

LAYMCH
Changes the layer of a selected object to match the destination layer.

Access Methods

Button

Commands | 559

Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Layer Match
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Match

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects to be changed: Select an object to change its layer
Select object on destination layer (page 560) or [Name (page
560)]: Select an object or enter n to open the Change to Layer dialog box
Select Object on Destination Layer Select an object on the destination layer.
Name Displays the Change to Layer dialog box (page 560).
If you create an object on the wrong layer, you can change its layer to the one
you want using LAYMCH.
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

Change to Layer Dialog Box
Displays a list of layers to choose as the destination layer. You can also create
a new destination layer.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Current Layer Displays the currently selected layer. Create a new layer name
by entering a name.
Destination Layer list Displays a list of layers in the drawing.
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LAYMCUR
Sets the current layer to that of a selected object.

560 | Chapter 2 Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Make Current
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current

Summary
You can change the current layer by selecting an object on that layer. This is
a convenient alternative to specifying the layer name in the Layers palette.
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LAYMRG (-LAYMRG)
Merges selected layers into a target layer, removing the previous layers from
the drawing.

Summary
You can reduce the number of layers in a drawing by merging them. Objects
on merged layers are moved to the target layer, and the original layers are
purged from the drawing.
If you enter laymrg or -laymrg at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 561).
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

-LAYMRG
Summary
The layer you selected to merge into the target layer is deleted.

Commands | 561

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select object on layer to merge (page ?)or [Name (page
?)]: Select an object or enter n to select a layer from a list of layers
After you selected the layer(s) to merge, the following prompt is displayed:
Select object on target layer (page ?)or [Name (page ?)]:
Select an object or enter n to select a target layer from a list of layers

Select Object on Layer to Merge
Select an object on the destination layer.

Name
Displays a list of layers, where you can select layers to merge.

Select Object on Target Layer
Select an object on the target layer.

Name
Displays a list of layers onto which you can merge the selected object or layer.
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LAYOFF
Turns off the layer of a selected object.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Layer Off
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Off

Summary
Turning off the layer of a selected object makes that object invisible. This
command is useful if you need an unobstructed view when working in a
drawing or if you don’t want to plot details such as reference lines.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

562 | Chapter 2 Commands

Current settings: Viewports=current, Block nesting level=current
Select an object on the layer to be turned off (page ?)or
[Settings (page ?)/Undo (page ?)]: Select an object, enter s, or enter
u

Select an Object on the Layer to be Turned Off
Selects one or more objects whose layers you want to turn off.

Settings
Displays the Viewports and Block Definition setting types. The setting you
choose persists from session to session.
Viewports Displays the Viewports setting types.
Returns the following prompt:
■

Vpfreeze: In paper space, freezes the layer selected in the current
viewport.

■

Off: In paper space, turns off selected layers in all viewports.

Block Selection Displays the Block Selection setting types, where you can
freeze layers of selected objects.
■ Block: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a selected object is nested
in a block, the layer containing that block is turned off. If a selected object
is nested in an xref, the layer of the object is turned off.
■

Entity: Turns off layers of selected objects even if they are nested in an
xref or a block.

■

None: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a block or an xref is
selected, the layer containing that block or xref is turned off.

Undo
Cancels the previous layer selection.
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LAYOUT
Creates and modifies drawing layouts.

Commands | 563

Access Methods
Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ New Layout
Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Layout from Template
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Layout drop-down ➤ Create New Layout

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter layout option [Copy (page 564)/Delete (page 564)/New
(page 564)/Template (page 564)/Rename (page 564)/SAveas (page
564)/Set (page 565)/? (page 565)] :
NOTE
Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name.
Copy Copies a layout. If you do not provide a name, the new layout assumes
the name of the copied layout with an incremental number in parentheses.
Delete Deletes a layout. The most current layout is the default.
The Model layout cannot be deleted. To remove all the geometry from the
Model layout, you must select all geometry and use the ERASE (page 406)
command.
New Creates a new layout. Up to 255 layouts can be created in a single drawing.
Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long
and are not case sensitive.
Template Creates a new layout based on an existing layout in a template
(DWT), drawing (DWG), or drawing interchange (DXF) file. If the FILEDIA
(page 1296) system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box (page
720) is displayed for selecting a DWT, DWG, or DXF file. After you select a file,
the Insert Layouts dialog box is displayed, which lists the layouts saved in the
selected file. After you select a layout, the layout and all objects from the
specified template or drawing file are inserted into the current drawing.
Rename Renames a layout. The last current layout is used as the default for
the layout to rename.
Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long
and are not case sensitive.
Saveas Saves a layout as a drawing template(DWT) file without saving any
unreferenced symbol table and block definition information. You can then
use the template to create new layouts in your drawings without having to

564 | Chapter 2 Commands

eliminate unnecessary information. See “Reuse Layouts and Layout Settings”
in the User's Guide.
The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to save as a template.
If the FILEDIA (page 1296) system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection
dialog box is displayed in which you can specify the template file in which
to save the layout.
The default layout template directory is specified in the Application Preferences
dialog box.
Set Makes a layout current.
?—List Layouts Lists all the layouts defined in the drawing.
See also:
Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space)

Layout Visor
Create new layouts, and modify the page setup settings for and print the
current layout.

Summary
The Layout visor is displayed when you switch to a named layout and the
PAPERSPACEVISOR (page 1386) system variable is set to 1.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

New Viewport
Creates and controls layout viewports. (MVIEW (page 700) command)

Edit Page Setup
Edits the page setup settings for the current layout. (PAGESETUPEDIT (page
761) command)

Commands | 565

Print Layout
Outputs the current layout to a printer or file. (PLOT (page 792) command)

Close the Visor
Closes the Layout visor. The visor is not displayed when switching named
layouts until the PAPERSPACEVISOR (page 1386) system variable is set back to
1.
See also:
Work on a Named Layout

LAYULK
Unlocks the layer of a selected object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Unlock Layer
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unlock

Summary
When you move the cursor over objects on locked layers, the locked icon is
displayed.
You can select an object on a locked layer and unlock that layer without
specifying the name of the layer. Objects on unlocked layers can be selected
and modified.
See also:
Prevent Objects from Being Selected

LAYUNISO
Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command.

566 | Chapter 2 Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Unisolate Layer
Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unisolate

Summary
Reverses the effects of the previous LAYISO command. Any additional changes
made to layer settings after you use the LAYISO command will be retained.
LAYUNISO restores layers to the state they were in just before you entered the
LAYISO (page 557) command. Changes to layer settings after LAYISO is used
are retained when you enter the LAYUNISO command. If LAYISO was not
used, LAYUNISO does not restore any layers.
NOTE You can also restore layers to their previous layer state by using the LAYERP
(page 555) command as long as you have not made any changes to layer settings.
See also:
Use Layers to Manage Complexity

LEADER
Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature.

Summary
It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER
(page 651) command to create leader objects.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify leader start point:
Specify next point:
A leader line segment is drawn and prompts for points and options are
displayed.

Commands | 567

Specify next point (page ?) or [Annotation (page ?)/Format
(page ?)/Undo (page ?)] : Specify a point, enter an
option, or press Enter

Point Specification
Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt
you for points and options.

Annotation
Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be
single or multiple lines of text, a feature control frame containing geometric
tolerances, or a block.
If you press Enter at the Annotation prompt without entering text first, the
following options are displayed:
Tolerance Creates a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances
using the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (see TOLERANCE (page 1057)).
You can create datum indicators and basic dimension notation in these dialog
boxes. After you specify the geometric tolerance, LEADER ends.

Copy Copies text, a multiline text object, a feature control frame with
geometric tolerances, or a block and connects the copy to the end of the leader
line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied
object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. The display of the hook
line depends on the object copied.
The value of the current text gap (see DIMSTYLE (page 314) or the DIMGAP
(page 1232) system variable) determines where the text and multiline text objects
are inserted. Blocks or feature control frames with geometric tolerances are
attached to the end of the leader line.
Block Inserts a block at the end of the leader line. The prompts are the same
as for INSERT (page 519). The block reference is inserted at an offset from the
end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line, meaning that if the
block moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. No hook line is
displayed.

568 | Chapter 2 Commands

None Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line.
Mtext Creates text using the In-Place Text Editor (page 675) when you specify
an insertion point and a second point for the text boundary.
Enter the characters for the text. Enclose format strings for prefixes and suffixes
in angle brackets (< >). Enclose format strings for alternate units in square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about adding a prefix or suffix, see “Control
the Display of Dimension Units” in the User's Guide.
The units settings and the current text style determine how the text is
displayed. The multiline text is vertically centered and horizontally aligned
according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices of the leader line.
The text is offset from the hook line by the distance specified under Offset
from Dim Line on the Text tab of the New, Modify, or Override Dimension
Style dialog box (page 318). If the offset specified is negative, the multiline text
is enclosed in a box as a basic dimension.

Format
Controls the way the leader is drawn and whether it has an arrowhead.

Spline Draws the leader line as a spline. The vertices of the leader line are the
control points, each of equal unit weight.
Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments.
Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line.
None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point.

Commands | 569

Undo
Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. The previous prompt is
displayed.
See also:
Create Leaders
Modify Leaders Using Grips

LENGTHEN
Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Lengthen
Menu: Modify ➤ Lengthen

Summary
You can specify changes as a percentage, an increment, or as a final length or
angle. LENGTHEN is an alternative to using TRIM or EXTEND.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

570 | Chapter 2 Commands

Select an object (page ?) or [DElta (page ?)/Percent (page
?)/Total (page ?)/DYnamic (page ?)]: Select one object or enter an
option

Object Selection
Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object.
LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the
selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate
system (UCS).

Delta
Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the
endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Delta also changes the angle
of an arc by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest
to the selection point. A positive value extends the object; a negative value
trims it.
Delta Length Changes the length of the object by the specified increment.

Angle Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle.

Percent
Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length.

Total
Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from
the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a
specified total angle.

Commands | 571

Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint
that is closest to the selection point.
Angle Sets the included angle of the selected arc.

Dynamic
Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected object
by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed.
See also:
Resize or Reshape Objects

LIGHT
Creates a light.

List of Prompts
Depending on the type of light you specify, the prompts that are displayed
are identical to the prompts in the POINTLIGHT (page 816), SPOTLIGHT (page
997), WEBLIGHT (page 1130), TARGETPOINT (page 1040), FREESPOT (page 444),
FREEWEB (page 447) or DISTANTLIGHT (page 354) command.
See also:
Guidelines for Lighting

572 | Chapter 2 Commands

LIMITS
Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or named
layout.

Access Methods
Menu: Format ➤ Drawing Limits
Command entry: 'limits for transparent use

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify lower left corner (page 573)or [ON (page 573)/OFF (page
573)] : Specify a point, enter on or off, or press Enter
Lower-Left Corner Specifies the lower-left corner for the grid limits.

On Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on, you cannot enter
points outside the grid limits. Because limits checking tests only points that
you enter, portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the grid limits.
Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next
time you turn on limits checking.
See also:
Adjust Grid and Grid Snap

LINE
Creates straight line segments.

Commands | 573

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group ➤ Line
Menu: Draw ➤ Line

Summary
With LINE, you can create a series of contiguous line segments. Each segment
is a line object that can be edited separately.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first point: Specify a point or press Enter to continue (page
574) from the last drawn line or arc
Specify next point or [Close (page 575)/Undo (page 575)]:
Continue Continues a line from the endpoint of the most recently drawn
line.

If the most recently drawn object is an arc, its endpoint defines the starting
point of the line, and the line is drawn tangent to the arc.

574 | Chapter 2 Commands

Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment,
which forms a closed loop of line segments. You can use Close after you have
drawn a series of two or more segments.

Undo Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence.

Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you
created them.
See also:
Draw Lines

LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.

Commands | 575

Access Methods
Menu: Format ➤ Linetype
Command entry: 'linetype for transparent use

Summary
The Linetype Manager (page 576) is displayed.
If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
579).
See also:
Work with Linetypes

Linetype Manager
Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.

576 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Linetype Filters
Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter
linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are
referenced by objects.

List of Linetypes
Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype
Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype
list to display the shortcut menu.
Current Indicates which linetype is current.
Double-click a linetype to set it as the current linetype. Setting the current
linetype to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned
to a particular layer. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object
assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever
the block is inserted, all objects inherit the block's linetype. The CELTYPE
(page 1186) system variable stores the linetype name.
Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes. To rename a linetype, select it
and then click it again and enter a new name. BYLAYER, BYBLOCK,
CONTINUOUS, and xref-dependent linetypes cannot be renamed.
Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes.
Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes, which can be edited in
the Details area.

Load (+)
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (page 578), in which you can
load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad.lin file and add them
to the linetype list.

Delete (-)
Deletes selected linetypes from the drawing. You can delete only unused
linetypes. The BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and CONTINUOUS linetypes cannot be
deleted.
NOTE Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a
shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. The deleted linetype
definition remains stored in the acad.lin or acadiso.lin file and can be reloaded.

Details
Provides alternative access to properties and additional settings.

Commands | 577

Name
Displays the selected linetype name, which can be edited.
Description
Displays the description of the selected linetype, which can be edited.
Global Scale Factor
Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes. (LTSCALE (page 593) system
variable)
Current Object Scale
Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The resulting scale is the global
scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor. (CELTSCALE (page 1186)
system variable)
ISO Pen Width
Sets the linetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO values. The resulting
scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor.
Use Paper Space Units for Scaling
Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. Useful when
working with multiple viewports. (PSLTSCALE (page 1408) system variable)
See also:
Work with Linetypes

Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box
Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file.

578 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
File Name
Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter the name of another
LIN file or click the File button to select a file from the Select Linetype File
dialog box.
Browse
Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box, in which you can select a different
linetype (LIN) file.
Available Linetypes
Displays the linetypes available to load. To select or clear all of the linetypes
on the list, right-click and choose Select All or Clear All.
See also:
Work with Linetypes

-LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.

Commands | 579

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [? (page 580)/Create (page 580)/Load (page
580)/Set (page 580)]:
?—List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). After you select an LIN file, the linetypes available in
the file are listed.
Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file.
The Create or Append Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box) is displayed. Specify the file to which you want the linetype added.
You cannot create complex linetypes with LINETYPE. For more information,
see Custom Linetypes in the Customization Guide.
Descriptive Text Enter a linetype description up to 47 characters long. The
description can be a comment or a series of underscores, dots, dashes, and
spaces to show a simple representation of the linetype pattern.
Linetype Pattern Enter a pattern definition as a series of numbers separated
by commas. Enter positive values to specify lengths of dashes, and enter
negative values to specify lengths of spaces. Use a zero to represent a dot.

The “A” in the pattern definition prompt specifies the pattern alignment used
at the ends of individual lines, circles, and arcs. Only A-type alignment is
supported. With A-type alignment, lines and arcs are guaranteed to start and
end with a dash. The A is automatically included in the definition. If you use
a text editor to create a linetype, you must enter a at the beginning of the
definition.
After creating a linetype, you must load it to make it accessible.
Load Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a file. The acad.lin file contains
the standard linetypes.
The Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter or select the file in which the linetype you want to load is
stored.
Set Sets the current linetype for objects that will be drawn subsequently. You
can control the linetype of objects individually or by layer.
The linetype you enter becomes the current linetype. All new objects are drawn
with this linetype, regardless of the current layer. If the linetype you request

580 | Chapter 2 Commands

is not loaded, the program searches for its definition in the acad.lin file. If the
linetype is neither loaded nor in acad.lin, the program displays a message and
returns you to the Command prompt.
Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter bylayer, new objects
inherit the linetype associated with the layer on which the object is drawn.
If you enter byblock, new objects are drawn using the CONTINUOUS linetype
until they are grouped into a block. Whenever you insert that block, the objects
inherit the linetype of the block.
See also:
Work with Linetypes

LIST
Displays property data for selected objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ List

Summary
You can use LIST to display and then copy the properties of selected objects
to a text file.
The text window displays the object type, object layer, and the X,Y,Z position
relative to the current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object
is in model space or paper space.
LIST also reports the following information:
■ Color, linetype, lineweight, and transparency information, if these
properties are not set to BYLAYER.
■

The thickness of an object, if it is nonzero.

■

Elevation (Z coordinate information).

■

Extrusion direction (UCS coordinates), if the extrusion direction differs
from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS.

■

Additional information related to the specific object type. For example,
for dimensional constraint objects, LIST displays the constraint type
(annotation or dynamic), reference type (yes or no), name, expression,
and value.

Commands | 581

See also:
Display and Change the Properties of Objects

LIVESECTION
Turns on live sectioning for a selected section object.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select a section plane object. Right-click and choose Activate
Live Sectioning.

Summary
When turned on, the cross sections of 3D objects intersected by the section
object are displayed. Live sectioning only works with objects that were created
with SECTIONPLANE.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select section object Turns on live sectioning for the section object you select.
See also:
Use Live Section to Adjust the Cross Section

LOAD
Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command.

582 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page
720)) is displayed. Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list.
You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it; it is loaded
automatically thereafter. The shape file must be available each time you edit
the drawing.
See also:
Overview of Shape Files

LOFT
Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Loft
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Loft

Summary
Creates a 3D solid or surface by specifying a series of cross sections. The cross
sections define the shape of the resulting solid or surface. You must specify
at least two cross sections.

Loft cross sections can be open or closed, planar or non-planar, and can also
be edge subobjects. Open cross sections create surfaces and closed cross sections
create solids or surfaces, depending on the specified mode.

Commands | 583

Loft profiles can be open or closed, planar or non-planar, and can also be edge
subobjects. Use the mode option to select whether to create a surface or a
solid.

When creating surfaces, use SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1453) to control
whether the surface is a NURBS surface or a procedural surface. Use SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY (page 1452) to control whether procedural surfaces are
associative.
You can use the following objects and subobjects with LOFT:
Objects That Can Be
Used as Cross Sections

Objects That Can Be
Used as a Loft Path

Objects That Can Be
Used as Guides

2D polyline

Spline

2D spline

2D spline

Helix

3D spline

Arc

Arc

Arc

2D solid

584 | Chapter 2 Commands

Objects That Can Be
Used as Cross Sections

Objects That Can Be
Used as a Loft Path

Objects That Can Be
Used as Guides

Circle

Circle

2D polyline
NOTE
2D polylines can be used
as guides if they contain
only 1 segment.

Edge sub-objects

Edge subobjects

Edge subobjects

Ellipse

Ellipse

3D polyline

Elliptical arc

Elliptical arc

Elliptical arc

Helix

2D polyline

Line

Line

Line

Planar or non-planar face of
solid
Planar or non-planar surface
Points (first and last cross
section only)

3D polyline

Region
Trace

To automatically delete the cross sections, guides, and paths, use DELOBJ
(page 1213). If surface associativity (page 1452) is on, DELOBJ is ignored and the
originating geometry is not deleted.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Commands | 585

Cross Sections in Lofting Order Specifies open or closed curves in the order
in which the surface or solid will pass through them.
Point If you select the Point option, you must also select a closed curve.
Join Multiple Curves Joins multiple, end-to-end curves as one cross section.
Mode Controls whether the lofted object is a solid or a surface.
Options
■ Guides (page ?)
■

Path (page ?)

■

Cross sections only (page ?)

■

Settings (page ?)

Continuity This option only displays if the LOFTNORMALS (page 1358) system
variable is set to 1 (smooth fit). Specifies whether the continuity is G0, G1, or
G2 where the surfaces meet.

Bulge Magnitude This option only displays if the LOFTNORMALS (page 1358)
system variable is set to 1 (smooth fit). Specifies a bulge magnitude value for
objects that have a continuity of G1 or G2.

Guides
Specifies guide curves that control the shape of the lofted solid or surface. You
can use guide curves to control how points are matched up on corresponding

586 | Chapter 2 Commands

cross sections to prevent undesired results, such as wrinkles in the resulting
solid or surface.

■

Intersects each cross section

■

Starts on the first cross section

■

Ends on the last cross section

Select any number of guide curves for the lofted surface or solid and press
Enter.

Path
Specifies a single path for the lofted solid or surface.

The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections.

Commands | 587

Cross Sections Only
Creates lofted objects without using guides or paths.

Settings
Displays the Loft Settings dialog box (page 588).
See also:
Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting

Loft Settings Dialog Box
Controls the contour of a lofted surface at its cross sections. Also allows you
to close the surface or solid.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Ruled
Specifies that the solid or surface is ruled (straight) between the cross sections
and has sharp edges at the cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS (page 1358) system
variable)

588 | Chapter 2 Commands

Smooth Fit
Specifies that a smooth solid or surface is drawn between the cross sections
and has sharp edges at the start and end cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS (page
1358) system variable)

Start Continuity
Sets the tangency and curvature of the first cross section.
Start Bulge Magnitude
Sets the size of the curve of the first cross section.
End Continuity
Sets the tangency and curvature of the last cross section.
End Bulge Magnitude
Sets the size of the curve of the last cross section.

Normal To
Controls the surface normal of the solid or surface where it passes through
the cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS (page 1358) system variable)
Start Cross Section Specifies that the surface normal is normal to the start
cross section.

Commands | 589

End Cross Section Specifies that the surface normal is normal to the end cross
section.
Start and End Cross Sections Specifies that the surface normal is normal to
both the start and end cross sections.
All Cross Sections Specifies that the surface normal is normal to all cross
sections.

Draft Angles
Controls the draft angle and magnitude of the first and last cross sections of
the lofted solid or surface. The draft angle is the beginning direction of the
surface. 0 is defined as outward from the plane of the curve. (LOFTNORMALS
(page 1358) system variable)

The following illustration shows the affect of using a different draft angle for
the first and last cross sections of a lofted solid. The first cross section is
assigned a draft angle of 45 degrees, while the last cross section is assigned a
draft angle of 135 degrees.

You can also use the draft angle handle to adjust the draft angle (triangular
grip) and magnitude (circular grip).

590 | Chapter 2 Commands

Start Angle
Specifies the draft angle for the start cross section. (LOFTANG1 (page 1356)
system variable)
Start Magnitude
Controls the relative distance of the surface from the start cross section in the
direction of the draft angle before the surface starts to bend toward the next
cross section. (LOFTMAG1 (page 1357) system variable)
End Angle
Specifies the draft angle for the end cross section. (LOFTANG2 (page 1357) system
variable)
End Magnitude
Controls the relative distance of the surface from the end cross section in the
direction of the draft angle before the surface starts to bend toward the previous
cross section. (LOFTMAG2 (page 1357) system variable)

Close Surface or Solid
Closes and opens a surface or solid. When using this option, the cross sections
should form a torus-shaped pattern so that the lofted surface or solid can form
a closed tube. (LOFTPARAM (page 1358) system variable)

Commands | 591

Periodic (Smooth Ends)
Creates a smooth, closed surface whose seam will not kink if it is reshaped.
This option is only available if the loft is ruled or smooth fit and the Close
Surface or solid option is selected.
See also:
Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting

LOGFILEOFF
Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON.

Summary
The program stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
See also:
View and Edit Within the Command History

LOGFILEON
Writes the contents of the command history to a file.

592 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
The contents of the text window are recorded in the log file until you exit the
program or use the LOGFILEOFF (page 592) command.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
See also:
View and Edit Within the Command History

LTSCALE
Sets the global linetype scale factor.

Access Methods
Command entry: 'ltscale for transparent use

Summary
Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a drawing.
Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to be regenerated.

See also:
Control Linetype Scale

LWEIGHT
Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.

Commands | 593

Access Methods
Menu: Format ➤ Lineweight
Shortcut menu: Right-click Show/Hide Lineweight on the status bar and
choose Settings.
Command entry: 'lweight for transparent use

Summary
The Lineweight Settings dialog box (page 594) is displayed.
If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
596).
See also:
Overview of Lineweights

Lineweight Settings Dialog Box
Sets the current lineweight, sets the lineweight units, controls the display and
display scale of lineweights, and sets the DEFAULT lineweight value for layers.

594 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
For a table of valid lineweights, see Overview of Lineweights in the User's
Guide.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Units
Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. You can
also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS (page 1365) system variable.
Millimeters (mm)
Specifies lineweight values in millimeters.
Inches (in.)
Specifies lineweight values in inches.

Default
Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. The initial DEFAULT lineweight
is 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. (LWDEFAULT system variable)

Lineweights
Displays the available lineweight values and shows which lineweight is current.
The current lineweight is shown highlighted in the list.
Lineweight values consist of standard settings including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK,
and DEFAULT. The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT (page 1365) system
variable, which has an initial value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. All new layers
use the default setting. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest
lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at one
pixel wide in model space.
NOTE Use the LWDISPLAY (page 1365) system variable or toggle the Show/Hide
Lineweights button on the status bar to display lineweights in the drawing area.
Regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more than
one pixel. This option does not affect how objects are plotted.

Preview Scaling
Controls the display scale of lineweights on the Model layout. On the Model
layout, lineweights are displayed in pixels. Lineweights are displayed using a
pixel width in proportion to the real-world unit value at which they plot. If
you are using a high-resolution monitor, you can adjust the lineweight display

Commands | 595

scale to better display different lineweight widths. The Lineweight list reflects
the current display scale.
Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one
pixel may increase regeneration time. If you want to optimize performance
when working in the Model layout, set the lineweight display scale to the
minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether.
See also:
Overview of Lineweights

-LWEIGHT
Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current lineweight: current
Enter default lineweight (page 596) for new objects or [?
(page 596)]: Enter a valid lineweight or enter ?
The current lineweight value is displayed; if the value is not BYLAYER,
BYBLOCK or DEFAULT, the value is displayed in millimeters or inches.
Default Lineweight Sets the current default lineweight. Lineweight values
consist of fixed settings, including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. Values
are calculated in either inches or millimeters; millimeters are the default. If
you enter a valid lineweight value, the current default lineweight is set to the
new value. If you enter any other value, the default is set to the nearest valid
value.
To plot an object with a lineweight that is not found in the list of fixed
lineweight values, you can use plot styles to control plotted lineweights. See
Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype in the User's Guide. The DEFAULT
value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable and has an initial value of
0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest
lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at a value
of one pixel in model space.
?—List Lineweights Displays a list of valid lineweight values in the current
lineweight units.

596 | Chapter 2 Commands

NOTE
If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14, or earlier, format, the
drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the
earlier format does not display lineweights.
See also:
Overview of Lineweights

M Commands
MASSPROP
Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids.

Access Methods
Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Region/Mass Properties

Summary
Refer to the Help system for a complete list of definitions for each of the region
or mass properties computed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method
If you select multiple regions, only those that are coplanar with the first
selected region are accepted.
MASSPROP displays the mass properties in the text window, and then asks if
you want to write the mass properties to a text file (.mpr).
The properties that MASSPROP displays depend on whether the selected objects
are regions, and whether the selected regions are coplanar with the XY plane
of the current user coordinate system (UCS), or 3D solids. For a list of the
parameters that control the MASSPROP units, see Calculations Based on the
Current UCS (page ?).

Commands | 597

Regions
The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for all regions.
Mass properties for all regions
Mass property Description
Area

The surface area of solids or the enclosed area of regions.

Perimeter

The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. The perimeter of a solid is not calculated.

Bounding box

The two coordinates that define the bounding box. For regions that
are coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system,
the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a
rectangle that encloses the region. For regions that are not coplanar
with the XY plane of the current UCS, the bounding box is defined
by the diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the region.

Centroid

A 2D or 3D coordinate that is the center of area for regions. For regions
that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate
is a 2D point. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of
the current UCS, this coordinate is a 3D point.

If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, the additional
properties shown in the following table are displayed.
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions
Mass property Description
Moments of inertia

598 | Chapter 2 Commands

A value used when computing the distributed loads, such as fluid
pressure on a plate, or when calculating the forces inside a bending
or twisting beam. The formula for determining area moments of inertia
is
2
area_moments_of_inertia = area_of_interest * radius
The area moments of inertia has units of distance to the fourth power.

Additional mass properties for coplanar regions
Mass property Description
Products of inertia

Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object.
It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is
product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ
This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.

Radii of gyration

Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a 3D solid. The
formula for the radii of gyration is
1/2
gyration_radii = (moments_of_ inertia/body_mass)
Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.

Principal moments and
X,Y,Z directions
about centroid

Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that
have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through
a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is
lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and that
also passes through the centroid. A third value included in the results
is somewhere between the high and low values.

3D Solids
The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for solids.
Mass properties for solids
Mass property Description
Mass

The measure of inertia of a body. Because a density of one is used,
mass and volume have the same value.

Volume

The amount of 3D space that a solid encloses.

Bounding box

The diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the solid.

Centroid

A 3D point that is the center of mass for solids. A solid of uniform
density is assumed.

Commands | 599

Mass properties for solids
Mass property Description
Moments of inertia

The mass moments of inertia, which is used when computing the force
required to rotate an object about a given axis, such as a wheel rotating
about an axle. The formula for mass moments of inertia is
2
mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis
Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the distance squared.

Products of inertia

Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object.
It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is
product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ
This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.

Radii of gyration

Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. The formula for the radii of gyration is
1/2
gyration_radii = (moments_of_inertia/body_mass)
Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.

Principal moments and
X,Y,Z directions
about centroid

Calculations that are derived from the products of inertia and that
have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through
a certain axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is
lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and that
also passes through the centroid. A third value included in the results
is somewhere between the high and low values.

Calculations Based on the Current UCS
The following table shows the parameters that control the units in which
mass properties are calculated.
Parameters that control MASSPROP units
Parameter

Used to calculate

DENSITY

Mass of solids

LENGTH

Volume of solids

600 | Chapter 2 Commands

Parameters that control MASSPROP units
Parameter

Used to calculate

LENGTH*LENGTH

Area of regions and surface area of solids

LENGTH*LENGTH*LENGTH

Bounding box, radii of gyration, centroid, and
perimeter

DENSITY*LENGTH*LENGTH

Moments of inertia, products of inertia, and
principal moments

See also:
Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

MATBROWSERCLOSE
Closes the Materials Browser.

Summary
This command closes the Materials Browser (page 602).
See also:
Browse Material Library

MATBROWSEROPEN
Opens the Materials Browser.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Materials tool group ➤ Material Browser

Commands | 601

Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser

Summary
The Materials Browser (page 602) is displayed.
See also:
Browse Material Library

Materials Browser
The Materials Browser allows you to navigate and manage your materials.

602 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
You can also manage your material libraries in the Materials Browser. It also
allows you search and sort materials in all open libraries and in the drawing.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Search Searches for material appearances in multiple libraries.
Document Materials Displays the materials saved with the open drawing.
Use the drop-down list on the left to filter which materials are displayed in
the list. The following filters and options are available:
■

Show All. Display all materials in the current drawing. (Default option)

■

Show Applied. Display only the materials being used in the current
drawing.

■

Show Selected. Display only the materials applied to the selected objects
in the current drawing.

■

Show Unused. Display only the materials that are not used in the current
drawing.

■

Purge All Unused. Removes all unused materials from current drawing.

The Sort drop-down controls the order in which document materials are
displayed. The following sort options are available:
■

By Name. Lists materials alphabetically by name. (Default option)

■

By Type. Lists materials according to the type of material that it was
created from.

■

By Material Color. Lists materials by their assigned color. The color
might not be the same that is displayed in the material swatch preview.

Show/Hide Library Tree Controls the visibility of the library tree.
Libraries Displays the selected library name.
The library tree displays the libraries and the categories of materials in each
available library. Select a library or category to display the associated materials
in the Materials list.
■

Autodesk Libray. A standard system library which contains the Autodesk
Materials provided by Autodesk for use by all applications.

■

My Materials. A special user library which stores the collection of
user-defined materials. It cannot be renamed.

Commands | 603

The Sort drop-down controls the order in which materials in the library are
displayed. The following sort options are available:
■

By Name. Lists materials in the selected library alphabetically by name.
(Default option)

■

By Type. Lists materials in the selected library according to the type of
material that it was created from.

■

By Category. Lists materials in the selected library according to the
category of material it was added to. (Default option)

■

By Material Color. Lists materials in the selected library by their assigned
color. The color might not be the same that is displayed in the material
swatch preview.

Materials List Displays the materials in the selected library or category.
The Sort drop-down controls the order in which materials are displayed. The
following sort options are available:
■

By Name. Lists materials alphabetically by name. (Default option)

■

By Category. Lists materials by their assigned category.

■

By Type. Lists materials by the type of material that it was created from.

■

By Material Color. Lists materials by their assigned color. The color
might not be the same that is displayed in the material swatch preview.

View Controls the details view display of the library content. The following
view options are available:
■ Grid View. All materials are represented by a thumbnail and the name
of the material below. (Default option)
■

List View. All materials are displayed in a grid with thumbnail, name,
type, and category in columns.

■

Text View. All materials are displayed in a grid with name, type, and
category in columns. No thumbnail is displayed.

Swatch Size Adjusts the size of the swatches.
See also:
Browse Material Library

604 | Chapter 2 Commands

MATCHCELL
Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: With a table and table cell selected, on the Table Cell visor, click
Match Cell.

Summary
All the properties of the source cell are copied to the destination cells except
for the cell type: text or block.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select source cell: Click inside a cell in a table whose properties you want
to copy
Select destination cell: Click inside table cells to copy properties from the
source cell, and right-click or press Enter or Esc to exit
See also:
Add Text and Blocks to Tables

MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Match Properties
Command entry: painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use)

Commands | 605

Summary
The types of properties that can be applied include color, layer, linetype,
linetype scale, lineweight, plot style, transparency, and other specified
properties.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings
Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one
or more objects to copy properties to
Destination Object(s) Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the
properties of the source object.
Settings Displays the Match Properties Settings dialog box (page 606), in which
you can control which object properties to copy to the destination objects.
By default, all object properties are selected for copying.
See also:
Copy Properties Between Objects

Match Properties Settings Dialog Box
Specifies the properties that are copied from the select source object to the
destination objects.

606 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Specifies which basic properties and special properties to copy from the source
object to the destination objects.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Basic Properties
Color
Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available for all objects.
Layer
Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available for all objects.
Linetype
Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and
viewports.
Linetype Scale

Commands | 607

Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source
object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text,
points, and viewports.
Lineweight
Changes the lineweight of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available for all objects.
Transparency
Changes the transparency of the of the destination object to that of the source
object. Available for all objects.
Thickness
Changes the thickness of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available only for arcs, attributes, circles, lines, points, 2D polylines, regions,
and text.
Plot Style
Changes the plot style of the destination object to that of the source object.
If you are working in color-dependent plot style mode ( PSTYLEPOLICY (page
1410) is set to 1), this option is unavailable. Available for all objects, except those
with the Jitter edge modifier applied.

Special Properties
Dimension
In addition to basic object properties, changes the dimension style and
annotative properties of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available only for dimension, leader, and tolerance objects.
Polyline
In addition to basic object properties, changes the width and linetype
generation properties of the destination polyline to those of the source
polyline. The fit/smooth property and the elevation of the source polyline are
not transferred to the destination polyline. If the source polyline has variable
width, the width property is not transferred to the destination polyline.
Material
In addition to basic object properties, changes the material applied to the
object. If the source object does not have a material assigned and the
destination object does, the material is removed from the destination object.
Text

608 | Chapter 2 Commands

In addition to basic object properties, changes the text style and annotative
properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only
for single-line and multiline text objects.
Viewport
In addition to basic object properties, changes the following properties of the
destination paper space viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off,
display locking, standard or custom scale, shade plot, snap, grid, and UCS
icon visibility and location.
The settings for clipping and for UCS per viewport and the freeze/thaw state
of the layers are not transferred to the destination object.
Shadow Display
In addition to basic object properties, changes the shadow display. The object
can cast shadows, receive shadows, or both, or it can ignore shadows.
Hatch
In addition to basic object properties, changes the hatch properties (including
its annotative properties) of the destination object to that of the source object.
To match the hatch origin, use Inherit Properties in HATCH or HATCHEDIT.
Available only for hatch objects.
Table
In addition to basic object properties, changes the table style of the destination
object to that of the source object. Available only for table objects.
Multileader
In addition to basic object properties, changes the multileader style and
annotative properties of the destination object to that of the source object.
Available only for multileader objects.
See also:
Copy Properties Between Objects

MATERIALASSIGN
Uses the current material defined in the CMATERIAL system variable.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.

Commands | 609

Select objects: Pick one or more objects
Select objects or [Undo]: Press Enter to exit the command
See also:
Browse Material Library

MATERIALS
Opens the Materials Browser.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Materials tool group ➤ Material Browser
Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser

Summary
The Materials Browser (page 602) is displayed.
The Materials Browser allows you navigate and manage your materials. You
can organize, sort, search, and select materials for use in your drawing.
See also:
Browse Material Library

MATERIALSCLOSE
Closes the Materials Browser.

Summary
Closes the Materials Browser (page 602).
See also:
Browse Material Library

610 | Chapter 2 Commands

MEASURE
Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or
perimeter of an object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤
Point flyout ➤ Measure
Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Measure

Summary
The resulting points or blocks are always located on the selected object and
their orientation is parallel to the XY plane of the UCS.
Use DDPTYPE to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing.

The points or blocks are placed in the Previous selection set, so you can select
them all by entering p at the next Select Objects prompt. You can use the
Node object snap to draw an object by snapping to the point objects. You can
then remove the points by entering erase previous.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select object to measure:
Specify length of segment (page 612) or [Block (page 612)]:
Specify a distance or enter b

Commands | 611

Length of Segment Places point objects at the specified interval along the
selected object, starting at the endpoint closest to the point you used to select
the object.
Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex (the first one
drawn).
Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current
snap rotation angle. If the snap rotation angle is 0, then the measurement of
the circle starts to the right of center, on its circumference.

The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0.5-unit distances along a
polyline, with the PDMODE (page 1388) system variable set to 35.

Block Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected object.
Align Block With Object
■ Yes. The block is rotated about its insertion point so that its horizontal
lines are aligned with, and drawn tangent to, the object being measured.
■

No. The block is always inserted with a 0 rotation angle.

After you specify the segment length, the block is inserted at the specified
interval. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included.
See also:
Specify Measured Intervals on Objects

612 | Chapter 2 Commands

MEASUREGEOM
Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or
sequence of points.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Utilities tool group ➤ Measure flyout ➤
Distance
Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Distance

Summary
The MEASUREGEOM command performs many of the same calculations as
the following commands:
■ AREA (page 83)
■

DIST (page 352)

■

MASSPROP (page 597)

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [Distance (page ?)/Radius (page ?)/Angle (page ?)/ARea
(page ?)/Volume (page ?)] : Specify Distance, Radius, Angle, Area,
or Volume
Information displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip in the current
units format.

Distance
Measures the distance between specified points. The following display at the
Command prompt and in the tooltip:
■

The current UCS X axis

■

Distance in X direction (Delta X)

■

Distance in Y direction (Delta Y)

Commands | 613

Multiple Points A running total of distance based on existing line segments
and the current rubber-band line is calculated. The total updates as you move
the cursor and displays in the tooltip.
If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines (page ?)
display.

Radius
Measures the radius and diameter of a specified arc or circle.

Angle
Measures the angle of a specified arc, circle, line, or vertex.
Arc Measures the angle of an arc.
Circle Measures a specified angle within a circle. The angle updates as you
move the cursor.
Line Measures the angle between two lines.
Vertex Measures the angle of a vertex.

Area
Measures the area and perimeter of an object or defined area.
NOTE
MEASUREGEOM cannot calculate the area of a self-intersecting object.
Specify Corner Points Calculates the area and perimeter defined by specified
points.
If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo, Options for Selecting Polylines (page ?)
display.
Add Area Turns on Add mode and keeps a running total of area as
you define areas. You can use the Add Area option to calculate the
■ Individual areas of defined areas and objects
■

Individual perimeters of defined areas and objects

■

Total area of all defined areas and objects

■

Total perimeter of all defined areas and objects

Subtract Area Subtracts a specified area from the total area. The total area and
perimeter displays at the Command prompt and in the tooltip.

Volume
Measures the volume of an object or a defined area.
Object Measures the volume of an object or defined area.

614 | Chapter 2 Commands

You can select a 3D solids or 2D objects. If you select a 2D object you must
specify a height for that object.
If you define an object by specifying points, you must specify at least three
points to define a polygon. All must lie on a plane parallel to the XY plane of
the UCS. If you do not close the polygon, an area will be calculated as if a line
existed between the first and last points entered.
If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines (page ?)
display.
Add Volume Turns on Add mode and keeps a running total of volume as you
define areas.
Subtract Volume Turns on Subtract mode and subtracts a specified volume
from the total volume.

Options for Selecting Polylines
You can select polylines when using the Distance, Area, and Volume options.
Arc Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Endpoint of Arc Draws an arc segment. The arc segment is tangent to the
previous segment of the polyline.
Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point.
Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering
a negative number creates clockwise arc segments.
■

Endpoint of Arc (page ?)

Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Center Specifies the center of the arc segment.
■ Endpoint of Arc (page ?)
■

Angle (page ?)

Length Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the previous segment
is an arc, the new arc segment is drawn tangent to the previous arc segment.
Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point,
creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this
option.
Direction Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment.
■ Endpoint of Arc (page ?)
Half width Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to
one of its edges.

Commands | 615

The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending
half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until
you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line
segments are at the center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
■ Endpoint of Arc (page ?)
■

Angle (page ?)

Second Pt Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc.
■ Endpoint of Arc (page ?)
Width Specifies the width of the next arc segment.
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width
becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the
width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the
center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or
when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the
previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is
drawn tangent to that arc segment.
Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline.
Close Draws an arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point,
creating a closed polyline. At least two points must be specified to use this
option.
See also:
Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations
Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information

616 | Chapter 2 Commands

MESH
Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid,
sphere, wedge, or torus.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Primitives ➤ Box

Summary
The basic mesh forms, known as mesh primitives, are the equivalent of the
primitive forms for 3D solids.
You can reshape mesh objects by smoothing, creasing, refining, and splitting
faces. You can also drag edges, faces, and vertices to mold the overall form.
NOTE By default, new mesh primitives are created with no smoothness. To change
the default smoothness, enter mesh at the Command prompt. Specify the Settings
option before you specify the type of mesh primitive you want to create.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select primitive [Box (page ?)/Cone (page ?)/CYlinder (page
?)/Pyramid (page ?)/Sphere (page ?)/Wedge (page ?)/Torus
(page ?)/SEttings (page ?)]

Box
Creates a 3D mesh box.

Specify the length of the sides.

Commands | 617

First corner / Corner Sets the first corner of the mesh box.
■ Other corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box.
■

Cube (page 618)

■

Length (page 618)

Center Sets the center of the mesh box.
■ Corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box.
■

Cube (page 618)

■

Length (page 618)

Cube Sets all edges of the box to be of equal length.
■ Length (page 618)
Length Sets the length of the mesh box along the X axis.
■ Width (page 618) (not available for cubes)
Width Sets the width of the mesh box along the Y axis.
■ Height (page 618)
■

2Point (height) (page 618)

Height Sets the height of the mesh box along the Z axis.
2Point (height) Sets the height based on the distance between two points:
■ First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance.
■

Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Cone
Creates a 3D mesh with a circular or elliptical base that tapers symmetrically
to a point or to a planar face.

618 | Chapter 2 Commands

Specify the diameter and height.
Center point of base Sets the center point of the base of the mesh cone.
■ Base radius (page 620)
■

Diameter (page 620)

3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh cone by
specifying three points:
■ First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh cone
base.
■

Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh
cone base.

■

Third point. Sets the size and planar rotation of the mesh cone base.
■ Height (page 620)
■

2Point (height) (page 620)

■

Axis endpoint (page 621)

■

Top radius (page 621)

2P (diameter) Defines the base diameter of the mesh cone based on two
points:
■ First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first location on the circumference
of the mesh cone base.
■

Second endpoint of diameter. Determines the general location and
size of the mesh cone base by setting the endpoint of the diameter.
■ Height (page 620)
■

2Point (height) (page 620)

■

Axis endpoint (page 621)

■

Top radius (page 621)

Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines the base of the mesh cone with a
specified radius that is tangent to two objects:
■ Point on object for first tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve
as the first tangent point.
■

Point on object for second tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve
as the second tangent point.

■

Radius of circle. Sets the radius of the mesh cone base.
■ Height (page 620)

Commands | 619

■

2Point (height) (page 620)

■

Axis endpoint (page 621)

■

Top radius (page 621)

If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent
points are used.
Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the mesh cone.
■ Endpoint of first axis. Sets the start point for the first axis of the mesh
cone base and then specifies the other axis endpoints:
■ Other endpoint of first axis. Sets the first axis endpoint.
■
■

Endpoint of second axis. Sets the second axis endpoint

Center. Specifies the method for creating an elliptical mesh cone base
that starts with the center point of the base:
■ Center point. Sets the center of the mesh cone base.
■

Distance to first axis. Sets the radius of the first axis.

■

Endpoint of second axis. Sets the endpoint of the second axis.

Base radius Sets the radius of the mesh cone base.
■ Height (page 620)
■

2Point (height) (page 620)

■

Axis endpoint (page 621)

■

Top radius (page 621)

Diameter Sets the diameter for the base of the cone.
■ Height (page 620)
■

2Point (height) (page 620)

■

Axis endpoint (page 621)

■

Top radius (page 621)

Height Sets the height of the mesh cone along an axis that is perpendicular
to the plane of the base.
2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh cone by specifying the distance
between two points:
■ First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance.

620 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top point of the cone or the center of
the top face of a cone frustum. The orientation of the axis endpoint can be
anywhere in 3D space.
Top radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum.
■ Height (page 620)
■

2Point (height) (page 620)

■

Axis endpoint (page 621)

Cylinder
Creates a 3D mesh cylinder.

Specify the size of the base and height.
Center point of base Sets the center point of the mesh cylinder base.
■ Base Radius (page 622)
■

Diameter (page 622)

3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh cylinder by
specifying three points:
■ First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh cylinder
base.
■

Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh
cylinder base.

■

Third point. Sets the size and planar rotation of the mesh cylinder base.
■ Height (page 623)
■

2Point (height) (page 622)

■

Axis endpoint (page 623)

Commands | 621

2P (diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh cylinder base by specifying two
points:
■ First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point on the diameter of the
mesh cylinder base.
■

Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the second point on the diameter
of the mesh cylinder base.
■ Height (page 623)
■

2Point (height) (page 622)

■

Axis endpoint (page 623)

2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh cylinder by specifying the
distance between two points:
■ First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance.
■

Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines the base of the mesh cylinder with a
specified radius that is tangent to two objects. If the specified criteria can
produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used.
■ Point on object for first tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve
as the first tangent point.
■

Point on object for second tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve
as the second tangent point.

■

Radius of circle. Sets the radius of the mesh cylinder base.
■ Height (page 623)
■

2Point (height) (page 622)

■

Axis endpoint (page 623)

Base Radius Sets the radius of the mesh cylinder base.
■ Height (page 623)
■

2Point (height) (page 622)

■

Axis endpoint (page 623)

Diameter Sets the diameter for the base of the cylinder.
■ Height (page 623)
■

2Point (height) (page 622)

■

Axis endpoint (page 623)

622 | Chapter 2 Commands

Height Sets the height of the mesh cylinder along an axis that is perpendicular
to the plane of the base.
Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top face of the cylinder. The orientation
of the axis endpoint can be anywhere in 3D space.
Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the mesh cylinder.
■ Endpoint of first axis. Sets the start point for the first axis of the mesh
cone base.
■ Other endpoint of first axis. Sets the first axis endpoint.
■
■

Endpoint of second axis. Sets the second axis endpoint.

Center. Specifies the method for creating an elliptical mesh cone base
that starts with the center point of the base.
■ Center point. Sets the center of the mesh cone base.
■

Distance to first axis. Sets the radius of the first axis.

■

Endpoint of second axis. Sets the endpoint of the second axis.

Pyramid
Creates a 3D mesh pyramid.

Specify the diameter and height.
Center point of base Sets the center point of the mesh pyramid base.
■ Base radius (page 624)
■

Inscribed (page 624)

Edge Sets the length of the one edge of the mesh pyramid base, as indicated
by two points that you specify:
■ First endpoint of edge. Sets the first location of the edge of the mesh
pyramid.

Commands | 623

■

Second endpoint of edge. Sets the second location of the edge of the
mesh pyramid.
■ Height (page 624)
■

2Point (height) (page 624)

■

Axis endpoint (page 624)

■

Top radius (page 624)

Sides Sets the number of sides for the mesh pyramid. Enter a positive value
from 3-32.
■ Center point of base (page 623)
■

Edge (page 623)

■

Sides. Resets the number of sides for the mesh pyramid.

Base radius Sets the radius of the mesh pyramid base.
■ Height (page 624)
■

2Point (height) (page 624)

■

Axis endpoint (page 624)

■

Top radius (page 624)

Inscribed Specifies that the base of the mesh pyramid is inscribed, or drawn
within, the base radius.
■ Base radius (page 624)
■

Circumscribed (page 625)

Height Sets the height of the mesh pyramid along an axis that is perpendicular
to the plane of the base.
2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh cylinder by specifying the
distance between two points:
■ First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance.
■

Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top point of the pyramid or the center
of the top face of a pyramid frustum. The orientation of the axis endpoint
can be anywhere in 3D space.
Top radius Specifies the top radius of the mesh pyramid, creating a pyramid
frustum.
■ Height (page 624)

624 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

2Point (height) (page 624)

■

Axis endpoint (page 624)

Circumscribed Specifies that the base of the pyramid is circumscribed, or is
drawn around, the base radius.
■ Base radius (page 624)
■

Inscribed (page 624)

Sphere
Creates a 3D mesh sphere.

Specify the size of the sphere (diameter or radius).
Center point Sets the center point of the sphere.
■ Radius. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified radius.
■

Diameter. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified diameter.

3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh sphere by
specifying three points:
■ First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh sphere.
■

Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh
sphere.

■

Third point. Sets the size and planar rotation of the mesh sphere.

2P (diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh sphere by specifying two points:
■ First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point on the diameter of the
mesh sphere.
■

Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the opposite point on the diameter
of the mesh sphere.

Commands | 625

Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines a mesh sphere with a specified radius
that is tangent to two objects:
■ Point on object for first tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve
as the first tangent point.
■

Point on object for second tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve
as the second tangent point.

■

Radius of circle. Sets the radius of the mesh sphere.

If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points
are used.

Wedge
Creates a 3D mesh wedge.

Specify the length and width of the base and the height.
First corner Sets the first corner of the mesh wedge base.
■ Other corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh wedge base, located
on the X,Y plane.
■ Height (page 627)
■

2Point (height) (page 627)

■

Cube (page 627)

■

Length (page 627)

Center Sets the center point of the mesh wedge base.
■ Corner. Sets one corner of the mesh wedge base.
■ Height (page 627)
■
■

2Point (height) (page 627)

Cube (page 627)

626 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

Length (page 627)

Cube Sets all edges of the mesh wedge base to be of equal length.
■ Length (page 627)
Length Sets the length of the mesh wedge base along the X axis.
■ Width (page 627) (not available for Cube)
Width Sets the width of the mesh box along the Y axis.
■ Height (page 627)
■

2Point (height) (page 627)

Height Sets the height of the mesh wedge. Enter a positive value to draw the
height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Enter a negative value to
draw the height along the negative Z axis.
2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh wedge by specifying the
distance between two points:
■ First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance.
■

Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Torus
Creates a 3D mesh primitive torus.

Specify two values: the size of the tube and the distance from the center of
the torus to the center of the tube.
Center point Sets the center point of the mesh torus.
■ Radius (torus) (page 628)
■

Diameter (torus) (page 629)

Commands | 627

3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and rotation of the mesh torus by
specifying three points. The path of the tube passes through the specified
points:
■ First point. Sets the first point on the path of the tube.
■

Second point. Sets the second point on the path of the tube.

■

Third point. Sets the third point on the path of the tube.
■ Tube radius (page 629)
■

2Point (tube radius) (page 629)

■

Diameter (tube) (page 629)

2P (torus diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh torus by specifying two
points. The diameter is calculated from the center point of the torus to the
center point of the tube.
■ First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point used to specify the torus
diameter distance.
■

Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the second point used to specify
the torus diameter distance.
■ Tube radius (page 629)
■

2Point (tube radius) (page 629)

■

Diameter (tube) (page 629)

Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines a mesh torus radius that is tangent to
two objects. The specified tangent points are projected into the current UCS:
■ Point on object for first tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve
as the first tangent point.
■

Point on object for second tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve
as the second tangent point.

■

Radius of circle. Sets the radius of the mesh torus.

If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points
are used.
Radius (torus) Sets the radius of the mesh torus, measured from the center
point of the torus to the center point of the tube.
■ Tube radius (page 629)
■

2Point (tube radius) (page 629)

■

Diameter (tube) (page 629)

628 | Chapter 2 Commands

Diameter (torus) Sets the diameter of the mesh torus, measured from the
center point of the torus to the center point of the tube.
■ Tube radius (page 629)
■

2Point (tube radius) (page 629)

■

Diameter (tube) (page 629)

Tube radius Sets the radius of the profile that is swept around the mesh torus
path.
2Point (tube radius) Sets the radius of the profile of the tube based on the
distance between two points that you specify:
■ First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance.
■

Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance.

Tube diameter Sets the diameter of the profile of the mesh torus tube.

Settings
Modifies the smoothness and tessellation values for the new mesh object.
Level of smoothness Sets the initial degree of smoothness, or roundness, to
be applied to the mesh. Enter 0 to eliminate smoothness. Enter a positive
integer up to 4 for increased degrees of smoothness. The value is retained for
the current drawing session.
This smoothness value is limited by the value of SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV
(page 1439).
Tessellation Enter a tessellation values (the number of faces) for each
dimension of a mesh primitive option.
See also:
Create 3D Mesh Primitives

MESHCAP
Creates a mesh face that connects open edges.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Close Hole

Commands | 629

Summary
You can close gaps in mesh objects by selecting the edges of the surrounding
mesh faces. For best results, the faces should be on the same plane.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select connecting mesh edges to create a new mesh face Specifies which
mesh edges form the boundary for the closure. Click the edges to select them.
Select edges or [CHain]
Edges Selects individual edges and adds them to the selection set.
Chain Selects contiguous edges of mesh objects connected end-to-end.
See also:
Create and Close Mesh Gaps

MESHCOLLAPSE
Merges the vertices of selected mesh faces or edges.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Collapse Face or Edge

630 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
You can cause the vertices of surrounding mesh faces to converge at the center
of a selected edge or face. The shapes of surrounding faces change to
accommodate the loss of one or more vertices.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select mesh face or edge to collapse Specifies a mesh edge or a face whose
midpoint becomes the point of convergence for the surrounding faces. Click
a single mesh edge or face.
See also:
Modify Mesh Faces

MESHCREASE
Sharpens the edges of selected mesh subobjects.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Crease

Summary
You can sharpen, or crease, the edges of mesh objects. Creasing deforms mesh
faces and edges that are adjacent to the selected subobject. Creases added to
mesh that has no smoothness are not apparent until the mesh is smoothed.

Commands | 631

You can also apply creases to mesh subobjects by changing the crease type
and crease level in the Properties Inspector palette (page 832).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select mesh subobjects to crease Specifies the mesh subobjects to crease.
Click mesh faces, edges, and vertices to crease their associated edges. Press
Shift+click to remove a subobject from the selection set.
■ Crease value (page 632)
■

Always (page 632)

Crease value Sets highest smoothing level at which the crease is retained. If
the smoothing level exceeds this value, the crease is also smoothed.
Enter a value of 0 to remove an existing crease.
Always Specifies that the crease is always retained, even if the object or
subobject is smoothed or refined. A crease value of -1 is the same as Always.
See also:
Add Creases to Mesh

MESHEXTRUDE
Extends a mesh face into 3D space.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Extrude Face

632 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
When you extrude, or extend, a mesh face, you can specify several options to
determine the shape of the extrusion. You can also determine whether
extruding multiple mesh faces results in joined or separate extrusions.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Mesh face(s) to extrude Specifies the mesh faces to extrude. Click one or
more faces to select them.
■ Height of extrusion (page 634)
■

Direction (page 634)

■

Path (page 634)

■

Taper angle (page 634)

Setting (Available only when you start the command before selecting faces)
Sets the style for extruding multiple adjacent mesh faces.
■ Join adjacent mesh faces when extruding Specifies whether adjacent
mesh faces are extruded singly or as a unit. (The difference between the
two options is not always apparent on a mesh that has not been smoothed.)
■ Yes. Extrudes all adjacent faces as a unit.

■

No. Extrudes each adjacent face separately.

Commands | 633

Height of extrusion Extrudes mesh faces along the Z axis. Enter a positive
value to extrude the face along the positive Z axis. Enter a negative value to
extrude along the negative Z axis. Multiple mesh faces do not need to be
parallel to the same plane.
Direction Specifies the length and direction of the extrusion. (The direction
cannot be parallel to the plane of the sweep curve created by the extrusion.)
■ Start point of direction. Specifies the first point in the direction vector.
■

End point of direction. Specifies the second point in the direction
vector.

Path Specifies an object, such as a line or spline, that determines the path and
length of the extrusion. The outline of the mesh face is swept along the path.
The new orientation of the swept mesh face is perpendicular to the endpoint
of the path.

The path should not lie on the same plane as the mesh face or have areas of
high curvature. For extrusions that adhere closely to the curved path, use a
spline, not an arced polyline, as the path.
Taper angle Sets an angle of taper for an extrusion.

634 | Chapter 2 Commands

Positive angles taper inward from the base mesh face. Negative angles taper
outward. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to the plane of
the mesh.
If the adjacent faces are not set to be joined, the faces that are selected for
extrusion are tapered to the same value. However, for joined extrusions, the
taper is applied only to the portion of the extrusion that is not adjacent to
another extruded face.
Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object
or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion
height.
■

Angle of taper. Sets an angle between -90 and +90 degrees.

■

Specify two points. Sets the taper angle to be the distance between two
specified points.

See also:
Modify Mesh Faces

MESHMERGE
Merges adjacent faces into a single face.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Merge Face

Summary
You can merge two or more adjacent mesh faces to form a single face.

Commands | 635

The merge operation is performed only on mesh faces that are adjacent. Other
types of subobjects are removed from the selection set.
Merging mesh faces that wrap a corner can have unintended results when you
try to edit the mesh or convert it to other types of solid objects. For example,
the mesh might no longer be watertight. For best results, restrict mesh merging
to faces that are on the same plane.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select adjacent faces to merge Specifies the mesh faces to combine. Click
each face to select it.
See also:
Modify Mesh Faces

MESHREFINE
Multiplies the number of faces in selected mesh objects or faces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Refine Mesh

Summary
Refining a mesh object increases the number of editable faces, providing
additional control over fine modeling details. To preserve program memory,
you can refine specific faces instead of the entire object.

636 | Chapter 2 Commands

Refining an object resets the smoothing level that was assigned to the object
to 0 (zero). This level of smoothness becomes the new baseline for the object.
That is, the smoothness level can no longer be decreased beyond that level.
Refining a subobject does not reset the smoothing level.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Mesh object or face subobjects to refine Specifies 3D mesh objects or mesh
faces to be refined. Press Ctrl+click to isolate a specific face.
See also:
Refine Mesh Objects or Subobjects

MESHSMOOTH
Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh
objects.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Smooth Mesh

Summary
Take advantage of the detailed modeling capabilities of 3D mesh by converting
objects such as 3D solids and surfaces to mesh.

Use this method to convert 3D faces (3DFACE) and legacy polygonal and
polyface meshes (from AutoCAD 2009 and earlier). You can also convert 2D
objects such as regions and closed polylines.

Commands | 637

The level of smoothness upon conversion depends on the mesh type setting
(FACETERMESHTYPE (page 1291) system variable). If the mesh type is not set
to be optimized, the converted object is not smoothed.
To convert mesh objects to 3D surfaces or solids, use CONVTOSOLID (page
223) or CONVTOSURFACE (page 225) commands.
Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh
Object type
3D solids
3D surfaces
3D faces
Polyface and polygon meshes (legacy)
Regions
Closed polylines

See also:
Create Meshes by Conversion

MESHSMOOTHLESS
Decreases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Smooth Less

Summary
Decrease the smoothness of selected mesh objects by one level. You can only
decrease the smoothness of objects whose level of smoothness is 1 or higher.
You cannot decrease the smoothness level of objects that have been refined.

638 | Chapter 2 Commands

You can decrease the smoothness of multiple objects. If the selected objects
have different levels of smoothness, their respective levels are decreased by
one. If the selection set contains ineligible objects, those objects can be filtered
out.
See also:
Change Mesh Smoothness Levels

MESHSMOOTHMORE
Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Smooth More

Summary
Smoothing increases the number of facets in the mesh, resulting in a rounder
object.

Commands | 639

Facets are the underlying components of each mesh face. You can increase
the smoothness level up to the value of SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV (page 1439)
as long as the number of faces does not exceed the value in the
SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE (page 1438) system variable. If you select multiple
objects with differing levels of smoothness, their respective levels are increased
by one.
You can only smooth mesh objects. However, you have the option of
converting some types of objects to mesh during the smoothing operation.
You can also filter out ineligible objects that you do not want to convert. For
a list of objects that can be converted, see MESHSMOOTH (page 637).
See also:
Change Mesh Smoothness Levels

MESHSPIN
Spins the adjoining edge of two triangular mesh faces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Spin Triangle Face

Summary
You can rotate the edge that joins two triangular mesh faces to modify the
shapes of the faces. The edge shared by the selected faces spins to intersect
the apex of each face.

640 | Chapter 2 Commands

NOTE You can use MESHSPLIT (page 641) to divide a rectangular face into two
triangular faces. If you plan to spin the edge between the triangular faces, use the
Vertex option to ensure that the split extends precisely from one vertex to the
other.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
First triangular mesh face to spin Specifies one of two faces to be modified.
Click a triangular mesh face.
Second adjacent triangular mesh face to spin Specifies the second of two
faces to be modified. Click a triangular mesh face that is next to the first
selected face.
See also:
Modify Mesh Faces

MESHSPLIT
Splits a mesh face into two faces.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Split Face

Summary
Split a face to add more definition to an area without having to refine it.
Because you specify the start and endpoint of the split, this method provides
greater control over the location of the split.

Commands | 641

For more precision in the placement of the split, you can specify that the split
starts or ends at a vertex. The Vertex option is useful for creating two triangular
faces from a rectangular face. It provides the precision you need if you later
want to spin the new edge using MESHSPIN (page 640).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed:
Face to split In the drawing area, specifies which mesh face to split.
■ First split point on face edge. Sets the location on an edge of the mesh
face to start the split.
■ Second split point on face edge. Sets a second location on an edge
of the mesh face to define the path of the split.
■

Vertex

Vertex Limits the first endpoint of the split to a mesh vertex.
■ First vertex for the split. Specifies a vertex on a mesh face.
■ Second split point on face edge. Sets the second location on an
edge of the mesh face to define the path of the split.
■

Vertex. Limits the second endpoint so that it can only intersect with
a vertex.
■ Second vertex for the split. Specifies a second vertex on the
same mesh face.

See also:
Modify Mesh Faces

642 | Chapter 2 Commands

MESHUNCREASE
Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Uncrease

Summary
Restore smoothness to an edge that has been creased.

You can also remove a selected crease in the Crease area of Properties Inspector
(page 832) by changing the Type value to None when a face on a mesh is
selected.

List of Prompts
The following prompt is displayed:
Select crease to remove Specifies which creased edges to smooth. You do not
need to press Ctrl to select a creased subobject.
See also:
Add Creases to Mesh

MINSERT
Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array.

Commands | 643

Summary
Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before
you specify its position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale
factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0. If you enter one of the options, respond
to the prompts by specifying a distance for the scale options or an angle for
rotation.
Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded.
You cannot use MINSERT with annotative blocks.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name, enter ? to list the currently defined
blocks in the drawing, or enter ~ to display the Select Drawing File dialog box
NOTE You cannot precede the name of a block with an asterisk to explode the
block's objects during insertion, as you can with INSERT (page 519).
Specify insertion point (page ?) or [Basepoint (page
?)/Scale (page ?)/X (page ?)/Y (page ?)/Z (page ?)/Rotate
(page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option

Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the blocks.
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a
value, enter an option, or press Enter
X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors.
Specify Rotation Angle The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual
block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array.
Number of Rows/Columns Specifies the number of rows and columns in the
array.
Distance Between Rows Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. You
can use the pointing device to specify the distance between rows, or specify
two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance
between rows and between columns.
Distance Between Columns Specifies the distance (in units) between columns.

644 | Chapter 2 Commands

Corner Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point and the opposite
corner.
■ Specify Rotation Angle (page 644)
■

Number of Rows/Columns (page 644)

■

Distance Between Rows (page 644)

■

Distance Between Columns (page 644)

XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.
■ X Scale Factor (page 644)
■

Corner (page 645)

■

Specify Rotation Angle (page 644)

■

Number of Rows/Columns (page 644)

■

Distance Between Rows (page 644)

■

Distance Between Columns (page 644)

Basepoint
Temporarily drops the block in the drawing where it is currently positioned
and allows you to specify a new base point for the block reference as it is
dragged into position. This does not affect the actual base point defined for
the block reference.

Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the
absolute value of the specified scale factor.
■

XYZ (page 645)

■

Specify Rotation Angle (page 644)

■

Number of Rows/Columns (page 644)

■

Distance Between Rows (page 644)

■

Distance Between Columns (page 644)

X
Sets the X scale factor.
■

Specify Rotation Angle (page 644)

■

Number of Rows/Columns (page 644)

■

Distance Between Rows (page 644)

■

Distance Between Columns (page 644)

Commands | 645

Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
■

Specify Rotation Angle (page 644)

■

Number of Rows/Columns (page 644)

■

Distance Between Rows (page 644)

■

Distance Between Columns (page 644)

Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
■

Specify Rotation Angle (page 644)

■

Number of Rows/Columns (page 644)

■

Distance Between Rows (page 644)

■

Distance Between Columns (page 644)

Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array.
■

Specify Rotation Angle (page 644)

■

X Scale Factor (page 644)

■

Number of Rows/Columns (page 644)

■

Distance Between Rows (page 644)

■

Distance Between Columns (page 644)

■

Corner (page 645)

■

XYZ (page 645)

Preview Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block
as it is dragged into position.
■

X Scale Factor (page 644)

■

Corner (page 645)

■

XYZ (page 645)

Preview X
Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
■

X Scale Factor (page 644)

646 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

Corner (page 645)

■

XYZ (page 645)

Preview Y
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
■

X Scale Factor (page 644)

■

Corner (page 645)

■

XYZ (page 645)

Preview Z
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
■

X Scale Factor (page 644)

■

Corner (page 645)

■

XYZ (page 645)

Preview Rotate
Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
■

X Scale Factor (page 644)

■

Corner (page 645)

■

XYZ (page 645)

See also:
Insert Blocks

MIRROR
Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Mirror

Commands | 647

Menu: Modify ➤ Mirror

Summary
You can create objects that represent half of a drawing, select them, and mirror
them across a specified line to create the other half.

NOTE By default, when you mirror a text object, the direction of the text is not
changed. Set the MIRRTEXT (page 1370) system variable to 1 if you do want the
text to be reversed.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter to finish
Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point
Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point

The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the
selected objects are mirrored. For mirroring in 3D, this line defines a mirroring

648 | Chapter 2 Commands

plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS)
containing the mirror line.
Erase source objects? [Yes/No] : Enteryorn, or press Enter
Yes Places the mirrored image into the drawing and erases the original objects.
No Places the mirrored image into the drawing and retains the original objects.

See also:
Mirror Objects

MIRROR3D
Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects across a mirroring plane.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ 3D Mirror
Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Mirror

Summary
It is recommended that you use the gizmos available through the 3DMOVE
(page 36), 3DROTATE (page 48), and 3DSCALE (page 50) commands to
manipulate 3D objects. For more information about using gizmos, see Use
Gizmos to Modify Objects.
For example:

Commands | 649

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter to finish
Specify first point of mirror plane (3 points) or [Object
(page 650)/Last (page 650)/Zaxis (page 650)/View (page
651)/XY/YZ/ZX (page 651)/3points (page 651)] <3points>: Enter an
option, specify a point, or press Enter

Object Uses the plane of a selected planar object as the mirroring plane.

Delete Source Objects If you enter y, the reflected object is placed into the
drawing and the original objects are deleted. If you enter n or press Enter, the
reflected object is placed into the drawing and the original objects are retained.
Last Mirrors the selected objects about the last defined mirroring plane.
Z Axis Defines the mirroring plane by a point on the plane and a point normal
to the plane.

650 | Chapter 2 Commands

View Aligns the mirroring plane with the viewing plane of the current viewport
through a point.
XY/YZ/ZX Aligns the mirroring plane with one of the standard planes (XY,
YZ, or ZX) through a specified point.

3 Points Defines the mirroring plane by three points. If you select this option
by specifying a point, the First Point on Mirror Plane prompt is not displayed.

See also:
Mirror Objects

MLEADER
Creates a multileader object.

Commands | 651

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Leaders tool group ➤ Multileader
Menu: Dimension ➤ Multileader

Summary
A multileader object typically consists of an arrowhead, a horizontal landing,
a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or a block.
Multileaders can be created arrowhead first (page ?), leader landing first (page
?), or content first (page ?). If a multileader style has been used, then the
multileader can be created from that specified style.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify leader arrowhead location (page ?) or [leader Landing
first (page ?)/Content first (page ?)/Options (page ?)]
:

Leader Arrowhead First
Specifies a location for the arrowhead of the multileader object.
Specify Leader Landing Location Sets placement of the leader landing for
the new multileader object.
If you exit the command at this point, then no text is associated with the
multileader object.

652 | Chapter 2 Commands

Leader Landing First
Specifies a location for the landing line of the multileader object.
Specify Leader Arrowhead Location Sets placement of the arrowhead for
the new multileader object.
If you exit the command at this point, then no text is associated with the
multileader line.

Content First
Specifies a location for the text or block associated with the multileader object.
Point Selection Sets placement for the text box for the text label associated
with the multileader object. When you finish entering your text, click OK or
click outside the text box.
If you choose End at this point, then no landing line is associated with the
multileader object.

Options
Specifies options for placing the multileader object.
Leader Type Specifies a straight, spline, or no leader line.
■ Straight.
■

Spline.

■

None.

Leader Landing Changes the distance of the horizontal landing line
■ Yes.
■

No.

If you choose No at this point, then no landing line is associated with the
multileader object.
Content Type Specifies the type of content that will be used for the
multileader.
■ Block (page 653)
■

Mtext (page 654)

■

None (page 654)

Block Specifies a block within your drawing to associate with the new
multileader.
■ Enter block name.

Commands | 653

Mtext Specifies that multiline text is included with the multileader.
■ Enter the multiline text.
None Specifies no content type.
Maxpoints Specifies a maximum number of points for the new leader line.
■ Enter the maximum points for leader line.
■

None.

First Angle Constrains the angle of the first point in the new leader line.
■ Enter first angle constraint.
■

None.

Second Angle Constrains the second angle in the new leader line.
■ Enter second angle constraint.
■

None.

See also:
Create and Modify Leaders

MLEADERALIGN
Aligns and spaces selected multileader objects.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Leaders tool group ➤ Align Leaders
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Align

Summary
After multileaders have been selected, specify the multileader to which all
others are aligned.

654 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select multileader to align to or [Options (page ?)]:

Options
Specifies options for aligning and spacing the selected multileaders.
Distribute Spaces content evenly between two selected points.
Make Leader Segments Parallel Places content so that each of the last leader
segments in the selected multileaders are parallel.
Specify Spacing Specifies spacing between the extents of the content of
selected multileaders.
Use Current Spacing Uses the current spacing between multileader content.
See also:
Create and Modify Leaders

MLEADERCOLLECT
Organizes selected multileaders that contain blocks into rows or columns, and
displays the result with a single leader.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Leaders tool group ➤ Collect Leaders

Commands | 655

Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Collect

Summary
After you select multileaders, you can specify their placement.
For example:

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify collected multileader location (page 656) or [Vertical
(page 656)/Horizontal (page 656)/Wrap (page 656)]
Specify Collected Multileader Location Specifies the point for placing the
multileader collection in the upper-left corner of the collection.
Vertical Places the multileader collection in one or more columns.
Horizontal Places the multileader collection in one or more rows.
Wrap Specifies a width for a wrapped multileader collection.
■ Specify wrap width.
■

Number. Specifies a maximum number of blocks per row in the
multileader collection.

See also:
Create and Modify Leaders

MLEADEREDIT
Adds leader lines to, or removes leader lines from, a multileader object.

656 | Chapter 2 Commands

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Leaders tool group ➤ Add Leader,
Remove Leader
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Add Leader
Pointing device: Hover over Landing grip and choose Add Leader; hover
over leader endpoint grip and choose Remove Leader

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify leader arrowhead location (page 657) or [Remove Leaders
(page 657)]
Add Leader
Adds a leader line to a selected multileader object. The new leader line is added
to the left or right of the selected multileader, depending on the location of
the cursor.

Remove Leaders Removes a leader line from a selected multileader object.
For example:

Commands | 657

See also:
Create and Modify Leaders

MLEADERSTYLE
Creates and modifies multileader styles.

Access Methods
Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style

Summary
The Multileader Style Manager (page 658) is displayed.
See also:
Work with Leader Styles

Multileader Style Manager
Creates and modifies styles that you can use to create multileader objects

658 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Sets the current multileader style and creates, modifies, and deletes multileader
styles.
The appearance of multileaders is controlled by multileader styles. These styles
specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines, arrowheads, and content.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Current Multileader Style
Displays the name of the multileader style that is applied to multileaders you
create. The default multileader style is Standard.

Styles
Displays a list of multileader styles. The current style is highlighted.

Commands | 659

List
Controls the contents of the Styles list. Click All Styles to display all multileader
styles available in the drawing. Click Styles In Use to display only the
multileader styles that are referenced by multileaders in the current drawing.

Preview Of
Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list.

New (+)
Displays the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can define
new multileader styles.

Delete (-)
Deletes the multileader style selected in the Styles list. A style that is being
used in the drawing cannot be deleted.

Options
Manages the multileader styles in the list.
Set Current Sets the multileader style selected in the Styles list as the current
style. All new multileaders are created using this multileader style.
Modify Displays the Modify Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can
modify multileader styles.
Rename Edits the name of the style selected in the list.
See also:
Work with Leader Styles

Modify Multileader Style Dialog Box
Modifies an existing multileader style.

660 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
Controls the general appearance of the multileader.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Preview
Displays a preview image of the style being modified.

List of Tabs
The following tabs are displayed.
■ Leader Format Tab (page 662)
■

Leader Structure Tab (page 663)

■

Content Tab (page 664)

See also:
Work with Leader Styles

Commands | 661

Leader Format Tab
Controls the formatting of the leader lines and arrowheads for the multileader.

General
Controls the general settings of the arrowheads.
Type
Determines the type of leader line. You can choose a straight leader, a spline,
or no leader line.
Color
Determines the color of the leader line.
Linetype
Determines the linetype of the leader line.
Lineweight
Determines the lineweight of the leader line.

Arrowhead
Controls the appearance of the multileader arrowheads.
Symbol
Sets the arrowhead symbol for the multileader.
Size
Displays and sets the size of arrowheads.

Leader Break
Controls the settings used when adding a dimension break to a multileader.
Break Size
Displays and sets the break size used for the DIMBREAK command when the
multileader is selected.
See also:
Work with Leader Styles

662 | Chapter 2 Commands

Leader Structure Tab
Controls the number of leader points, landing size, and scale for the
multilieader.

Constrain
Controls the constraints of the multileader.
Maximum Leader Points
Specifies a maximum number of points for the leader line.
First Segment Angle
Specifies the angle of the first point in the leader line.
Second Segment Angle
Specifies the angle of the second point in the multileader landing line.

Landing
Controls the landing settings of the multileader.
Automatically Include
Attaches a horizontal landing line to the multileader content.
Set Distance
Determines the fixed distance for the multileader landing line.

Scale
Controls the scaling of the multileader.
Annotative
Specifies that the multileader is annotative.
Scale to Layout
Determines a scaling factor for the multileader based on the scaling in the
model space and paper space viewports.
Specify Scale
Specifies the scale for the multileader.
See also:
Work with Leader Styles

Commands | 663

Content Tab
Controls the type of content attached to the multileader.
Multileader Type
Determines whether the multileader contains text or a block.

MText: Text Options
Controls the appearance of the text for the multileader.
Default Text
Sets default text for the multileader content. The [...] button launches the
MTEXT In Place Editor.
Text Style
Lists the available text styles.
Text Style Button
Displays the Text Style dialog box (page 1006) where you can create or modify
text styles.
Text Angle
Specifies the rotation angle of the multileader text.
Text Color
Specifies the color of the multileader text.
Text Height
Specifies the height of the multileader text.
Left Justify
Specifies that the multileader text is always left justified.
Frame Text
Frames the multileader text content with a text box.
Control the separation between the text and frame by modifying the Landing
Gap setting.

Mtext: Leader Connection
Controls the leader connection settings of the multileader.

Attachment
Specifies how the multiline text should be attached to the multileader.

664 | Chapter 2 Commands

Horizontal
Inserts the leader to the left or right of the text content. A horizontal
attachment includes a landing line between the text and the leader.
Left Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when
the text is to the right of the leader.
Right Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text
when the text is to the left of the leader.
Landing Gap Specifies the distance between the landing line and the
multileader text.
Extend Leader to Text Extends the landing line to end at the edge of the text
line where the leader is attached, not at the edge of the multiline text box.
The length of the multiline text box is determined by the length of the longest
line of text, not the length of the bounding box.

Vertical
Inserts the leader at the top or bottom of the text content. A vertical
attachment does not include a landing line between the text and the leader.
Top Attaches the leader to the top center of the text content. Click the
drop-down to insert an overline between the leader attachment and the text
content.
Bottom Attaches the leader to the bottom of the text content. Click the
drop-down to insert an underline between the leader attachment and the text
content.
Landing Gap Specifies the distance between the landing line and the
multileader text.

Block: Block Options
Controls the properties of block content in a multileader object.
Source block
Specifies the block used for multileader content.
Attachment
Specifies the way the block is attached to the multileader object. You can
attach the block by specifying the insertion point of the block or the center
point of the block.
Color

Commands | 665

Specifies the color of the multileader block content. The Block color control
in the MLEADERSTYLE Content tab only takes effect if the object color
included in the block is set to ByBlock.
Scale
Specifies the scale of the block upon insertion. For example, if the block is a
1 inch square and the scale specified is 0.5000, then the block is inserted as a
1/2 inch square.
See also:
Work with Leader Styles

Create New Multileader Style Dialog Box
Specifies a name for the new multileader style and specifies the existing
multileader style on which the new multileader style will be based.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
New Style Name
Names the new multileader style.
Start With
Specifies an existing multileader style whose settings are the default for the
new multileader style.
Annotative
Specifies that the multileader object is annotative.
Continue
Displays the Multileader Style Manager (page 658), in which you define the
new multileader style.
See also:
Work with Leader Styles

666 | Chapter 2 Commands

MLEDIT (-MLEDIT)
Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices.

Access Methods
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multiline

Summary
If you enter -mledit at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page
667).
See also:
Modify Multilines

-MLEDIT
Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
CC Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines.
OC Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines. Breaks are
inserted in all elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements
of the second multiline.
MC Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines. The order in
which you select the multilines is not important.
CT Creates a closed-tee intersection between two multilines. The first multiline
is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline.
OT Creates an open-tee intersection between two multilines. The first multiline
is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the second multiline.
MT Creates a merged-tee intersection between two multilines.The multiline
is trimmed or extended to its intersection with the other multiline.

Commands | 667

CJ Creates a corner joint between multilines. The multilines are trimmed or
extended to their intersection.
AV Adds a vertex to a multiline.
DV Deletes a vertex from a multiline.
CS Creates a visual break in a selected element of a multiline.
CA Creates a visual break through the entire multiline.
WA Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut.
See also:
Modify Multilines

MLINE
Creates multiple parallel lines.

Access Methods
Menu: Draw ➤ Multiline

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify start point (page ?) or [Justification (page
?)/Scale (page ?)/STyle (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option

Start Point
Specifies the next vertex of the multiline.
If you create a multiline with two or more segments, the prompt includes the
Close option.

Next Point Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using the current
multiline style and continues to prompt for points.

668 | Chapter 2 Commands

Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline.
Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments.

Justification
Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify.
■

Top (page 669)

■

Zero (page 669)

■

Bottom (page 669)

Top Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line with the most
positive offset is at the specified points.

Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor, so that the
element with an offset of 0.0 is at the specified points.

Bottom Draws the multiline above the cursor, so that the line with the most
negative offset is at the specified points.

Commands | 669

Scale
Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect linetype
scale.
The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style
definition. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style
definition. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset line—the smallest
on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative scale value
also alters the scale by the absolute value. A scale factor of 0 collapses the
multiline into a single line.

Style
Specifies a style to use for the multiline.
■

Style Name (page 670)

■

? (page 670)

Style Name Specifies the name of a style that has already been loaded or that's
defined in a multiline library (MLN) file you've created.
?—List Styles Lists the loaded multiline styles.
See also:
Draw Multiline Objects

MODEL
Switches from a named (paper space) layout to the Model layout.

Access Methods
When a viewing a layout, enter model at the command prompt or click the
Model tab below the drawing window.
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Quick View ➤ Model
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Layout drop down ➤ Model

670 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
On the Model layout, you can create drawings in model space. The Model
layout automatically sets the TILEMODE (page 1464) system variable to 1, and
you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing.
Once you have completed your drawing, you can choose a named (paper
space) layout to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot.
For possible performance gains when you switch between layouts or between
the Model and named layouts, use the LAYOUTREGENCTL (page 1350) system
variable to control how the display list is updated.
See also:
Work with Model Space and Paper Space

MOVE
Moves objects a specified distance in a specified direction.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Move/Rotate/Scale tool group ➤ Move
Menu: Modify ➤ Move
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move. Right-click in the drawing area
and click Move.

Summary
Use coordinates, grid snaps, object snaps, and other tools to move objects
with precision.

Commands | 671

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select objects:
Specify base point or [Displacement]:
Specify second point or :
The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far the selected
objects are to be moved and in what direction.
If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is
interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3
for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the objects move 2
units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from their current
position.
Displacement Enter coordinates to represent a vector
The coordinate values that you enter specify a relative distance and direction.
See also:
Move Objects

MREDO
Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter number of actions (page 673) or [All (page 673)/Last
(page 673)]:

672 | Chapter 2 Commands

Number of Actions Reverses the specified number of actions.
All Reverses all previous actions.
Last Reverses only the last action.
See also:
Correct Mistakes

MSPACE
In a layout, switches from paper space to model space in a layout viewport.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Double-click over a viewport on a named layout.
Double-click outside of a viewport on a named layout to return to paper space.

Summary
Commands operate in either model space or paper space. You use model space
(the Model layout) to do drafting and design work and to create
two-dimensional drawings or three-dimensional models. You use paper space
(a named layout) to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting.
When you are in a layout, you can enter mspace at the Command prompt
to make the last viewport in the layout current, and then work in model space
in that viewport within the layout.
See also:
Work with Model Space and Paper Space

MTEDIT
Edits multiline text.

Access Methods
Pointing device: Double-click a multiline text object.

Commands | 673

Summary
Displays either the Text Editor visor and the In-Place Text Editor to modify
the formatting or content of the selected multiline text object.
The In-Place Text Editor (page 675) is displayed.
See also:
Change Multiline Text

MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Text tool group ➤ Multiline flyout ➤
Multiline Text
Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text

Summary
You can create several paragraphs of text as a single multiline text (mtext)
object. With the built-in editor, you can format the text appearance, columns,
and boundaries.
After you specify the point for the opposite corner the Text Editor visor (page
679) is displayed which contains text formatting options.
If you specify one of the other options, or if you enter -mtext at the Command
prompt, MTEXT bypasses the In-Place Text editor and displays additional
Command prompts (page 692).
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text
Symbols and Special Characters (page 696)

674 | Chapter 2 Commands

In-Place Text Editor
Creates or modifies single or multiline text objects.

Summary
You can import or paste text from other files to use in multiline text, set tabs,
adjust paragraph and line spacing and alignment, and create and modify
columns.
The In-Place Text Editor includes
■ Text Editor visor (page 679)
■

Paragraph dialog box (page 681)

■

Column Settings dialog box (page 684)

■

Background Mask dialog box (page 686)

■

Columns menu (page 683)

When a table cell is selected for editing, the In-Place Text Editor displays
column letters and row numbers.
NOTE
Not all options available when creating single-line text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Text Editor Shortcut Menu
Select All Selects all the text in the text editor.

Commands | 675

Clipboard Contains options to Cut, Copy, and Paste text to or from the
clipboard. The Paste Special option allows you to paste without character or
paragraph formatting.
Insert Field Displays the Insert Field dialog box (page 429).
Symbol Displays a list of available symbols. You can also select a Non-breaking
space and open the Characters dialog box for additional symbols.
Import Text Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box (page 720)). Select any file that is in ASCII or RTF format. Imported text
retains its original character formatting and style properties, but you can edit
and format the imported text in the editor. After you select a text file to import,
you can replace either selected text or all text, or append the inserted text to
text selected within the text boundary. The file size for imported text is limited
to 32 KB. (Not available for single-line text.)
The editor automatically sets the text color to BYLAYER. When black characters
are inserted and the background color is black, the editor automatically changes
to white or the current color.
Paragraph Alignment Sets alignment for the multiline text object. You can
choose to align your text to the left, center, or right. You can justify your text,
or align the first and last characters of your text with the margins of your
mtext box, or center each line of text within the margins of your mtext box.
Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect
the justification of the line. (Not available for single-line text.)
Paragraph Displays options for paragraph formatting. See the Paragraph dialog
box (page 681). (Not available for single-line text.)
Bullets and Lists Displays the options for numbering lists. (Not available for
single-line text.)
Displays options for creating lists. (Not available for table cells.) The list is
indented to align with the first selected paragraph.
■

Off: When selected, removes letters, numbers, and bullets from selected
text that has list formatting applied. Indentation is not changed.

■

Lettered: Applies list formatting that uses letters with periods for the items
in the list. If the list has more items than the alphabet has letters, the
sequence continues by using double letters.

■

Numbered: Applies list formatting that uses numbers with periods for the
items in the list.

■

Bulleted: Applies list formatting that uses bullets for the items in the list.

676 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

Restart: Starts a new letter or number sequence in list formatting. If the
selected items are in the middle of a list, unselected items below them also
become part of the new list.

■

Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues
the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected
items below the selected items continue the sequence.

■

Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters
can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used
as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket
(>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).

■

Use Tab Delimiter Only: Limits the Allow Auto-list and Allow Bullets and
Lists options. List formatting is applied to text only when the space after
the letter, number, or bullet character was created by Tab, not Space.

■

Allow Bullets and Lists: When this option is selected, list formatting is
applied to all plain text in the multiline text object that looks like a list.
Text that meets the following criteria is considered to be a list. The line
begins with (1) one or more letters or numbers or a symbol, followed by
(2) punctuation after a letter or number, (3) a space created by pressing
Tab, and (4) some text before the line is ended by Enter or Shift+Enter.
When you clear the check mark, any list formatting in the multiline text
object is removed and the items are converted to plain text. Allow Auto-list
is turned off, and all the Bullets and Lists options are unavailable except
Allow Bullets and Lists.

Columns Displays options for columns. See the Columns menu (page 683).
(Not available for single-line text.)
Find and Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box (page 687).
Change Case Changes the case of selected text. Options are Uppercase and
Lowercase.
AutoCAPS Converts all new and imported text to uppercase. AutoCAPS does
not affect existing text. To change the case of existing text, select the text and
right-click. Click Change Case.
Character Set Displays a menu of code pages. Select a code page to apply it
to the selected text. (Not available for single-line text.)
Combine Paragraphs Combines selected paragraphs into a single paragraph
and replaces each paragraph return with a space. (Not available for single-line
text.)

Commands | 677

Remove Formatting Removes character formatting for selected characters,
paragraph formatting for a selected paragraph, or all formatting from a selected
paragraph. (Not available for single-line text.)
Background Mask Displays the Background Mask dialog box (page 686). (Not
available for table cells and single-line text.)
Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains
stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected. When the stack
characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text
to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right.
By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-justified tolerance values.
Text that contains the forward slash converts to center-justified fractional
numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer
text string. Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated
by a diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. The characters above the
diagonal fraction bar are bottom-right aligned; the characters beneath the
diagonal bar are top-left aligned.
Editor Settings Displays a list of options for the text editor. See Editor Settings
(page ?) for more information.

Editor Settings
Provides options for changing the behavior of the text editor and provides
additional editing options. Options are specific to the Editor Settings menu
and are not available elsewhere in the text editor.
NOTE Some options may not be available depending on what you are editing.
Always Display As WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) Controls
display of the In-Place Text Editor and the text within it. When unchecked,
the drawing view is zoomed and rotated if need so the text that would
otherwise be difficult to read (if it is very small, very large, or is rotated) is
displayed at a legible size and is oriented horizontally so that you can easily
read and edit it.
When this option is checked, the MTEXTFIXED (page 1373) system variable will
be set to 0. Otherwise, MTEXTFIXED will be set to 2.
Show Ruler Controls the display of the ruler.
Opaque Background When selected, makes the background of the editor
opaque. (Not available for table cells.)
Check Spelling Determines whether As-You-Type spell checking is on or off.

678 | Chapter 2 Commands

Check Spelling Settings Displays the Check Spelling Settings dialog box (page
984), where you can specify text options that will be checked for spelling errors
within your drawing.
Text Highlight Color Specifies the highlight color when text is selected.
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

Text Editor Visor
Formats the text of the current multiline text object.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Text Editor Visor - Row 1
Style Options
Style

Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The Standard text
style is active by default.

Text Height

Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes
the height of selected text. If the current text style has no fixed height,
the text height is the value stored in the TEXTSIZE (page 1463) system
variable. A multiline text object can contain characters of various
heights.

Formatting Options
Bold

Turns bold formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option
is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.

Italic

Turns italic formatting on and off for new or selected text. This option
is available only for characters using TrueType fonts.

Underline

Turns underlining on and off for new or selected text.

Commands | 679

Overline

Turns overline on and off for new or selected text.

Editor Options
Undo

Undoes actions in the text editor, including changes to either text
content or text formatting.

Redo

Redoes actions in the text editor, including changes to either text
content or text formatting.

Cancel

Closes the text editor and changes are ignored.

Save

Closes the text editor and saves your changes.

More Options

Displays the second row of the visor which contains additional
formatting options.

Text Editor Visor - Row 2
Additional Formatting Options
Font

Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text.
TrueType fonts are listed by font family name. AutoCAD for Mac
compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed by the name of the file in which
the fonts are stored. Custom fonts and third-party fonts are displayed
in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts.

Color

Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text.

Paragraph Options
MText Justification

680 | Chapter 2 Commands

Displays the MText Justification menu with nine alignment options
available. Top Left is the default. See the Paragraph dialog box
(page 681) for a list of additional options.

Insert Options
Insert Symbols

Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position. You
can also insert symbols manually. See Symbols and Special Characters
(page 696).
Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu, along with their
control code or Unicode string. Click Other to display the Character
dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font
available on your system. When you have selected the character that
you want to use, click Insert to place the character in the text editor.
Close the Characters dialog box when you are done inserting special
characters.
Symbols are not supported in vertical text.

Insert Field

Displays the Insert Field dialog box (page 429), where you can select
a field to insert in the text. When the dialog box closes, the current
value of the field is displayed in the text.

Tools Options
Find and Replace

Displays the Find and Replace dialog box (page 687).

See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

Paragraph Dialog Box
Sets indentation for paragraphs and the first lines of paragraphs.

Commands | 681

Summary
Specifies tab stops, indents, controls paragraph alignment, paragraph spacing,
and paragraph line spacing.
NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are
supported in AutoCAD 2007 and previous releases. See MTEXT Paragraph and
Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases in the User’s Guide.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Tab
Specifies the tab stops and decimal styles to use for the paragraph.

682 | Chapter 2 Commands

Tab Stops
Displays tab setting options, including adding and removing tabs. Options
include setting left, center, right, and decimal tabs. You can also set tabs from
the Tab selection button on the In-Place Editor’s ruler.
Decimal style
Sets the decimal style based on current user locale. Options include setting
the decimal style as period, comma, and space. This setting is preserved with
the drawing even if the locale setting is changed.

Indent
Controls the left and right indents for the paragraph.
Left
Sets the indent value for the first line or hanging indent to the selected or
current paragraphs.
Right
Applies the indent to the entire selected or current paragraph.

Alignment & Spacing
Defines the alignment and spacing for the paragraph.
Paragraph Alignment
Sets the alignment properties for the current or selected paragraphs.
Paragraph Spacing
Specifies the spacing before or after the current or selected paragraphs. The
distance between two paragraphs is determined by the total of the after
paragraph spacing value of the upper paragraph and the before paragraph
spacing value of the lower paragraph.
Line Spacing
Sets the spacing between individual lines in the current or selected paragraphs.
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

Columns Menu
Allows you to format an mtext object into multiple columns.

Commands | 683

Summary
You can specify column and gutter width, height, and number of columns.
You can edit column width and height with grip-editing.
To create multiple columns you always start with a single column. Depending
on the column mode you choose, you have two different methods for creating
and manipulating columns – static mode or dynamic mode.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
No Columns Specifies no columns for the current mtext object.
Dynamic Columns Sets dynamic columns mode to the current mtext object.
Dynamic columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affects text flow and
text flow causes columns to be added or removed. Auto height or Manual
height options are available.
Static Columns Sets static columns mode to the current mtext object. You
can specify the total width and height of the mtext object, and the number
of columns. All the columns share the same height and are aligned at both
sides.
Insert Column Break Alt+Enter Inserts a manual column break.
Column Settings Displays Column Settings dialog box (page 684).
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

Column Settings Dialog Box
Displays options for setting up columns such as the type, number of columns,
height, and width, and gutter size.

684 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Column Type
Lists choices for the type of columns you want to create.
Height
Displays the height of the multiline text object when Auto Height with
Dynamic or Static Columns is selected.
Number
Sets the number of columns. This is only active when you select Static
Columns.

Width
Displays and specifies control column and gutter width values. The gutter
value is five times the default multiline text height.

Commands | 685

Also displays the total width value of the multiline text object.
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

Background Mask Dialog Box
Controls using an opaque background behind multiline text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Use Background Mask
Puts an opaque background behind the text.
NOTE
When you apply a background mask to mtext multiple columns only the
column areas will be masked. The space between the columns commonly
referred to as gutters will be unmasked.

Offset
Specifies the margin around the text for the opaque background. The value
is based on the text height. A factor of 1.0 exactly fits the multiline text object.
A factor of 1.5 extends the background by 0.5 times the text height.

Use Background Drawing Color
Provides a background that is the same color as the background of the drawing.

Fill Color
Specifies the color for the background.
Color

686 | Chapter 2 Commands

Specifies a color for the opaque background. You can select one of the colors
in the list or click Select Color to open the Color Palette dialog box (page 198).
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT
Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select the Find and Replace icon in the text editor or from
the MTEXT shortcut menu

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Find What
Provides a space for you to type the text you want to find.

Replace With
Provides a space for you to type the text you want to replace the text you
typed in Find What.

Commands | 687

Find Next
Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What.

Replace
Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with
the text in Replace With.

Replace All
Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the
text in Replace With.

Hide Options
Specifies advanced find options.
Match Case Finds only text with uppercase and lowercase characters as
specified in Find What.
The case of all characters in the text string must match the case of the text in
Find What. When this option is cleared, a match is found for specified text
strings regardless of case.
Match Whole Word Only Finds only whole words specified in Find What.
Text that is part of another word is ignored. When this option is cleared, a
match is found for text strings, whether they are single words or parts of other
words.
Use Wildcards Allows the use of wildcard characters in searches.
For more information on wildcard searches, see Find and Replace Text.
Match Diacritics Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results.
Match Half/Full Width Forms (East Asian Languages) Matches half- and
full-width characters in search results.
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

Stack Properties Dialog Box
Edits the text, stack type, alignment, and size of stacked text.

688 | Chapter 2 Commands

Summary
To open the Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click,
and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu.
You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options
control the stack style, position, and text size of the stacked text.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Text
Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction.
Upper
Edits the number in the upper part or first half of a stacked fraction.
Lower
Edits the number in the lower part or second half of a stacked fraction.

Appearance
Edits the style, position, or text size of a stacked fraction.

Style
Specifies a style format for stacked text: horizontal fraction, diagonal fraction,
tolerance, and decimal.
Fraction (Horizontal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top
of the second number separated by a horizontal line.
Fraction (Diagonal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of
the second number separated by a diagonal line.

Commands | 689

NOTE
Releases of AutoCAD earlier than AutoCAD 2000 do not support diagonal
fractions. If a multiline text object contains diagonal fractions, the fractions
are converted to horizontal fractions when you save the drawing to
pre-AutoCAD 2000 releases. Diagonal fractions are restored when the drawing
is re-opened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release. If a single multiline text object
contains both horizontal and diagonal fractions, all fractions are converted
to diagonal fractions when the drawing is reopened in AutoCAD 2000 or a
later release.
Tolerance Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second
number. There is no line between the numbers.
Decimal A variation of the Tolerance style that aligns the decimal point of
both the upper and lower numbers of selected text.

Position
Specifies how fractions are aligned. Center alignment is the default. All stacked
text in an object uses the same alignment.
Top Aligns the top of the fraction with the top of the text line.
Center Centers the fraction vertically at the center of the text line.
Bottom Aligns the bottom of the fraction with the text baseline.

Text Size
Controls the size of the stacked text as a percentage of the size of the current
text style (from 25 to 125 percent).

Defaults
Saves the new settings as defaults or restores the previous default values to
the current stacked text.

AutoStack Button
Displays the AutoStack Properties dialog box (page 691). AutoStack only stacks
numeric characters immediately before and after the carat, slash, and pound
characters. To stack nonnumeric characters, or text that includes spaces, select
the text and choose Stack from the text editor shortcut menu.
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

690 | Chapter 2 Commands

AutoStack Properties Dialog Box
Sets the defaults for automatically stacking characters.

Access Methods
Shortcut menu: Select stacked text in the text editor. Right-click and click
Stack Properties on the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box,
click AutoStack.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Enable AutoStacking
Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before and after the carat,
slash, or pound character. For example, if you type 1#3 followed by a
nonnumeric character or space, the text is automatically stacked as a diagonal
fraction.
Remove Leading Blank
Removes blanks between a whole number and a fraction.
Convert It to a Diagonal Fraction
Converts the slash character to a diagonal fraction when AutoStack is on.
Convert It to a Horizontal Fraction
Converts the slash character to a horizontal fraction when AutoStack is on.

Commands | 691

NOTE
Whether AutoStack is on or off, the pound character is always converted to a
diagonal fraction, and the carat character is always converted to a tolerance
format.
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

-MTEXT
Creates a multiline text object.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify first corner.
Specify opposite corner (page ?) or [Height (page ?)/Justify
(page ?)/Line spacing (page ?)/Rotation (page ?)/Style
(page ?)/Width (page ?)/Columns (page ?)].

Opposite Corner
As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is
displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object. Arrows
within the rectangle indicate the direction of the paragraph's text flow.

Height
Specifies the text height to use for multiline text characters.
■

Specify Height.

The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style is not
annotative.
■

Specify Paper Text Height.

The Specify Paper Text Height prompt is displayed only if the current text
style is annotative.
The default height, if nonzero, is the height of the current style; otherwise, it
is the height stored in the TEXTSIZE (page 1463) system variable. Character
height is calculated in drawing units. Changing the height updates the value
stored in TEXTSIZE (page 1463).

692 | Chapter 2 Commands

Justify
Determines both text justification and text flow, for new or selected text, in
relation to the text boundary. The current justification is applied to new text.
The text is justified within the specified rectangle based on the justification
setting and one of nine justification points on the rectangle. The justification
point is based on the first point used to specify the rectangle. Text is center-,
left-, or right-justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries. Spaces
entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the
justification of the line. Text flow controls whether text is aligned from the
middle, the top, or the bottom of the paragraph with respect to the top and
bottom text boundaries.
Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] .
Justify Options
Option

Meaning

TL

Top Left

TC

Top Center

TR

Top Right

ML

Middle Left

MC

Middle Center

MR

Middle Right

BL

Bottom Left

BC

Bottom Center

BR

Bottom Right

The following illustrations show each justification option.

Commands | 693

Line Spacing
Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical
distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom
of the next line of text.
NOTE
Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table. Use a
smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does
not overlap.
At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest
character in the line. When At Least is selected, lines of text with taller
characters have added space between lines.
Distance Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units.
Valid values must be between 0.0833 (0.25x) and 1.3333 (4x).

694 | Chapter 2 Commands

Exactly Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text in the
multiline text object. Spacing is based on the text height of the object or text
style.
Spacing Factor Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing.
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You can enter a
spacing factor as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single
spacing. For example, specify single spacing by entering 1x, or specify double
spacing by entering 2x.

Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary.
■

Specify rotation angle.

If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the rotation angle is
determined by the angle between the X axis and the line defined by the most
recently entered point (default 0,0,0) and the specified point.
The previous prompt is redisplayed until you specify the opposite corner of
the text boundary.

Style
Specifies the text style to use for multiline text.
Style Name Specifies a text style name. Text styles can be defined and saved
using the STYLE (page 1006) command.
?—List Styles Lists text style names and characteristics.
The previous prompt is redisplayed until you specify the opposite corner of
the text boundary.

Width
Specifies the width of the text boundary.
If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the width is calculated as
the distance between the start point and the specified point. Words within
each line of the multiline text object wrap to fit the width of the text boundary.
If you specify a width of 0, word wrap is turned off and the width of the
multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text. You can end a line
of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing Enter. To end the
command, press Enter at the MTEXT prompt.

Columns
Specifies the column options for an mtext object.
Static Specifies the total column width, the number of columns, the gutter
width (the space between the columns), and the height of columns.

Commands | 695

Dynamic Specifies column width, gutter width and column height. Dynamic
columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affect text flow and text flow
causes columns to be added or removed.
No columns Sets no column mode to current mtext object.
The default column setting is stored in the MTEXTCOLUMN (page 1372) system
variable.
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

Symbols and Special Characters
You can include special characters and symbols by entering a control code or
a Unicode string.
With the In-Place Text Editor (page 675), you can right-click and click Symbol
on the shortcut menu.
NOTE
Symbols are not supported in vertical text.
Unicode strings and control codes
Control Codes

Unicode Strings

Result

%%d

\U+00B0

Degree symbol (°)

%%p

\U+00B1

Tolerance symbol ( )

%%c

\U+2205

Diameter symbol (

696 | Chapter 2 Commands

)

To insert the following text symbols, click Symbol on the expanded Text
Formatting toolbar or enter the appropriate Unicode string:
Text symbols and Unicode strings
Name

Symbol

Unicode String

Almost equal

\U+2248

Angle

\U+2220

Boundary line

\U+E100

Centerline

\U+2104

Delta

\U+0394

Electrical phase

\U+0278

Flow line

\U+E101

Identity

\U+2261

Initial length

\U+E200

Commands | 697

Text symbols and Unicode strings
Name

Symbol

Unicode String

Monument line

\U+E102

Not equal

\U+2260

Ohm

\U+2126

Omega

\U+03A9

Plate/property line

\U+214A

Subscript 2

\U+2082

Squared

\U+00B2

Cubed

\U+00B3

These text symbols are available in the following True Type (TTF) and SHX
fonts:
■ Simplex*
■

Romans*

■

gdt*

■

amgdt*

■

Isocp

698 | Chapter 2 Commands

■

Isocp2

■

Isocp3

■

Isoct

■

Isoct2

■

Isoct3

■

Isocpeur (TTF only)*

■

Isocpeur italic (TTF only)

■

Isocteur (TTF only)

■

Isocteur italic (TTF only)

* These fonts also include the Initial Length symbol used for arc length
dimensions.
See also:
Overview of Multiline Text

MULTIPLE
Repeats the next command until canceled.

Summary
The command that you enter is repeated until you press Esc. Because
MULTIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be specified
each time.
MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes.
®

NOTE You cannot use MULTIPLE as an argument to the AutoLISP command
function.
See also:
Enter Commands on the Command Line

Commands | 699

MVIEW
Creates and controls layout viewports.

Access Methods
Toolbar: Layout visor ➤ New Viewport
Shortcut menu: Right-click the drawing area when a named layout is current
and click New Viewport.

Summary
In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64
viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP (page 1366)). Objects in
model space are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active
are blank. Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Specify corner of viewport (page ?)or [ON (page ?)/OFF
(page ?)/Fit (page ?)/Shadeplot (page ?)/Lock (page
?)/Object (page ?)/Polygonal (page ?)/Restore (page
?)/LAyer (page ?)/2 (page ?)/3 (page ?)/4 (page ?)].

Corner of Viewport
Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport.

On
Makes a selected viewport active. An active viewport displays objects in model
space. The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number of
viewports that can be active at one time. If your drawing contains more
viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP, you must turn one off
to make another one active.

Off
Makes a selected viewport inactive. Objects in model space are not displayed
in an inactive viewport.

Fit
Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the printable area.
When the paper background and printable area are turned off, the viewport
fills the display.

700 | Chapter 2 Commands

Shadeplot
Specifies how viewports in named (paper space) layouts are plotted.
As Displayed Specifies that a viewport is plotted the same way it is displayed.
Wireframe Specifies that a viewport is plotted wireframe regardless of the
current display.
Hidden Specifies that a viewport is plotted with hidden lines removed
regardless of the current display.
All Visual Styles Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified visual
style.
All Render Presets Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified
render preset.

Lock
Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed
when working in model space.

Object
Specifies a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle to convert into a
viewport. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three
vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can contain an arc as well as line
segments.

Polygonal
Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points.
Arc Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport.
For a description of the options for creating arc segments, see the Arc option
in PLINE (page 785).
Close Closes the boundary. If you press Enter after specifying at least three
points, the boundary is closed automatically.
Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the
previous segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is
drawn tangent to that arc segment.

Commands | 701

Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to the polygonal
viewport.

Restore
Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS (page 1115) command.
■

Enter Viewport Configuration Name.

■

?

First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection
method; the viewports are fit into the selected area.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

Layer
Resets layer property overrides for the selected viewport to their global layer
properties.
■

Reset Viewport Layer Property Overrides Back To Global
Properties. Enter Y to remove all layer property overrides.

■

Select Viewports.

2
Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of equal
size.
■

Enter Viewport Arrangement.

First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection
method; the viewports are fit into the selected area.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.

3
Divides the specified area into three viewports.
The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. The
other options split the area into three viewports: one large viewport and two

702 | Chapter 2 Commands

smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the
larger viewport is placed.

■

First Corner (page 702)

■

Fit (page 702)

4
Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of
equal size.

■

First Corner (page 702)

■

Fit (page 702)

See also:
Create and Modify Layout Viewports

MVSETUP
Sets up the specifications of a drawing.

Summary
When you enter mvsetup, the prompts displayed depend on whether you
are on the Model layout (model space) (page 704) or on a named layout (paper
space) (page 704).

Commands | 703

See also:
Create and Modify Layout Viewports

MVSETUP on the Model Layout
The Model layout is most useful for plotting multiple views of a drawing
within a single border.
On the Model layout, you set the units type, drawing scale factor, and paper
size at the Command prompt using MVSETUP. Using the settings you provide,
a rectangular border is drawn at the grid limits.

List of Prompts
When the TILEMODE (page 1464) system variable is on (the default), the
following prompt are displayed:
Enable paper space? [No/Yes] : Enternor press Enter
Pressing Enter turns off TILEMODE and proceeds as described in the following
section, Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab. (page 704)
Entering n displays the following prompt:
Enter units type
[Scientific/Decimal/Engineering/Architectural/Metric]: Enter
an option
A list of available units and prompts for the scale factor and paper size are
displayed.
Enter the scale factor: Enter a value
Enter the paper width: Enter a value
Enter the paper height: Enter a value
A bounding box is drawn and the command ends.
See also:
Create and Modify Layout Viewports

MVSETUP on a Named Layout
On a named layout, you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into
the drawing and create a set of layout viewports within the title block.

704 | Chapter 2 Commands

You can specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block
in the layout and the drawing on the Model layout.
To easily specify all layout page settings and prepare your drawing for plotting,
you can also use the Page Setup Manager.

List of Prompts
When the TILEMODE (page 1464) system variable is off, or when you enter y
or press Enter at the Enable Paper Space prompt, the following prompts are
displayed:
Enter an option [Align (page ?)/Create (page ?)/Scale
viewports (page ?)/Options (page ?)/Title block (page
?)/Undo (page ?)]: Enter an option or press Enter to end the command

Align
Pans the view in a viewport so that it aligns with a base point in another
viewport. The current viewport is the viewport that the other point moves to.
Angled Pans the view in a viewport in a specified direction.
The next two prompts specify the distance and angle from the base point to
the second point.
Horizontal Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns horizontally with a
base point in another viewport. This option should be used only if the two
viewports are oriented horizontally. Otherwise, the view might be panned
outside the limits of the viewport.
Vertical Alignment Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns vertically
with a base point in another viewport. This option should be used only if the
two viewports are oriented vertically. Otherwise, the view might be panned
outside the limits of the viewport.
Rotate View Rotates the view in a viewport about a base point.
Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

Create
Creates viewports.

Delete Objects
Deletes existing viewports.

Create Viewports
Displays options for creating viewports.
Layout Number to Load Controls creation of viewports.
Entering 0 or pressing Enter creates no viewports.

Commands | 705

Entering 1 creates a single viewport whose size is determined by the following
prompts.
Entering 2 creates four viewports by dividing a specified area into quadrants.
You are prompted for the area to be divided and the distance between the
viewports.
The viewing angle for each quadrant is set as shown in the table.
Quadrant

View

Upper-left

Top (XY plane of UCS)

Upper-right

SE isometric view

Lower-left

Front (XZ plane of UCS)

Lower-right

Right side (YZ plane of UCS)

Entering 3 defines a matrix of viewports along the X and Y axes. Specifying
points at the next two prompts defines the rectangular area of the drawing
that contains the viewport configuration. If you have inserted a title block,
the Specify First Corner prompt also includes an option for selecting a default
area.
If you enter more than one viewport in each direction, the following prompts
are displayed:
Specify distance between viewports in X direction <0.0>: Specify a distance
Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0.0>: Specify a distance
The array of viewports is inserted into the defined area.
Redisplay Redisplays the list of viewport layout options.

Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

Scale Viewports
Adjusts the zoom scale factor of the objects displayed in the viewports. The
zoom scale factor is a ratio between the scale of the border in paper space and
the scale of the drawing objects displayed in the viewports.
Interactively Selects one viewport at a time and displays the following prompts
for each:
For example, for an engineering drawing at a scale of 1:4, or quarter scale,
enter 1 for paper space units and 4 for model space units.

706 | Chapter 2 Commands

Uniform Sets the same scale factor for all viewports.

Options
Sets the MVSETUP preferences before you change your drawing.
Layer Specifies a layer on which to insert the title block.
Limits Specifies whether to reset the grid limits to the drawing extents after
a title block has been inserted.
Units Specifies whether the sizes and point locations are translated to inch
or millimeter paper units.
Xref Specifies whether the title block is inserted or externally referenced.

Title Block
Prepares paper space, orients the drawing by setting the origin, and creates a
drawing border and a title block.

Delete Objects
Deletes objects from paper space.

Origin
Relocates the origin point for this sheet.

Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.

Insert
Displays title block options.
Title Block to Load Inserts a border and a title block. Entering 0 or pressing
Enter inserts no border. Entering 1 through 13 creates a standard border of
the appropriate size. The list includes ANSI and DIN/ISO standard sheets.
Add Adds title block options to the list. Selecting this option prompts you to
enter the title block description to be displayed in the list and the name of a
drawing to insert.
A line similar to the following example is added after the last entry in the
mvsetup.dfs default file:
A/E (24 x 18in),arch-b.dwg,(1.12 0.99 0.00),(18.63 17.02 0.00),in

The last field of the line specifies whether the title block has been created in
inches or in millimeters. The units field allows title blocks created in either
unit system to be changed by setting the unit type using the Options option.
You can also add title blocks that have variable attributes.
Delete Removes entries from the list.
Redisplay Redisplays the list of title block options.

Commands | 707

Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.
See also:
Create and Modify Layout Viewports

N Commands
NAVVCUBE
Indicates the current viewing direction. Dragging or clicking the ViewCube
tool rotates the scene.

Access Methods
Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ ViewCube ➤ On
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ ViewCube

Summary
Click the ViewCube tool to rotate and fill the window with the entire model
or an object selected in the view. The Home button displayed near the
ViewCube tool rotates the model to a three-fourths view or a user-defined
view while performing a fit-to-view. Use the ViewCube menu to define the
Home view for the model.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter an option [ON (page 708)/OFF (page 708)/Properties (page
708)] :
On Displays the ViewCube tool.
Off Turns off the display of the ViewCube tool.
Settings Displays the ViewCube Settings dialog box (page 709), in which you
can control the appearance and location of the ViewCube.

708 | Chapter 2 Commands

See also:
Use ViewCube Tool

ViewCube Settings Dialog Box
Controls the display properties of the ViewCube tool.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Display
Location
Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed.
(NAVVCUBELOCATION (page 1375) system variable)
Size
Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool.
(NAVVCUBESIZE (page 1376) system variable)

Commands | 709

Select Automatic to have the size of the ViewCube tool adjust based on the
current size of the active viewport, zoom factor of the active layout, or drawing
window.
Inactive Opacity
Controls the opacity of the ViewCube tool when inactive.
(NAVVCUBEOPACITY (page 1375) system variable)

When Dragging
Snap to Closest View
Specifies if the current view is adjusted to the closest preset view when
changing the view by dragging the ViewCube tool.

When Clicking
Zoom to Extents
Specifies if the model is forced to fit the current viewport after a view change.
Orient ViewCube to Current UCS
Controls whether the ViewCube tool reflects the current UCS or WCS.
(NAVVCUBEORIENT (page 1376) system variable)
Animate When Switching Views
Controls the use of smooth view transitions when switching between views.

Show
UCS Menu Controls the display of the UCS drop-down menu below the
ViewCube tool.
Compass Controls whether the compass is displayed below the ViewCube
tool. The North direction indicated on the compass is the value defined by
the NORTHDIRECTION system variable.

Keep
Scene Upright Specifies whether the viewpoint of the model can be turned
upside-down.

Restore Defaults
Applies the default settings for the ViewCube tool.
See also:
Use ViewCube Tool

710 | Chapter 2 Commands

NEW
Creates a new drawing.

Access Methods
Menu: File ➤ New

Summary
If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt is
displayed (page 711).
See also:
Overview of Starting a New Drawing

NEW Command Prompt
Summary
Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box (page 720)).

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Enter template file name or [. (for none)] : Enter a
name, enter a period (.), or press Enter
See also:
Overview of Starting a New Drawing

O Commands
OBJECTSCALE
Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects.

Commands | 711

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Annotation Scaling tool group ➤
Add/Delete Scales
Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales
Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object. Right-click in the drawing area
and click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales.
Command entry: 'objectscale for transparent use

Summary
An annotative object can support several annotation scales for views at different
scales. You can add or delete scales from the list of scales assigned to the
selected annotative objects.
If you enter objectscale, you are prompted to select annotative objects.
The Annotation Object Scale List dialog box (page 712) is displayed.
If you enter -objectscale at the Command prompt, options are displayed
(page 715).
See also:
Set Annotation Scale

Annotation Object Scale List Dialog Box
Adds or deletes supported scales for the selected annotative object.

712 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.
Object Scale List
Displays the list of scales supported by the selected object.
List all scales for selected objects
Specifies that all scales supported by the selected objects are displayed in the
Object Scale List.
List scales common to all selected objects only
Specifies that only the supported scales that are common to all selected objects
are displayed in the Object Scale List.
Add (+)
Displays the Add Scales to Object Dialog Box (page 714).
Delete (-)
Removes the selected scale from the scale list.
NOTE
The current scale or scales referenced by objects or views cannot be deleted.

Commands | 713

See also:
Scale Views in Layout Viewports

Add Scales to Object Dialog Box
Adds a new scale to the selected annotative object.

List of Options
The following option is displayed.
Scale List
Displays the list of scales that can be added to the selected annotative object.
Multiple scales can be selected by holding down the Shift or Command key
while selecting the scales.
Use the SCALELISTEDIT (page 918) command to add custom scales to this list.
See also:
Scale Views in Layout Viewports

714 | Chapter 2 Commands

-OBJECTSCALE
List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Select annotative objects: Use an object selection method
Enter an option [Add (page ?)/Delete (page ?)/? (page 715)]
: Enter a or d or press Enter

Add
Adds an annotation scale to the selected annotative objects.
When created, an annotative object supports one annotation scale: the current
annotation scale. However, an annotative object can be updated to support
additional annotation scales for views at different scales.
■ Enter named scale to add.
■

? (page 715)

? Displays the list of scales in the scale list.

Delete
Removes a specified current annotation scale from the selected objects.
If an annotative object supports a single scale, that scale cannot be deleted
from the object.
■ Enter named scale to delete.
■

? (page 715)

? Displays the union of all scales of the selected objects.
See also:
Scale Views in Layout Viewports

OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.

Commands | 715

Access Methods

Button

Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Offset
Menu: Modify ➤ Offset

Summary
You can offset an object at a specified distance or through a point. After you
offset objects, you can trim and extend them as an efficient method to create
drawings containing many parallel lines and curves.

The OFFSET command repeats for convenience. To exit the command, press
Enter.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Current settings: Erase source = current Layer = current
OFFSETGAPTYPE = current
Specify Offset Distance (page ?) or [Through (page ?)/Erase
(page ?)/Layer (page ?)] : Specify a distance, enter an option,
or press Enter

716 | Chapter 2 Commands

Offset Distance
Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object.

Exit Exits the OFFSET command.
Multiple Enters the Multiple offset mode, which repeats the offset operation
using the current offset distance.
Undo Reverses the previous offset.

Through
Creates an object passing through a specified point.
NOTE
For best results when you offset a polyline with corners, specify the through
point near the midpoint of a line segment, not near a corner.

■

Exit (page 717)

■

Multiple (page 717)

■

Undo (page 717)

Erase
Erases the source object after it is offset.

Layer
Determines whether offset objects are created on the current layer or on the
layer of the source object.
See also:
Offset an Object

Commands | 717

OFFSETEDGE
Creates a closed polyline or spline object that is offset at a specified distance
from the edges of a selected planar face on a 3D solid or surface.

Summary
You can offset the edges of a planar face on a 3D solid or surface. The result
is a closed polyline or spline that is located on the same plane as the selected
face or surface, and can be inside or outside the original edges.
TIP You can use the resulting object with PRESSPULL (page 827) or EXTRUDE (page
423) to create new solids.

List of Prompts
The following prompts are displayed.
Corner = current
Select face: Select a planar face on a 3D solid or surface
Specify through point or [Distance/Corner] : Specify a
point, or enter an option

Through Point
Creates an offset object that passes through the specified point. This point is
always projected line-of-sight onto the plane of the selected face.

Distance
Creates an offset object at a specified distance from the edges of the selected
face.
Specify distance:  Enter the offset distance, or press Enter to accept
the current distance.

718 | Chapter 2 Commands

Specify point on side to offset Specify a point location to determine whether
the offset distance is applied inside or outside the edges of the face.

Corner
Specifies the type of corners on the offset object when it is created outside the
edges of the selected face.
Sharp Creates sharp corners between offset linear segments.
Rounded Creates rounded corners between offset linear segments, using a
radius that is equal to the offset distance.
See also:
Offset an Object
Add Facets to Faces on Solids and Surfaces

OOPS
Restores erased objects.

Summary
OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE (page 406) command.

You can also use OOPS after BLOCK (page 143) or WBLOCK (page 1125) because
these commands can erase the selected objects after creating a block.
You cannot use OOPS to restore objects on a layer that has been removed with
the PURGE (page 849) command.
See also:
Erase Objects

Commands | 719

OPEN
Opens an existing drawing file.

Access Methods
Menu: File ➤ Open

Summary
The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is
displayed.
When FILEDIA (page 1296) is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a Command prompt
(page 723).
See also:
Open a Drawing

Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes
Several commands display standard file selection dialog boxes, in which you
can navigate through the files and folders on a local and network drive. While
each dialog box may vary slightly, the following is a list of common options.

720 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Task Pane
Provides access to categories that represent locations files might be stored in;
devices, shared and predefined places, and media. You can reorder the items
under a category by dragging them to a new position. To add a new item to
Places, drag a folder from the list. Changes to Places affect all standard file
selection dialog boxes.

Devices
Lists the local storage devices attached to your computer.

Shared
Lists the network location paths added to your computer.

Commands | 721

Places
Lists a number of predefined, user added, or Smart folders that are dependent
on your user profile.
Documents Displays the contents of the Documents folder for the current user
profile.
Desktop Displays the contents of your desktop.

Search For
Lists the files that you most recently searched for.

Media
Lists folders related to media located on your computer, such as photos or
movies.

Back
Returns to the previous file location.

Forward
Returns you to the file location before Back was clicked.

Views
Controls the appearance of the icons for the files and folders in the current
place, specifies whether to show a preview image when a file is selected.
Icon Displays each file or folder as an icon. The icons used are determined by
the operating system, or a thumbnail preview of the contents of a file might
be used.
List Displays a list of the files and folders. Folders can be expanded to show
the hierarchy of the files or folders they contain.
Column Displays a multi-column list with each column representing a folder
in the hierarchy of the contents on your computer. When a file is selected, a
preview and details of the file are displayed in the next available column.

Where
Displays the current folder or drive. Click the dropdown arrow to view the
hierarchy of the folder path, and to navigate to a previous folder, drive, or
recent place. The REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable controls whether the
last used paths in each standard file selection dialog box are stored across
sessions.

722 | Chapter 2 Commands

Search
Allows you to search for a file or folder located on the computer using
Spotlight. Search results can be saved as Smart folders under Places in the Task
Pane.

Files List
Displays the files and folders in the current place. Use the Views buttons to
control navigation behavior, and how files and folders are listed.

File Format
When you are opening or saving files, File Format specifies the format of the
files you can select for open or in which the file is saved.

Read Only
WIndicates if the file should be opened as read-only. You cannot save changes
to the file using the original file name.

Open/Save
Depending on the purpose of the specific file selection dialog box, opens or
saves the selected file or enters the path of the selected folder in the previous
dialog box..

New Folder
Creates a new folder in the current place using a name that you specify.
See also:
Save a Drawing

OPEN Command Prompt
Opens an existing drawing file.
When FILEDIA (page 1296) is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays the following
Command prompt.
Enter name of drawing to open:
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File
dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box.
See also:
Open a Drawing

Commands | 723

OPTIONS
Customizes the program settings.

Access Methods
Menu: AutoCAD 2012 ➤ Preferences
Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected,
right-click in the drawing area. Click Preferences.

Summary
The Application Preferences dialog box (page 724) is displayed.
See also:
Set Up the Drawing Area

Application Preferences Dialog Box
Customizes the program settings.

List of Tabs
The Application Preferences dialog box includes the following tabs:
■ General (page 725)
■

Cursor & Selection (page 727)

■

Units & Guides (page 730)

■

Look & Feel (page 732)

■

Application (page 734)

■

Document Settings (page 739)

See also:
Set Up the Drawing Area

724 | Chapter 2 Commands

General Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box)
Controls the behavior of program features.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Mouse & Trackpad Customization
Controls the behavior of the mouse or trackpad.
Enable Quick Secondary Click as Return Key Controls right-click behavior.
A quick click is the same as pressing Enter. A longer click displays a shortcut
menu. You can set the duration of the longer click in milliseconds.
(DBLCLKEDIT (page 1207) system variable)
Reverse Zoom Direction Toggles the direction of transparent zoom operations
when you scroll the middle mouse wheel. (ZOOMWHEEL (page 1530) system
variable)

Spacebar Customization
Controls the behavior of the spacebar when pressed or held.
Enable Spacebar Hold to Pan Toggles if you can hold down the Spacebar to
enable panning. (SPACEPAN (page 1444) system variable)

Viewport Controls
Controls the display of the menus in the upper-left corner of all viewports.

Commands | 725

Display the Viewport Controls Controls whether the menus for viewport
tools, views, and visual styles that are located in the upper-left corner of every
viewport are displayed. (VPCONTROL (page 1489) system variable)

File Save Precautions
Assists in avoiding data loss.
Automatic Save
Saves your drawing automatically at the intervals you specify. You can specify
the location of all Autosave files by using the SAVEFILEPATH (page 1423) system
variable.SAVEFILE (page 1422) (read-only) stores the name of the Autosave file.
NOTE Automatic save is disabled when the Block Editor (page 139) is open.
Minutes Between Saves: When Automatic Save is on, specifies how often the
drawing is saved.
(SAVETIME (page 1423) system variable)

Zoom Adjustment
Controls thezoom behavior of the input device.
Zoom Speed Controls how much the magnification changes when the mouse
wheel is rolled forward or backward, or you single swipe on Magic Mouse or
a trackpad. (ZOOMFACTOR (page 1529) system variable)

Layout Elements
Controls the tasks that the program performs when a new layout is created.
Create Viewports in New Layouts Creates a single viewport automatically
when you create a new layout. (LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT (page 1349) system
variable)
Show Page Setup Manager Displays the Page Setup Manager the first time
you click a named (paper space) layout. Use this dialog box to set options
related to paper and print settings. (SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS
(page 1432) system variable)

Adaptive Degradation
Controls settings related to configuration of the graphics display system.
Automatically decrease display quality to improve performance Controls
whether adaptive degradation is on or off. With adaptive degradation on, if
performance goes below a specified level, effects are disabled or reduced to
maintain an acceptable level of performance.
See also:
Set Up the Drawing Area

726 | Chapter 2 Commands

Cursor & Selection Tab (Application Preferences
Dialog Box)
Controls the appearance and behavior of the cursor and selection.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Selection Modes
Controls the selection of objects in the drawing area.
Use Shift Key to Add to Selection Controls whether subsequent selections
replace the current selection set or add to it.

Commands | 727

To clear a selection set quickly, draw a selection window in a blank area of
the drawing. (PICKADD (page 1392) system variable)
Click and Drag to Start Selection Controls the method of drawing a selection
window.
If this option is cleared, you can draw a selection window by selecting two
separate points with the pointing device. (PICKDRAG (page 1393) system variable)

Selection Tool
Controls the appearance of the cursor in the drawing area.
Preview Shows a representation of how the crosshair, ObjectSnap aperture,
and pickbox will appear in the drawing area.
Crosshair Color Controls the color of the crosshair, ObjectSnap aperture, and
pickbox in the drawing area. Automatic is the default color.
When set to Automatic, the actual color applied changes between white and
black based on the background color of the drawing area.
Crosshair Lines Length Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage
of the screen size.
Valid settings range from 1 to 100 percent. When set to 100, the crosshairs
are full-screen and the ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When less than
100, the ends of the crosshairs may be visible when the cursor is moved to
one edge of the screen. (CURSORSIZE (page 1206) system variable)
ObjectSnap Aperture Size Sets the display size for the object snap target box,
in pixels.
Aperture size determines how close to a snap point you can be before the
magnet locks the aperture box to the snap point. Values range from 1 to 50
pixels. (APERTURE (page 69) system variable)
Pickbox Size Sets the object selection target height, in pixels. (PICKBOX (page
1393) system variable)

Autosnap Marker
Controls the appearance of the Autosnap Marker.
Marker Size Sets the display size for the AutoSnap marker.

Grips
Grips are small squares displayed on an object after it has been selected.
Enable Grips Controls the display of grips on selected objects. You can edit
an object with grips by selecting a grip and using the shortcut menu. Displaying
grips in a drawing significantly affects performance. Clear this option to
optimize performance. (GRIPS (page 1311) system variable)

728 | Chapter 2 Commands

Enable Grips with Blocks Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling
tooltips. (GRIPBLOCK (page 1307) system variable)

Enable Grips Tips Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips.
This option has no effect on standard objects. (GRIPTIPS (page 1312) system
variable)
Limit Grip Display To N Selected Objects Suppresses the display of grips
when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects.
The valid range is 1 to 32,767. The default setting is 100. (GRIPOBJLIMIT (page
1310) system variable)
Grip Size Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. (GRIPSIZE (page 1311) system
variable)

3D Modeling Dynamic Input
Controls dynamic input in 3D.
Show Z Field for Pointer Input Displays a field for the Z coordinate when
using dynamic input.
See also:
Set Up the Drawing Area

Commands | 729

Units & Guides Tab (Application Preferences
Dialog Box)
Controls the units used when inserting blocks or referencing objects, and
which drafting guides are enabled.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Insertion Scale
Controls the default scale for inserting blocks and drawings into a drawing.
Source Content Units Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set
to 0.
If Unspecified-Unitless is selected, the object is not scaled when inserted.
(INSUNITSDEFSOURCE (page 1336) system variable)
Target Drawing Units Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set
to 0. (INSUNITSDEFTARGET (page 1338) system variable)

Coordinate Display
Controls the display of the coordinates display.
Display Coordinates on Drawing Toggles the coordinates display in the
lower-right corner of the drawing area. (VPCOORDDISPLAY (page 1489) system
variable)

3D Objects
Controls the number of isolines to display for surfaces and meshes.

730 | Chapter 2 Commands

U Size Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the
U isolines density on surface objects. (SURFU (page 1455) system variable)
V Size Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the
V isolines density on surface objects. (SURFV (page 1455) system variable)

AutoTrack Settings

™

Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack behavior, which is available
when polar tracking or object snap tracking is turned on (see DSETTINGS
(page 363)).
Display Polar Tracking Vector Displays a vector along specified angles when
polar tracking is on. With polar tracking, you can draw lines along angles.
Polar angles are 90-degree divisors, such as 45, 30, and 15 degrees. (TRACKPATH (page 1470) system variable = 2)
In a 3D view, a polar tracking vector parallel to the Z axis of the UCS is also
displayed, and the tooltip displays +Z or -Z for the angle depending on the
direction along the Z axis.
Display Full-screen Tracking Vector Tracking vectors are construction lines
from which you can draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships
to other objects. If this option is selected, alignment vectors are displayed as
infinite lines. (TRACKPATH system variable = 1)
Display AutoTrack Tooltip Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker,
tooltip, and magnet. (AUTOSNAP (page 1180) system variable)

Drawing Scale
Defines the default scales used by the program.
Default Scales List Displays the Default Scale List dialog box (page 741). Use
this dialog box to manage the default list of scales displayed in several dialog
boxes associated with layout viewports and printing. You can delete all custom
scales and restore the default list of scales.

Fields
Sets preferences related to fields.
Display Background of Fields Controls whether fields are displayed with a
gray background.
When this option is cleared, fields are displayed with the same background
as any text. (FIELDDISPLAY (page 1295) system variable)
See also:
Set Up the Drawing Area

Commands | 731

Look & Feel Tab (Application Preferences Dialog
Box)
Controls the appearance of the program user interface.

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Interface Theme
Defines the color scheme for the user interface.
Themes Controls which theme to apply to elements such as the status bar,
palettes, and the drawing windows. You can choose from a Dark or Light
theme.

732 | Chapter 2 Commands

Tooltip Appearance
Controls the appearance of drafting tooltips.
Size Specifies a size for tooltips. The default size is 0. Use the slider to make
tooltips larger or smaller.
Transparency Controls the transparency of tooltips. The lower the setting,
the less transparent the tooltip. A value of 0 sets the tooltip to opaque.

Interface Overrides
Overrides used to fine tune the colors applied to the background of the drawing
area.
Model Space Specifies the background color of the drawing area when the
Model layout is active. Choose a color or Select Color to specify one of the
non-standard colors.
Paper Space Specifies the background color of the drawing area when a named
(paper space) layout is active.
Block Editor Specifies the background color of the drawing area when the
Block Editor environment is active.

Navigation Controls
Controls the display of the ViewCube and the UCS icon.
Display UCS Icon in Controls when the UCS icon should be displayed in a
viewport.
■ 2D Model Space - Display UCS icon when the 2D Wireframe visual style
is current.
■

3D Model Space - Display UCS icon when a 3D visual style is current.

Display ViewCube in Controls when the ViewCube tool should be displayed
in a viewport.
■ 2D Model Space - Display the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe
visual style is current.
■

3D Model Space - Display the ViewCube tool when a 3D visual style is
current.

ViewCube Settings
Displays the ViewCube Settings dialog box (page 709).

Fade Controls
Controls the fading intensity value for annotative objects and xrefs.

Commands | 733

Annotative Objects Specifies the fading intensity value for objects during
in-place reference editing. Objects that are not being edited are displayed at
a lesser intensity. (XFADECTL (page 1526) system variable)
With in-place reference editing, you can edit a block reference or external
reference from within the current drawing. The valid range is 0 through 90
percent.
Xrefs Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects. (XDWGFADECTL (page
1525) system variable)
This option only affects the display on the screen. It does not affect plotting
or plot preview.

Tool Set & Status Bar Icons
Controls the size of the icons used in parts of the user interface.
Icon Size Specifies the size of the icons displayed on the Tool Sets palette and
status bar. (ICONSIZE (page 1331) system variable)
See also:
Set Up the Drawing Area

Application Tab (Application Preferences Dialog
Box)
Lists the folders in which the program searches for support, driver, menu, and
other files. Also lists optional, user-defined settings such as which dictionary
to use for checking spelling.

734 | Chapter 2 Commands

List of Options
The following options are displayed.

Support File Search Path
Specifies the folders in which the program should look for text fonts,
customization files, plug-ins, drawings to insert, linetypes, and hatch patterns
that are not in the current folder.

Working Support File Search Path
Displays the active directories that the program searches for support files
specific to your system. The list is read-only and displays valid paths from the
Support Files Search Path that exist within the current directory structure and
network mappings.

Device Driver File Search Path
Specifies the search path for device drivers for the video display, pointing
devices, printers, and plotters.
WARNING Do NOT remove DRV path and always add paths as secondary paths.

Project Files Search Path
Specifies a project name for the drawing. The project name corresponds to a
search path for external reference (xref) files associated with the project. You
can create any number of project names with associated folders, but each
drawing can have only one project name.

Customization Files
Specifies the names and locations of various types of files.

Commands | 735

Main Customization File Specifies the default location of the main
customization file (acad.cuix).
Custom Icon Location Specifies the location for custom icons referenced by
your customization files.
Command Aliases Specifies the location of the PGP file that should be loaded
when AutoCAD for Mac is started.

Help and Miscellaneous File Names
Specifies the names and locations of various types of files.
Help File Specifies the location of the local Help file. (HELPPREFIX (page 1317)
system variable)
Default Internet Location Specifies the default Internet location used by the
BROWSER (page 158) command.
Configuration File Specifies the location of the configuration file used to
store hardware device driver information.

Text Editor, Dictionary, and Font File Names
Specifies a number of optional settings.
Alternate Font File Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified
font file cannot be located. ( FONTALT (page 1298) system variable)
If you click Browse, the Alternate Font dialog box (page 740) is displayed, from
which you can choose an available font.
Font Mapping File Specifies the font mapping file to be used. ( FONTMAP
(page 1299) system variable)

Print File, Spooler, and Prolog Section Names
Specifies settings related to plotting.
Plot File Name for Legacy Plotting Scripts Specifies a default name for the
temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created with AutoCAD Release
14 or earlier. The default name is the drawing name plus the .plt file extension.
The default name used with AutoCAD 2000 and later drawings is the drawing
name-layout name plus the .plt file name extension. Some plotting device
drivers, however, use a different plot file extension.
Print Spool Executable Specifies the application to use for print spooling.
You can enter the executable file name as well as any command line arguments
you want to use. For example, you can enter myspool.bat %s to spool print
files to myspool.bat and have a unique print file name automatically generated.

736 | Chapter 2 Commands

PostScript Prolog Section Name Present for legacy reasons only. Autodesk
has dropped active support of PostScript and the PSIN, PSOUT, and PSPROLOG
commands.

Printer Support File Path
Specifies search path settings for printer support files.
Print Spooler File Location Specifies the path for print spool files.
Printer Configuration Search Path Specifies the path for printer configuration
files.
Printer Description File Search Path Specifies the path for files with a .pmp
file extension, or printer description files.
Plot Style Table Search Path Specifies the path for files with an .stb or .ctb
extension, or plot style table files (both named plot style tables and
color-dependent plot style tables).

Automatic Save File Location
Specifies the path for the file created when you select Automatically Save on
the General tab. (SAVEFILEPATH (page 1423) system variable)

Color Book Locations
Specifies the path for color book files that can be used when specifying colors
in the Color Palette dialog box (page 198). You can define multiple folders for
each path specified. This option is saved with the user profile.

Template Settings
Specifies the drawing template settings.
Drawing Template File Location Specifies the path to locate drawing template
files used by the Select Template dialog box.
Default Template File Name for QNEW Specifies the drawing template file
used by the QNEW (page 860) command.

Log File Location
Specifies the path for the log file created when you select Maintain a Log File
on the Open and Save tab. (LOGFILEPATH (page 1362) system variable)

Plot and Publish Log File Location
Specifies the path for the log file that is created when you use the PLOT (page
792) command.

Temporary Drawing File Location
Specifies the location to store temporary files. This program creates temporary
files and then deletes them when you exit the program. If you plan to run the
program from a write-protected folder (for example, if you are working on a

Commands | 737

network or opening files from a CD), specify an alternate location for your
temporary files. The folder you specify must not be write-protected.
A character limit of 255 for the combined file name and path length of
temporary files is used.
The TEMPPREFIX (page 1460) system variable (read-only) stores the current
location of temporary drawing files.

Temporary External Reference File Location
Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-loaded xref files.
(XLOADPATH (page 1527) system variable)

Texture Maps Search Path
Specifies the folders to search for rendering texture maps.

Web File Search Path
Specifies the folders to search for photometric web files.

Add
Adds a search path for the selected folder.

Remove
Removes the selected search path or file.

Options
Edits or changes the order of a selected path.
Change Path Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box,
depending on what you selected in the Files list.
Move Item Up Moves the selected search path above the preceding search
path.
Move Item Down Moves the selected search path below the following search
path.
Set as Current Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current.

Reset Hidden Messages
Resets the display of all message boxes that you marked to not display again
or to always use a specified option in them.

Reset Application Options
Displays the Reset Application Options dialog box. Click Restart AutoCAD to
restore the program defaults.
Before the program is reset, many of the files that you can customize are backed
up to an archive file with the naming convention of Settings Backup